Mitel | 50005070 | Programming instructions | Mitel 50005070 Programming instructions

MX Controller
TECHNICIAN’S HANDBOOK
Release 4.0
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
NOTICE
The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all
respects but is not warranted by Mitel Networks™ Corporation (MITEL®).
The information is subject to change without notice and should not be
construed in any way as a commitment by Mitel or any of its affiliates or
subsidiaries. Mitel and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no
responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of
this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such
changes.
No part of this document can be reproduced or transmitted in any form or
by any means - electronic or mechanical - for any purpose without written
permission from Mitel Networks Corporation.
MITEL, SX-200, SUPERSET, SUPERCONSOLE 1000, MiTAI, and
LIGHTWARE are trademarks of Mitel Networks Corporation.
Microsoft Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
SpectraLink NetLink e340, h340, 640 Wireless Telephones are
trademarks of Spectralink Corporation.
HYPERTERMINAL is a trademark of Hilgraeve Inc.
VT100 is a trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation.
All other product names specified in this document are trademarks of
their corresponding owners.
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Document # 51009229
Release 4.0
October 2006
® ™ Trademark of Mitel Networks Corporation
©Copyright 2006, Mitel Networks Corporation
All rights reserved
ii
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 : Introduction
About this Handbook ............................................................................................3
Purpose of this handbook ................................................................................3
Who this handbook is written for ......................................................................3
Where you can find more information ..............................................................4
Contacting Mitel ...............................................................................................6
Symbols used in this handbook .......................................................................7
Important safety instructions ............................................................................7
About the SX-200® ICP MX ..................................................................................8
SX-200 ICP System Packages ........................................................................8
System configurations......................................................................................9
DSP Configuration Options ............................................................................12
Cabinet Configuration Rules ..........................................................................14
Supported Peripherals ........................................................................................15
Default Database Configuration ..........................................................................16
Telephone related ..........................................................................................16
Voice mail related...........................................................................................17
Trunk related ..................................................................................................17
System related ...............................................................................................17
Chapter 2 : Basic Installation
Before you begin .................................................................................................21
Quick Installation ................................................................................................21
SX-200 ICP MX Hardware ..................................................................................23
Hardware ports and connectors .....................................................................23
Controller components ...................................................................................24
Identify the required components...................................................................25
Installation checklist .......................................................................................26
Installation overview ............................................................................................29
Installing the SX-200 ICP MX Controller .............................................................30
Install an Ethernet Switch ...................................................................................31
Small installations (under 20 phones) ............................................................31
Larger installations (over 20 phones).............................................................32
Feeding Power to IP Phones ..............................................................................33
Installing Software Using an External CompactFlash Card
(Optional Initial Install) ........................................................................................34
Installing Optional Controller Hardware ..............................................................36
Precautions ....................................................................................................36
Removing the cover .......................................................................................37
iii
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Install the Analog Option Board (AOB) .......................................................... 38
Installing Optional DSP Module(s)................................................................. 40
Installing the Optional Dual FIM Module........................................................ 42
Installing the Optional Quad CIM Module(s).................................................. 43
Installing the Optional Dual T1/E1 Framer Module(s).................................... 44
Installing a hard drive .................................................................................... 45
Installing the Stratum Clock ........................................................................... 47
Wall or Rack Mounting ....................................................................................... 48
Wall mounting the controller .......................................................................... 48
Rack mounting the controller or NSU ............................................................ 52
Installing an NSU ................................................................................................ 53
Installing SX-200 Peripheral Cabinets ................................................................ 56
FIM Connectivity ............................................................................................ 56
CIM Connectivity............................................................................................ 56
Cabinet installation and programming ........................................................... 57
Peripheral Cabinet Interface Cards and Modules.......................................... 58
Peripheral Cabinet Control and Digital Services Cards and Modules ........... 60
Peripheral Cabinet Configuration Rules ........................................................ 61
Installing an ASU ................................................................................................ 63
Installing an ASU II ............................................................................................. 65
Connecting the Phones and Trunks ................................................................... 67
ONS/CLASS, DNIC and LS/CLASS ports ..................................................... 67
IP Phones ...................................................................................................... 68
Adding a PKM .................................................................................................... 70
Requirements ................................................................................................ 70
CDE programming ......................................................................................... 71
Installation ..................................................................................................... 71
PKM to an Attendant Console ....................................................................... 73
Connecting Music on Hold, Paging
and Door Phone/Door Opener ........................................................................... 74
Music-on-Hold (MOH) interface ..................................................................... 74
Paging ........................................................................................................... 74
Door Phone/Door Opener.............................................................................. 75
Connecting a Night Bell and Alarm Device ........................................................ 76
CDE programming for a Night Bell ................................................................ 76
CDE programming for an Alarm Device ........................................................ 76
Setting up an FTP Server on a Maintenance PC ............................................... 77
CDE Programming......................................................................................... 77
System Health Check ......................................................................................... 79
iv
Table of Contents
Chapter 3 : Basic Programming
Programming Overview ......................................................................................83
Preparing to Enter Customer Data ......................................................................84
PC requirements ............................................................................................84
Serial Connection to the Controller ................................................................84
Secure Telnet Connection to the controller....................................................85
Web Interface Connection to the Controller ...................................................86
Port Usage .....................................................................................................87
Enabling MOSS Options .....................................................................................88
System Options to Avoid .....................................................................................89
Programming the Customer Data Entry
(CDE) Forms .......................................................................................................89
Programming Features for each Phone ..............................................................90
Before you begin ............................................................................................90
Programming Embedded Voice Mail ..................................................................96
CDE Programming for Embedded Voice Mail................................................96
Voice mail forms.............................................................................................97
Setting up RADs.............................................................................................99
Setting up Record a Call ..............................................................................100
Using the Administrator’s Mailbox................................................................102
Testing voice mail operation ........................................................................106
Programming Phonebook .................................................................................107
Programming an Attendant Console .................................................................108
Programming a Subattendant Set .....................................................................108
Programming a Printer Port ..............................................................................109
System Printer Port ......................................................................................109
Dataset Printer Port......................................................................................109
IP Printer Port...............................................................................................110
Programming Stations/Sets Automatically ........................................................111
Deleting a Device and All Dependent Resources .............................................112
Deleting a range of devices and dependent resources................................113
Programming a Single Line Voice Station ........................................................114
Programming a Multi-Line Set ..........................................................................115
Programming an Analog Device to a SIM2 (DNIC Phones Only) .....................116
Programming an NSU or a PRI Card in a
Peripheral Cabinet ............................................................................................116
CDE programming .......................................................................................116
IMAT Programming ......................................................................................122
Programming an Embedded PRI Trunk ............................................................129
v
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Programming an Embedded T1 Trunk ............................................................. 134
Programming Analog Trunks ............................................................................ 135
Non Dial-In trunks ........................................................................................ 135
Dial-in trunks................................................................................................ 137
DISA trunks ................................................................................................. 138
Programming T1 and PRI trunks as DISA trunks ........................................ 139
Programming ANI/DNIS on an Incoming trunk ............................................ 139
CLASS trunks .............................................................................................. 143
Running the Line Quality Test for LS Trunks............................................... 144
Programming Symbol MiNET Wireless Phones (Optional) .............................. 145
Install Symbol NetVision MiNET Phone
Administrator Tool........................................................................................ 145
Twinning the Symbol phone with a wireline
(desk) phone................................................................................................ 146
Programming IP Sockets for Hotel/ Motel terminals and ACD Monitor ............ 147
Programming Voice mail and PMS Integration ................................................ 149
Requirements .............................................................................................. 149
SX-200 ICP programming............................................................................ 150
Setting up the Ether232 ............................................................................... 150
Programming the PMS Interface on the SX-200 ICP ....................................... 151
Requirements .............................................................................................. 151
SX-200 ICP programming............................................................................ 151
Programming SpectraLink Wireless Telephones ............................................. 155
Requirements .............................................................................................. 155
Programming ............................................................................................... 155
Programming Call Forwarding - External ......................................................... 160
Feature Limitations ........................................................................................... 161
CDE Cross Reference ...................................................................................... 164
Chapter 4 : Advanced Installation and Programming
Overview .......................................................................................................... 169
Planning your Installation ................................................................................. 170
Basic PC Networking ........................................................................................ 171
Enabling the (2nd) Port on IP Phones ......................................................... 171
Virtual LANs (VLANs) ....................................................................................... 172
Configuration 1: One DHCP server per VLAN............................................. 172
Configuration 2: One external DHCP server for two VLANs........................ 175
Configuration 3: Router on a Stick............................................................... 177
Programming the controller IP address and DHCP settings........................ 178
vi
Table of Contents
Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP server (prior to Release 4.0) ..............178
Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP server (Release 4.0 and later) ...........180
Networking Mitel IP-PBXs .................................................................................182
SX-200 ICP Programming............................................................................183
Uniform Numbering Plan..............................................................................185
Chapter 5 : Routine Maintenance
Is the System Healthy? .....................................................................................189
System health checklist................................................................................189
Checking the System ........................................................................................190
Installing FRUs ..................................................................................................191
Precautions ..................................................................................................191
Power Down System....................................................................................192
Power Up System ........................................................................................192
System Reset...............................................................................................193
System Shutdown ........................................................................................193
Re-initializing the Controller .........................................................................194
Replacing the Hard Drive or CompactFlash .....................................................195
Replacing the Analog Main Board................................................................196
Other FRUs ..................................................................................................198
Performing Backups ..........................................................................................199
Backing Up a Database ...............................................................................199
Restoring a Database ..................................................................................200
Installing an Alternate Database ..................................................................201
Upgrading the System Software .......................................................................202
Upgrading from Release 1.x to Release 2.0 or later ....................................203
Upgrading from the External CompactFlash Card
(Release 2.0 or later) ...................................................................................204
Upgrading by FTP ........................................................................................206
Upgrading the NSU or PRI Card Software ........................................................207
Migrating an SX-200 EL/ML to an SX-200 ICP MX ..........................................208
Parts Required .............................................................................................209
Preparations.................................................................................................209
Migration Procedure.....................................................................................209
Replacing IP Phones ........................................................................................212
Restarting IP Phones ........................................................................................213
Upgrading Set Firmware ...................................................................................213
Boot Codes ..................................................................................................214
Firmware Revision Levels ............................................................................214
Firmware Commands...................................................................................214
vii
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Measuring LS Trunks ....................................................................................... 215
Running the Line Quality Test ..................................................................... 216
Running the Distortion Test ......................................................................... 217
Running the Echo Test ................................................................................ 217
Maintenance Commands ................................................................................. 218
Maintenance Port Characteristics................................................................ 218
Telnet Requirements ................................................................................... 218
Entering Command Sequences................................................................... 218
Logging In .................................................................................................... 219
Logging Out ................................................................................................. 219
Switching between Maintenance and CDE.................................................. 220
Displaying the Card Configuration ............................................................... 220
Showing the System Identity ....................................................................... 220
System Commands ..................................................................................... 220
Report Commands....................................................................................... 224
Traffic Measurement Commands ................................................................ 226
Log Commands ........................................................................................... 227
Diagnostic Function Commands.................................................................. 228
Backing up Log and Trap Files using Kermit .................................................... 229
Sending Logs and other System Files to an E-mail Address or FTP Server .... 230
Retrieving Logs and other System Files
using Kermit ..................................................................................................... 231
Maintenance Tips ............................................................................................. 231
Chapter 6 : Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
About this Chapter ............................................................................................ 235
Troubleshooting Tools ...................................................................................... 236
Before you Contact Technical Support ............................................................. 237
General Troubleshooting Steps ........................................................................ 238
Using the Phone Debug Option ................................................................... 238
Checking the System LEDs .............................................................................. 239
Controller LEDs ........................................................................................... 239
NSU LEDs ................................................................................................... 241
ASU LEDs ................................................................................................... 243
Troubleshooting Phones and Peripherals Problems ........................................ 244
NSU/PRI Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 247
PRI Debug Commands................................................................................ 248
Troubleshooting Analog Trunks ....................................................................... 249
Basic Troubleshooting ................................................................................. 249
Troubleshooting Signaling Problems ........................................................... 250
viii
Table of Contents
Troubleshooting T1 Trunks (D4 DS-1) ..............................................................261
Synchronization............................................................................................261
Signaling Types............................................................................................262
Test/Verify (T1) ............................................................................................262
Troubleshooting Voice Mail ...............................................................................266
SX-200 ICP Property Management
System Interface ...............................................................................................268
Property Management System Messages ...................................................268
SX-200 ICP and PMS Cannot Communicate...............................................271
Testing the PMS Interface of the PBX .........................................................271
Chapter 7 : Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair
About this Chapter ............................................................................................275
General Network Troubleshooting ....................................................................276
Check List ....................................................................................................276
Troubleshooting IP Phone Connectivity ............................................................278
Using a network analyzer to debug..............................................................278
Connectivity problems..................................................................................278
Troubleshooting IP Phone Registration .......................................................279
IP Phone Analyzer .......................................................................................287
Troubleshooting Phone Audio Quality ..............................................................289
Troubleshooting IP Trunks ................................................................................292
CDE Check List............................................................................................292
IP Check List ................................................................................................294
Troubleshooting System Boot Failure ...............................................................295
Appendix A : Default Database Values .............................................299
Appendix B : Part Numbers ...............................................................355
Appendix C : System Cabling ............................................................369
Appendix D : Handling Fiber Optic Cables.......................................383
Appendix E : Folio Views (E-Docs) Tips ...........................................387
Index
ix
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
x
Chapter 1
Introduction
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
2
Introduction
About this Handbook
Purpose of this handbook
This handbook provides
•
an overview of the system capabilities
•
installation steps
•
programming procedures
•
maintenance procedures
•
troubleshooting information
Who this handbook is written for
This handbook is for a qualified technician who has successfully
completed the SX-200® ICP Installation and Maintenance Course. The
course has two parts: basic and advanced.
SX-200 ICP Basic Installation and Maintenance Course
You need to take the Basic I & M course if you are installing the
SX-200 ICP as a voice system only.
This means that you are using the default settings for IP and you are not
planning on implementing Virtual LANs (VLANs).
The basic course is available in self-study format and you must have
completed your LIGHTWARE™ 19 RELEASE 4.0 certification.
SX-200 ICP Advanced Installation and Maintenance Course
You MUST complete the Advanced I & M course if you are planning to
•
connect a PC to the PC port on the IP Phones (enable System Option 131)
•
connect the SX-200 ICP in an existing LAN (Local Area Network)
•
use an external DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server
•
implement VLANs (Virtual LANs)
•
implement IP (Internet Protocol) Trunking
•
network to a 3300 ICP via IP trunk or QSIG
The advanced course is available in a leader-led format. You must
complete the Basic I & M course before attending the advanced course.
3
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Where you can find more information
The SX-200 ICP documentation set includes the following components:
•
•
Printed documents
-
Technician’s Handbook
-
Safety Instructions
Documents supplied on the SX-200 ICP software CD-ROM
-
SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation in Folio (NFO) format.
-
Technician’s Handbook
-
Safety Instructions
-
IMAT Online Help (installs with IMAT application)
-
Symbol® Netvision® MiNET Phone Installation Instructions (located
in the Documentation folder on the SX-200 ICP software CD-ROM)
-
Telephone, Attendant, Subattendant, Voice Mail, and Hotel/Motel
Front Desk User Guides
-
Technical Bulletins (TBs) and Release Notes (RNs).
Accessing Documentation on the software CD-ROM
1. Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2. Navigate to the Documentation folder.
3. Double-click Setup.exe to install the Technical Documentation and
Folio Viewer, the application used to view the documentation.
4. To access user guides and other documentation, go to the appropriate
Language subdirectory. Use the index.html file to locate the required
guides.
Technical Training Materials
-
SX-200 ICP Basic I & M Course Release 3.0
-
SX-200 ICP Advanced I & M Course
Release Notes
Every software release is accompanied by Release Notes, which describe
software changes, bug fixes, outstanding issues, and hardware
compatibility considerations for the new software release. Read the
Release Notes before you begin a software upgrade.
4
Introduction
Technical Bulletins
Technical Bulletins (TBs) are issued by Mitel® Technical Support to
address frequently asked questions regarding software and hardware
problems. Obtain the latest TBs from Mitel OnLine.
Mitel Knowledge Base
The Mitel Knowledge Base is a searchable database of problem-solving
information on the SX-200 ICP and other Mitel products. The database is
accessed through Mitel Online.
Accessing Mitel Online
You can access Mitel Online from the www.mitel.com Web site.
Tip: You must be a registered user to access Mitel Online.
Access Product and Technical Documentation
1. Login to Mitel OnLine.
2. Navigate to Product Documentation (Technical Documents, User
Guides, and Installation Guides) OR Knowledge Base (Release Notes
and Technical Bulletins).
View or Download a Document
To view a document:
•
Click on the name of the document.
To download a document:
•
Right-click on the name of the document and select Save Target As
OR
•
When viewing a PDF document, click the disk icon.
5
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Create Telephone User Guides with Manual Maker
1. Login to Mitel OnLine.
2. Navigate to Product Documentation.
3. Click Manual Maker.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to register and use Manual
Maker.
Accessing Your Mitel Options Password
You must obtain your Mitel Options Password through Mitel Online
(www.mitel.com). This password is required during the upgrade
procedure, so you MUST keep a proper record of it. A new password is
issued to you if you are purchasing new options. Before attempting the
software upgrade, to confirm a current password or to purchase new
options and receive a new password, call Mitel Customer Service during
normal business hours.
Helpful websites
For definitions of technical terms
•
http://www.techweb.com/encyclopedia
•
http://www.whatis.com
For networking information
•
http://www.practicallynetworked.com
•
http://www.networktroubleshooting.com
Contacting Mitel
Order Desk
You can reach the Order Desk at 1-800-796-4835.
Repair Department
You must get a Return of Merchandise Authorization (RMA) form from the
Repairs Department before sending equipment back to Mitel Network
Corp.
You can reach the Repairs Department at 1-888-222-6483.
6
Introduction
Technical Support - Mitel Dealers
Please contact Mitel Technical Support if you require technical assistance.
If you cannot resolve the problem by using the Troubleshooting chapter,
please collect the required information listed in “Before You Contact
Technical Support” on page 91 before calling Mitel Technical Support.
You can reach Technical Support at 1-800-561-0860 or 1-613-592-2122.
Symbols used in this handbook
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result
in injury or death.
Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in damage
to the equipment.
Identifies an important note or a useful tip.
Important safety instructions
Failure to follow all instructions may result in improper equipment
operation and/or risk of electrical shock.
See the system Safety Instructions that are shipped with the system for
complete safety information.
7
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
About the SX-200 ICP MX
The Mitel SX-200 Integrated Communications Platform (ICP) provides the
reliability and comprehensive features of a PBX, the ease of use and cost
effectiveness of a key system, and the productivity-enhancing applications
and networking efficiency of IP.
Tailored for small enterprises, the SX-200 ICP MX supports up to 248 IP
phones, 12 LS/CLASS circuits, and 30 IP trunks for private networking.
SX-200 ICP System Packages
The SX-200 ICP MX controller is sold alone or as a package that includes
the components shown in the table below. None of the packages include
power supplies for the phones; they must be ordered separately. For part
numbers, see Appendix B.
Table 1: SX-200 ICP MX System Packages
Basic Business Voice Only
LS/CLASS circuits
6
ONS circuits
2
DNIC circuits
2
Voice mail ports
4
DSPs
IP Phones
PKMs
Licenses
IP Phone
Voice Mailbox
TDM
ACD Agent
IP Channel
Software Options
8
Premier Business
- Voice & Data
Basic
Controller
1 Dual DSP Module
Seven 5207s
One 5220
Four 5220s
One 12-Button PKM
16
16
44
None
None
8
8
32
5
2
1 Digital Link
Voice Mail Softkey
1 Digital Link
Voice Mail Softkey
2nd Port on IP Phones
Record a Call
None
Introduction
System configurations
The controller is configured at the factory as a square key telephone
system (KTS). It can be reconfigured as a PBX or hybrid PBX/KTS by
reprogramming the default database or by installing one of the alternate
databases supplied on the software CD-ROM. For more information about
alternate databases, see page 201. Both configurations are expandable
through the purchase of additional components, including DSP resources
(see “DSP Configuration Options” on page 12 for more information).
Table 2: SX-200 ICP System MX Configuration
Basic
Configuration
Expanded
Configuration
How Expanded
6 LS/CLASS circuits
(Controller)
12 (Controller)
More than 12
Add Analog Options Card
Add Peripheral Bays (6
max)
2 ONS/CLASS circuits
(Controller)
4 (Controller)
More than 4
Add Analog Options Card
Add ASU/ASU II (8 max)
Add Peripheral Bays (6
max)
2 DNIC circuits
(Controller)
More than 2
Add Peripheral Bays (6
max)
0, 8, or 20 IP Phone
licenses depending on
system package
248 IP Phone licenses
and 30 IP trunks
Purchase additional
licenses
Expand Ethernet Switch
0, 4, or 8 IP Phones
depending on system
package
Maximum 248 IP
Purchase additional
licenses and phones
0, 4, or 20 ports of voice
mail depending on
system package
24 ports
Purchase Options and
DSP resources
(incremental)
Add standalone voice mail
system or Peripheral Bays
with Mitel Express
Messenger card(s)
0 or 4 voice mail user
licenses depending on
system package
748
More than 24
Purchase additional
licenses (incremental)
(Page 1 of 2)
9
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 2: SX-200 ICP System MX Configuration (continued)
Basic
Configuration
Expanded
Configuration
How Expanded
Three 3-party
conferences
21 3-party Conferences Purchase DSP resources.
(total 21 conferees –
can have up to 5
parties per conference)
256 MB of
CompactFlash memory
for database storage
(inside controller)
Larger capacity media
Install hard drive
Internal hard drive for
database storage
Not required
Not required
Dual DSP MMC
2 dual DSP MMC or 1
dual and 1 quad DSP
MMC or 2 quad DSP
MMC
Purchase modules
0 Links PRI-T1
4 Links PRI-T1
Purchase 2 NSUs or 2
Peripheral Bays with PRI
cards
OR
(Page 2 of 2)
10
Introduction
SX-200 ICP MX
WIRELESS
PHONES
Figure 1: Basic System
Figure 2: Expanded System
11
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
DSP Configuration Options
The SX-200 ICP MX has six DSP configurations selectable in CDE Form 04:
•
Business Option 1
•
Business Option 2
•
Hospitality Option
•
Analog Option 1, 2, and 3
The table below lists the DSP requirements for each of the DSP
configuration options. The requirements are guidelines only; the actual
number of DSPs required depends on the intended use of the system.
Table 3: DSP Configuration Options
Option Type
Base Dual DSP
(2 total)
2 Dual DSP or
1 Quad DSP
(4 total)
Add Quad DSP
(6 total)
2 Quad DSP
(8 total)
Business
Option 1
IP
(see Note)
3 conf x 3
parties
4 voice mail
8 G.729
48 IP
6 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/Class
8 conf x 3
parties
12 voice mail
8 G.729
96 IP
6 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/Class
24 T1 or 23 PRI
12 conf x 3
parties
18 voice mail
16 G.729
96 IP
96 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/Class
48 T1 or 46 PRI
12 conf x 3
parties
24 voice mail
24 G.729
192 IP
192 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
96 T1 or 92 PRI
Business
Option 2
IP
8 conf x 3
parties
8 voice mail
0 G.729
48 IP
6 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
12 conf x 3
parties
18 voice mail
0 G.729
96 IP
6 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
24 T1 or 23 PRI
18 conf x 3
parties
24 voice mail
8 G.729
96 IP
96 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
48 T1 or 46 PRI
21 conf x 3
parties
24 voice mail
16 G.729
192 IP
288 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
96 T1 or 92 PRI
Hospitality
Option
IP+TDM
8 conf x 3
parties
8 voice mail
0 G.729
96 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
8 conf x 3
parties
12 voice mail
8 G.729
48 IP
96 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
48 T1 or 46 PRI
12 conf x 3
parties
18 voice mail
16 G.729
96 IP
192 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
48 T1 or 46 PRI
12 conf x 3
parties
24 voice mail
16 G.729
248 IP
384 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
96 T1 or 92 PRI
Analog
Option 1
2 conf x 3
parties
6 voice mail
0 G.729
24 IP
288 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
48 T1 or 76 PRI
8 conf x 3
parties
18 voice mail
0 G.729
48 IP
288 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
72 T1 or 69 PRI
12 conf x 3
parties
24 voice mail
0 G.729
96 IP
288 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
72 T1 or 69 PRI
21 conf x 3
parties
24 voice mail
0 G.729
192 IP
384 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
96 T1 or 92 PRI
(Page 1 of 2)
12
Introduction
Table 3: DSP Configuration Options (continued)
Option Type
Analog
Option 2
Analog
Option 3
(Requires
Quad DSP)
Base Dual DSP
(2 total)
2 Dual DSP or
1 Quad DSP
(4 total)
Add Quad DSP
(6 total)
2 conf x 3
parties
4 voice mail
0 G.729
24 IP
384 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
48 T1 or 46 PRI
10 conf x 3
parties
12 voice mail
0 G.729
48 IP
384 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
48 T1 or 46 PRI
12 conf x 3
parties
16 voice mail
0 G.729
48 IP
480 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
48 T1 or 46 PRI
2 Quad DSP
(8 total)
21 conf x 3
parties
24 voice mail
0 G.729
96 IP
480 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
48 T1 or 46 PRI
8 conf x 3
parties
12 voice mail
0 G.729
96 IP
576 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
96 T1 or 92 PRI
(Page 2 of 2)
Notes:
1. The number of conference, voice mail, and compression
resources is fixed by the purchased option and the number of
DSP devices available; the other values are adjustable.
2. The SX-200 ICP supports the G.711 and G.729a codecs.
-
The G.711 PCM audio codec for 56/64 kbps generally
provides the best voice quality and is comparable to TDMtype connections.
-
The G.729a audio codec for 8/13 kbps provides a good
reduction in bandwidth with only minor loss in voice quality.
-
A purchasable MOSS option controls the number of G.729a
codecs available to IP devices in the system. Compression
enables more devices to share available bandwidth.
-
The option is purchasable in multiples of 8 to a maximum of
24. The default value is 0. The quantity entered must exactly
match the quantity on the MOSS sheet.
13
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
3. Installation of a hard drive is strongly advised for systems that
have more than eight voice mail ports or when Record a Call is
frequently used.
4. The MX controller can support 12 LS/CLASS, 2 DNIC, and 4 ONS
on the internal analog boards in all option configurations.
5. All T1 trunk quantities include any combination of T1/D4 or
T1/PRI.
6. The maximum system capacity is 672 TDM (ONS/DNIC) ports. In
any option configuration, trunks may be added up to a maximum
of 8 digital links (192 trunks) but only by reducing the number of
digital bays (ONS and DNIC ports) connected, so that the total
number of TDM ports does not exceed that shown in the table.
7. If System Option 82 is enabled (DSP Echo Cancellers), then one
DSP device is removed from the available pool. The number of
TDM resources (voice mail and conference) will be reduced. This
option cannot be used in a base system with compression
enabled (Business Option 1) or with a large number of TDM
devices (Analog Options 1 and 2).
Cabinet Configuration Rules
The MX controller can be expanded to include:
•
up to seven SX-200 Peripheral cabinets which provide 672 TDM ports
for ONS, OPS, DID, T1, PRI/T1
•
up to four Universal NSUs which provide eight PRI Links (192 PRI/T1
trunks)
•
up to two offboard ASUs which provide 48 ONS/CLASS circuits
14
Introduction
Supported Peripherals
The following peripherals are supported:
Table 4: Supported Peripherals
Mitel IP
Phones
Superset™
Phones
Conference
Units
PKMs
5010
4015
5303
5410
Supersonsole 1000
5020
4025
5310
5412
SIM 1
5201
4150
5415
SIM 2/AIM
5448
Symbol Netvision
5207
Misc
5212
ONS/CLASS phone
5215
Headset
5220
5224
5330
5340
Note: The SX-200 ICP (R2.1 or later) also supports the Dual Mode (or DPLite)
5215 and 5220 IP phones. The Dual Mode phones look the same as the original
5215 and 5220 phones. Check the label on the underside of the phone to
determine which type it is. The originals are identified as 5215 or 5220 “Dual
Port.” .
Note: 5212 and 5224 IP Phones require SX-200 ICP Release 3.0 or
higher.
Note: 5330 and 5340 IP Phones require SX-200 ICP Release 4.0 or
higher and 512 MB Flash or hard drive.
15
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Default Database Configuration
The CDE Forms are factory-set with default values that make it easier and
faster to program the system. The defaults allow you to install the
SX-200 ICP in a square KTS (key telephone system) configuration with up
to 20 IP phones and two analog terminals (phone, fax, or modem) and
make extension-to-extension calls without doing any programming. You
will also be able to receive fax and modem calls, but will have to program
ARS to make external calls from ONS devices.
Two alternate databases are provided on the SX-200 ICP software CD: a
blank database that has no programming and a Premier database for the
SX-200 ICP Premier system. A database programmed with 4-digit extension
numbers is also available on Mitel Online. See page 201 for more
information about the alternate databases and how to install them.
The default database includes the following:
Telephone related
•
3 digit extension numbers that start at extension 100
•
IP phone extensions that start at extension 102
•
Ports on the Controller
-
6 LS CLASS
-
2 ONS (extensions 201 and 202)
-
2 DNIC (extension 198 is the SUPERCONSOLE 1000® and 199 is
the sub attendant.)
•
7 default classes of service (COS 1 – 7). They are for IP Phones, ONS,
Subattendant, Attendant Console, LS/CLASS, Voice Mail, and IP trunks.
•
default key programming on the sets for a 6-line square system
•
default ring cadences
•
all phones assigned to paging group 1
•
the handsfree microphone is not automatically turned on when
receiving a page (auto-latched).
16
Introduction
Voice mail related
•
4 Voice mail ports (Business 1 Option with Dual DSP); 8 ports
(Business 2 and Hospitality Options with Dual DSP)
•
20 Voice mail mailboxes are assigned with the same extension
numbers as the
•
•
-
first 20 IP phones (extension 100 to 119)
-
Attendant Console (SUPERCONSOLE 1000; extension 198)
-
Subattendant (extension 199)
-
2 ONS ports (extensions 200 and 201)
Hunt Group for Voice mail ports with pilot number 300
-
COS 6 and
-
reserve extension 301 to 304 for voice mail port extensions
system-wide Call Forward No Answer to voice mail for all calls.
Trunk related
•
trunks in form 14 are non-dial-in to the CO line keys
•
LS trunk circuit descriptor defaulted as CLASS
•
one LS trunk programmed to Key 1 on IP Phones
•
no ARS, no dial 9 for trunk access
System related
•
default system options
•
default feature access codes
•
the default music port (located on the analog mainboard) is ON
•
the default paging port (located on the analog mainboard) is ON
•
the night bell extension is 340
•
SMDR/CDE Print default to ON
•
default DHCP settings and a SX-200 ICP Controller default IP address
(192.168.1.2) to match (factory-set).
Note: See Appendix A for a list of default values in the programming forms.
17
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
18
Chapter 2
Basic Installation
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
20
Basic Installation
Before you begin
A successful installation of the SX-200 ICP MX depends on careful
planning, especially when integrating the system into an existing data
network.For detailed planning information, see the Engineering Guidelines
in the Documentation folder on the SX-200 ICP software CD-ROM.
Appendix B of the Handbook provides a summary of the Guidelines.
CAUTION:Only experienced network administrators should
integrate the SX-200 ICP MX into a customer's LAN.
Quick Installation
You can quickly install a system configured with Business Option 1 if your
installation does not require any purchasable MOSS Options or optional
controller hardware.
If you are adding MOSS Options, complete the installation by enabling the
options in CDE Form 04, System Options/System Timers. For more
information, see, “Enabling MOSS Options” on page 88.
If you have optional controller hardware to install, follow the procedure on
page 30.
Note: Premier Business systems use the Premier database which must be
installed before enabling the MOSS Options. For more information, see
“Installing an Alternate Database” on page 201.
To install a basic system:
1. Mount the controller.
2. Connect the ground lug at the back of the controller to a ground
connection.
3. Connect the hardware:
-
Connect an Ethernet Switch to the Controller’s Ethernet port with a
Cat 5 cable.
Note: The Ethernet port on the controller is auto-sensing, allowing you to
use either a crossover or a straight-through cable.
-
Connect the IP phones to the Ethernet Switch ports using Cat 5 cable.
21
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
-
Connect a breakout box to the amphenol connector at the back of
the controller. For amphenol connector Onboard Analog/DNIC Tip
and Ring Assignments, see page 371.
-
Connect the LS CLASS lines and any ONS and DNIC phones to
the breakout box.
-
Connect a Music on Hold source, Pager, Night Bells, and any other
optional devices to the back of the controller; see pages 74-76 for
details.
4. Power up the controller.
•
The Alarms LEDs on the controller flash and the IP Phones display
IP addresses.
5. Wait while the controller boots up.
•
The boot sequence is finished when the Major Alarm LED is the
only flashing LED and the IP phones display “Use SuperKey to
send PIN.”
•
All phones connected to the controller are now functional.
6. Enter the IP Set Registration PIN numbers on the IP phones (default
*** + extension number).
7. Verify that the system is working; see “System Health Check” on
page 79.
22
Basic Installation
SX-200 ICP MX Hardware
Hardware ports and connectors
Figure 3: Controller front panel
Figure 4: Controller rear panel
23
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Controller components
Figure 5: Controller Components
24
Basic Installation
Identify the required components
The range of possible system configurations is determined by the type and
number of controller components and external units (NSUs and Peripheral
Cabinets) included.
Table 5: System Components
System components
Basic Controller
Capabilities
•
6 LS/CLASS, 2 ONS/CLASS and 2 DNIC
circuits
•
2 PFT (Power Fail Transfer) circuits
•
MOH (Music On Hold) port to connect an
external audio source
•
Loudspeaker port to connect to an external
paging system
•
Dry contacts for Alarm, Door Opener Relay
and Auxiliary Ringer
•
RS232 ports for Printer and Maintenance
•
Onboard Real-Time Clock
•
2 CIM ports to support up to 2 TDM/Digital
Bays
•
Internal hard drive for system software and
database storage
Optional components:
Analog Option Board
Provides 6 additional LS/CLASS and 2
ONS/CLASS circuits.
Dual or Quad DSP MMC
Provides more resources for conferencing, voice
mail and other applications.
Stratum 3 clock module
For digital trunks.
Quad CIM Module
Four ports that provide connectivity to Peripheral
Cabinets or NSUs.
Dual FIM Module
Two ports that provide connectivity to Peripheral
Cabinets or NSUs.
Dual T1/E1 Framer Module
(Rev. 3)
Two ports that provide connectivity to T1/D4 or PRI
trunks.
(Page 1 of 2)
25
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 5: System Components (continued)
System components
Network Services Unit
Capabilities
Supports digital trunk protocols for ISDN PRI
(NI2_STANDARD, NI2_5ESS, NI2_GTD5), and
QSIG (QSIG_ISO), DMS 100/250, 4ESS
Analog Services Unit (ASU) Provides 24 ONS/CLASS circuits.
ASU II
Provides 16 ONS/CLASS circuits or 12 ONS/4 LS
combination.
SX-200 EL Peripheral
Cabinets
Up to seven Peripheral Cabinets can be
connected to provide 672 TDM ports.
CompactFlash card
256 MB; for on-site software installation upgrades.
(Page 2 of 2)
Installation checklist
Tools
ˆ Static strap
ˆ Phillips screwdriver (#1 and #2)
Use proper fitting screwdrivers to prevent damaging components
and fasteners.
System Hardware and Software
ˆ An SX-200 ICP MX Controller with internal hard drive
ˆ Optional hardware (see the previous table)
ˆ Release 3.0 software
ˆ A Layer 2 Ethernet switch
ˆ IP phones
Note: Release 4.0 will not install the 5330/5340 firmware load on systems
using 256 MB CompactFlash. To use the full feature set of this phone with
the SX-200 ICP, you need a 512 MB CompactFlash or an internal hard
drive. Flash-based systems that do not plan to use this phone can upgrade
to Release 4.0 without hardware changes.
26
Basic Installation
Cables and connectors
ˆ Category 5 (CAT5) cable for all LAN devices (IP phones and computers)
ˆ CAT3 cable for any analog phones connected to the system
ˆ RJ45 cable and connectors
ˆ RJ45 crossover cable
ˆ Up to ten CIM cables to connect the SX-200 ICP Controller to
Peripheral Cabinet(s), NSUs and ASUs.
ˆ FIM or CIM cables if connecting Peripheral Cabinets or NSUs or ASUs
ˆ A power cable for the SX-200 ICP Controller (supplied)
Cable plugs must meet FCC Rules part 68 subpart F for
dimensions and registration. Use of non-conforming plugs can
cause intermittent connections.
PC requirements
ˆ Windows NT/98/2000/ME/XP PC or laptop
ˆ Internet Explorer version 5.5 with service pack 2, or version 6
(recommended) for client-side rendering and 128 bit encryption
(required for access to Mitel Online).
ˆ Network Interface Card: Full Duplex 10/100M (100M recommended)
ˆ a serial cable to connect a PC to the SX-200 ICP Controller
ˆ FTP Server—used for software upgrades, database backups, and
uploading maintenance logs
ˆ CompactFlash Reader with Read/Write capability
ˆ (Optional) secure Telnet client that supports SSL/TLS (Mitel Telnet
client recommended)
Line requirements
ˆ LS/CLASS lines
ˆ ONS/CLASS lines
ˆ PRI-T1 lines (requires a Dual T1/E1 Framer Module, a Dual FIM
Module connected to a Network Services Unit, or a Dual FIM or Quad
CIM Module connected to a Peripheral Cabinet and PRI card)
27
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
LAN requirements
ˆ Pre-installation questionnaire complete
ˆ A subnet
ˆ (Advanced) SMTP server IP address for forwarding voice mail to
e-mail and for e-mail notification of 911 calls and system alarms
ˆ (Advanced) IMAP Server IP address for forwarding voice mail to e-mail
ˆ (Advanced) Customer data network information (for example, DNS
server information)
ˆ (Advanced) Router if using IP trunking or connecting to the Internet or
other network
IP Address Requirements
You need IP addresses for
•
The SX-200 ICP Controller
•
Each IP phone (a range of IP addresses assigned by the DHCP Server
or statically assigned)
•
A router or gateway (if using)
Important: The SX-200 ICP Controller uses the following reserved
IP addresses:
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.11.1 - 192.168.11.255
192.168.12.1 - 192.168.12.255
192.168.13.1 - 192.168.13.255
Ensure no other devices on the network use IP addresses within
these ranges.
Other
ˆ Feature codes and extension number plans
ˆ A list of customer-purchased options
ˆ An uninterruptible power supply (recommended)
ˆ Power source with surge protection for IP Phones; see page 31 for
powering options.
ˆ (Optional) Music on Hold source (radio, tape player etc.)
28
Basic Installation
ˆ (Optional) External paging amplifiers and speakers
ˆ (Optional) Auxiliary ringer (Night Bells)
ˆ (Optional) Door Phone/Opener
ˆ (Optional) Alarm device to signal system alarms
ˆ (Optional) SMDR printer
Installation overview
ˆ Install SX-200 ICP Controller
ˆ Install optional controller hardware
ˆ Install an Ethernet switch
ˆ Feed power to the IP Phones
ˆ Initialize the System
ˆ (Optional) Load software on an External CompactFlash Card
ˆ (Optional) Install NSU
ˆ (Optional) Install ASU
ˆ (Optional) Install ASU II
ˆ (Optional) Install SX-200 Peripheral Cabinets
ˆ (Optional) Install Music on Hold, Paging, Auxiliary Ringer, Door
Phone/Opener, and Alarm Device
ˆ Connect the Phones and Lines
ˆ (Optional) Install Programmable Key Modules
ˆ Install an FTP Server
ˆ Verify the system
29
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Installing the SX-200 ICP MX Controller
The SX-200 ICP system is shipped with the system software and a default
database installed. The optional components (DSP modules, Analog
Option Module, etc.) are field-installed.
Note: Premier Business systems use the Premier database which must be
installed before enabling the MOSS Options. For more information, see
“Installing an Alternate Database” on page 201.
1. Install optional controller hardware or peripheral units according to the
instructions on the pages indicated.
Analog Option Board: page 38
DSP Modules: page 40
Dual FIM Module: page 42
Quad CIM Module: page 43
Dual T1/E1 Framer Module: page 44
Upgraded Internal CompactFlash or Hard Drive: page 45
Stratum Clock Module: see page 47
Network Services Unit, page 53
SX-200 Peripheral Cabinets, age 56.
2. Wall mount the units, rack mount them, or place them on a desk or
shelf; see page 31 for instructions.
Note: The NSU is NOT wall-mountable.
3. Connect the ground stud on the rear panel of the controller to a hardwired ground using 18 AWG (0.75mm 2/) gauge wire. The wire must
have green or yellow insulation. Crimp the wire to the ground source.
4. Connect a PC to the Maintenance port on the controller; see page 84.
5. Connect the trunks and phones. See “Connecting the Phones and
Trunks” on page 67.
6. If you are NOT installing software or optional hardware in the controller,
power up the system.
30
Basic Installation
Install an Ethernet Switch
You must connect all IP devices to a Layer 2 Ethernet Switch. Hubs should
not be used. The type of Ethernet Switch required depends on the number
of IP Phones you need to install.
Important: Careful planning is essential when installing the
SX-200 ICP for voice and data. For planning information, including
a pre- installation questionnaire, see Chapter 4, Advanced
Installation and Programming.
Small installations (under 20 phones)
•
Connect the Ethernet Switch to the SX-200 ICP Controller Ethernet
Port with an Ethernet cable.
The Ethernet port on the Controller is auto-sensing, allowing you to
use a crossover or straight-through cable.
•
Connect the Ethernet Switch power cord to a power source.
31
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Larger installations (over 20 phones)
If you are connecting several switches together, connect them in a
tree-type structure. Daisy-chaining switches is not recommended because
all switches become involved in connections from one end of the chain to
another. Layering reduces this unnecessary traffic.
32
Basic Installation
Feeding Power to IP Phones
The IP Phones require power that can be provided by
•
an external supply such as a 24-volt adapter (required by the 5010 and
5020 IP Phone; connects to back of phone) or 48-volt power brick
(required by 5200 series IP Phones; see Figure 6 for connections).
•
a multi-port Ethernet Inline Power Module (such as the PowerDsine
24PT Inline Power Unit)
•
Layer 2 switches with integral power feed
None of the above are included with the system or phones. All except the
powered Layer 2 switch can be ordered from Mitel. See Appendix B for
part numbers.
Note: Power backup to the IP Phones, the SX-200 ICP, and the Ethernet
switches is required to maintain service during a power failure.
CAUTION:Ensure that the powered cable from the inline power
adapter is installed in the proper connector on the IP Phone. DO
NOT plug it in to the connector (if available) designed for a PC
or other Ethernet devices (Layer 2 port).
Figure 6: Power Brick Connections for 5200 Series IP Phones
33
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Installing Software Using an External
CompactFlash Card (Optional Initial Install)
The SX-200 ICP is shipped from the factory with the system software and
a default database installed. Perform this procedure only if you,
•
are upgrading the system software on site
•
are upgrading Release 2.0 or later software
Note: Systems with Release 1.x software can only be upgraded on site using
a CompactFlash card. For more information, see “Upgrading the System
Software” on page 202.
•
require a language other than the default English for voice mail prompts
or a second language for bilingual voice mail operation
•
are replacing the internal CompactFlash or installing a hard drive for
systems equipped with internal CompactFlash. For replacement
instructions, see page 195
•
are re-initializing the controller by re-installing the system software
Note: The “Initial” power-up and the reset in this procedure will each take 5
to 10 minutes.
To install software using an external CompactFlash card:
Important: Use only Mitel-supplied CompactFlash cards. DO NOT
partition the card and DO NOT copy files to it before proceeding
with the software installation.
1. Launch the SX-200 ICP Installation program on the supplied
CD-ROM.
2. Select “Initial [CompactFlash Card] Installation”, and then click Next.
3. Select the voice mail language(s) that you want to install, and then
click Next The default is English and is not selectable.
Note: The additional languages enable the embedded voice mail system to
operate with bilingual prompts. Bilingual prompts is a purchasable MOSS
option.
4. Specify the drive letter of the CompactFlash Writer/Reader.
34
Basic Installation
5. Select Format to format the CompactFlash card.
Note: When formatting the CompactFlash card, specify FAT as the file
system.
6. Select a database, then click Next.
7. Click Next to begin installing the software on the CompactFlash card.
8. Click Finish to complete the installation.
Note: Wait until the computer completes writing to the CompactFlash
card before removing it. To ensure completion, DO NOT click STOP before
EJECT.
Note: Certain PC CompactFlash readers have problems with cards larger
than 128M. They report that copying is complete when in fact not all the files
have been copied. If in doubt, eject the card, re-insert it, and then use
Windows Explorer to confirm that all files are present.
9. Insert the CompactFlash card into the controller.
10. Press the RESET button on the controller or power it down then back up.
The system boots from the CompactFlash card, and then runs the
install utility. When installation is complete, the system automatically
reboots.
Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the system is
rebooting as indicated by the LED adjacent to the card slot.
Wait for the LED to turn green before removing the card.
IMPORTANT: Re-initializing a working system with a database
that has different IP addressing information than the database it is
replacing will force the IP Phones to reboot. The phones take 10 to
15 minutes to return to service once the system is re-initialized.
11. Remove the CompactFlash card from the controller when the LED
adjacent to the card slot turns green.
IMPORTANT: If the card was removed and reinserted (or replaced
by another card), the system will detect it and attempt an upgrade
or installation when it reboots. Both processes take the system out
of service. To prevent unnecessary loss of service, always remove
the external card once the system is up and running.
12. Log in to CDE and enable MOSS sheet options (if any) in Form 04.
35
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Installing Optional Controller Hardware
•
Hard drive (for systems equipped with internal CompactFlash card)
•
Analog Option Board
•
Dual FIM Option Module
•
Quad CIM Module
•
Dual T1/EI Frame Module
•
Stratum Clock Module
•
Dual or Quad DSP Option Modules
Precautions
WARNING:INSTRUCTIONS MUST BE FOLLOWED EXPLICITLY
WHEN THEY INVOLVE WORK WITH AND CHANGES TO THE
PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY OF THE UNIT.
Observe the following precautions when working on the system, particularly
when handling PCB cards or using test equipment to measure voltages.
•
When installing or replacing PCB cards turn power off, but maintain
the ground connections to the equipment (see Note below). Power
must be OFF when inserting or removing cards. These cards are
identified with appropriate warnings on their faceplates.
•
Always wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling printed circuit
cards. Handle PCB cards only by the edges and avoid contact with any
exposed electrical connections. When removing a new card from its
package, touch the package to the cabinet frame first to release any
static voltage buildup, prior to removing the card and inserting it into
the equipment.
•
Conductive packages (antistatic packaging) should be grounded prior
to opening them to remove the contents, and similarly grounded prior
to placing a card in the package. Place suspected faulty cards in
conductive packages to prevent further possible damage to the cards.
Cards that are not correctly packed in antistatic packaging when
returned will not be covered by any warranty.
Use proper fitting Phillips screwdrivers (#1 or #2) to prevent
damaging components and fasteners.
36
Basic Installation
Removing the cover
To remove the SX-200 ICP Controller cover:
1. Unplug the power cord from the controller and disconnect all cables.
2. Remove the controller from the rack or wall and place it on a suitable
work area (if applicable).
3. Remove the four screws from the top of the controller.
4. Slide the cover forward until it catches, then tilt the cover upward to
remove it.
5. Remove the front faceplate by clipping it off from the bottom of the unit.
Note: It may be easier to pry the end off first, and then slide your fingers along
the bottom edge of the faceplate to the other end.
.
37
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
To replace the cover:
1. Turn the controller until the back panel is facing forward.
2. Lift the lock for the AC power cord and place the cover at an angle to
hook onto the back of the unit.
3. Straighten and slide the cover forward as far as it will go.
4. Secure the cover by inserting and snugly securing the two screws on
the back panel.
5. Rotate the controller until the front panel is facing forward.
6. Secure the screws on the top of the unit.
7. Clip on the front face-plate taking care not to damage the protruding
FIM connectors.
8. Reinstall the controller on the wall or in the rack (if applicable).
9. Reconnect all cables.
Install the Analog Option Board (AOB)
1. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
2. Remove the cover and the front panel.
3. Remove the Stratum Clock Module (if installed).
4. Attach the standoffs as shown in the following figure.
38
Basic Installation
5. Lower the AOB onto the standoffs. Ensure it is well-seated.
6. Attach the screws.
7. Re-install the Stratum Clock Module (if it was removed).
8. Replace the cover and the front panel.
9. Connect lines or devices to the AOB ports and complete the required
programming; see the following sections for more information:
ONS telephones: “Connecting the Phones and Trunks” on page 67
and “Programming a Single Line Voice Station” on page 114
LS trunks: “Connecting the Phones and Trunks” on page 67 and
“Programming Analog Trunks” on page 135
Relays: “Connecting Music on Hold, Paging and Door Phone/Door
Opener” on page 74 and “Connecting a Night Bell and Alarm Device”
on page 76
Paging: “Connecting Music on Hold, Paging and Door Phone/Door
Opener” on page 74.
39
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Installing Optional DSP Module(s)
The basic SX-200 ICP MX has one Dual DSP module installed in Module
Slot 3. Additional DSPs can be added by installing Dual or Quad DSPs
modules in the Module Slots 2 and 3 as shown in the following figure. For
information on determining DSP requirements, see “DSP Configuration
Options” on page 12.
40
Basic Installation
To install the optional DSP Modules:
1. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
2. Remove the top cover (see page 37).
3. Repeat the steps below for each DSP module you install:
-
Remove the DSP module from its packaging.
-
Remove the blanking panel covering the Module Slot into which
you are installing the DSP Module.
-
Remove the small PCB (™).
-
Install the module cover on DSP module (š).
-
Insert the DSP module in the appropriate slot.
-
Secure the DSP module to the controller using the screws provided.
4. Replace the cover.
41
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Installing the Optional Dual FIM Module
The Dual FIM Module provides connectivity to a Peripheral Cabinet and/or
to an NSU. The MX can support up to two Dual FIMs installed in MMC slots
1 and 2.
There are three fiber length variants of the FIM Module: 1, 5, or 14 km.
Both ends must use the same variant.
Notes:
1. The NSU supports the 1 km variant only.
2. The SX-200 ICP does not support single FIM modules.
To install a Dual FIM Module:
1. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
2. Remove the top cover and the front panel (see page 37).
3. Insert the new FIM II Module into Module slot 1 or 2 on the Main Board
connector.
4. Attach the screws.
5. Replace the front panel and the top cover.
42
Basic Installation
Installing the Optional Quad CIM Module(s)
The optional Quad CIM module has four ports that provide connectivity to
Peripheral Cabinets, NSUs, and ASUs using Category 5 UTP copper cabling.
The system can support up to two Quad CIM Modules installed in Module
slots 1 and 2.
To install a Quad CIM Module:
1. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
2. Remove the top cover and the front panel (see page 37).
3. Insert the Quad CIM into Module slot 1 or 2 on the Main Board
connector.
4. Attach the screws.
5. Replace the front panel and the top cover.
43
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Installing the Optional Dual T1/E1 Framer Module(s)
The Dual T1/E1 Framer module has two digital trunk ports, each of which
can be programmed to support either T1/D4 or PRI. Up to two modules can
be installed in MMC slots 1 and 2 of the MX controller.
The system can support up to two Dual T1/E1 Framer Modules installed in
Module slots 1 and 2.
To install a Dual T1/E1 Framer Module:
1. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
2. Remove the top cover and the front panel (see page 37).
3. Insert the Dual T1/E1 Framer into Module slot 1 or 2 on the Main Board
connector.
4. Attach the screws.
5. Replace the front panel and the top cover.
6. Program the module in CDE:
44
-
Assign the module a bay number in Form 53, Bay Location.
-
Program the T1 link; see page 134.
Basic Installation
Installing a hard drive
If your controller uses an internal 256 MB CompactFlash for software and
database storage, you can increase capacity for voice mail messages and
recorded calls by replacing the card with a system hard drive.
Note: some systems are originally equipped with hard drives.
The hard drive is available as FRU from Mitel (see Appendix Bfor part
numbers).
Notes:
1. A hard drive is strongly recommended for systems that have
more than eight voice mail ports or when Record a Call is
frequently used.
2. Use Mitel-supplied hard drives only; those obtained elsewhere
are not supported.
Use this procedure to upgrade systems only. To replace faulty cards or drives,
use the media replacement procedure on page 195.
To install an optional hard drive:
1. Establish a serial connection to the Maintenance port on the controller.
For instructions, see “Serial Connection to the Controller” on page 84.
2. As a precaution, perform a full database backup; for instructions, see
page 199. Skip this step if the system is new and has no database
changes to preserve.
3. If an external CompactFlash card is inserted in the controller, remove it.
4. Use the System > Restart > Shutdown command in Maintenance to
stop the system.
5. When prompted on the PC, power down the controller.
6. Remove the cover (see page 37).
7. Remove the internal CompactFlash card. Keep it on hand.
8. Install the hard drive as follows,
a. Remove the drive from its packaging and set the jumpers on the
drive to the Master setting.
45
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
b. Insert the hard drive as shown in the above figure.
c. Connect the power and IDE cables to the corresponding connectors
on the hard drive and main board. The cables are keyed for proper
connection.
d. Secure the hard drive to the controller using the screws provided.
9. Replace the cover.
10. Insert the internal CompactFlash card previously removed into the
external card slot.
11. Restore power to the controller.
12. Re-establish a serial connection to the controller and wait while the
new media is formatted and the contents of the CompactFlash card
copied to it.
13. When prompted, press return four times to log in to CDE/Maintenance.
14. Verify that the phones are working and that calls can be made.
15. Remove the CompactFlash card from the external slot.
46
Basic Installation
Installing the Stratum Clock
1. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
2. Remove the top cover and front panel (see page 37).
3. Gently seat the Clock Module onto the Main Board.
4. Attach the screws.
5. Replace the top cover and front panel.
6. To check whether the system recognizes the Stratum clock card, log
into Maintenance and use the System > Show > Identity command. It
should show the clock as ST3.
47
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Wall or Rack Mounting
The SX-200 ICP controller is wall and rack mountable. The NSU is
rack-mountable only.
Wall mounting the controller
When mounting the controller on a wall, use the supplied long bracket and
small bracket and the supplied screws (#10).
.
CAUTION:Make sure the wall material is capable of supporting
the weight of the unit. Mitel is not responsible for units
damaged as a result of improper wall mounting.
1. Turn the controller upside down.
2. Locate the two holes on the bottom of the Controller as shown in the
following figure.
3. Remove the two feet as shown below.
48
Basic Installation
4. Assemble the two supplied screws and two nuts as shown below.
5. Screw the assembled nuts and screws into the holes as shown below.
49
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
6. Screw the supplied small bracket onto the bottom of the controller as
shown.
7. Mount the bracket onto the wall.
a. Pre-drill two pilot holes into two wall studs with 16" centers.
b. Orient the bracket over the two holes as shown below.
c. Insert a screw into the hole on the left side of the bracket.
d. Insert a screw into the hole on the slot on the right side of the
bracket.
8. Hang the controller onto the mounted bracket as shown below.
Position it with the front panel facing to one side so that the ports and
connectors are accessible.
50
Basic Installation
.
9. Insert a screw into the bottom bracket to stabilize the controller as
shown below.
51
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Rack mounting the controller or NSU
Use the Rack Mount Kit (Part Number: 50004150) to rack mount the
Controller. The NSU requires a different kit that is supplied with the unit.
CAUTION:When installing the system in an enclosed rack, you
MUST provide adequate ventilation to ensure that the
maximum ambient temperature inside the rack does not
exceed 40°C/104°F.
CAUTION:Ensure that a hazardous condition does not result
from any uneven mechanical loading.
CAUTION:When using the system in a rack, you should
consider the connection of the equipment to the power supply
circuit and the effect that overloading of circuits might have on
overcurrent protection and supply wiring. When addressing
this concern, refer to the system’s ratings label.
1. Attach the brackets to the rack.
2. Slide the unit into the brackets.
3. Secure the unit to the brackets using the supplied thumbscrews. The
screws fasten to the underside of the unit and fit into the notch on the
bracket.
52
Basic Installation
Installing an NSU
Figure 7: NSU Front View
Figure 8: NSU Rear View
The NSU connects to the Controller via a CIM or FIM cable.
Note: The FIM Module in the controller must be the 1K variant, which
is the only variant that the NSU supports.
1. Mount and secure the NSU in the desired location.
2. Set the L0/L1 port DIP switches to the appropriate termination mode
and impedance; see Figure 9, “NSU DIP Switch Location,” on
page 54. The default is network termination mode (switch 6).
3. Set the two Message Link DIP switches to the down position. The left
switch is partially hidden by the NSU rear panel.
4. Connect a fiber optic cable between the NSU FIM and the controller FIM.
Or, connect a Cat 5 crossover cable between one of the CIM ports on the
NSU and one of the CIM ports on the SX-200 ICP controller.
5. Connect the NSU L0 and/or L1 port to the remote system (the PSTN
or another system). See the table below for the pinout.
6. Install IMAT from the SX-200 ICP software CD.
7. Connect power to the NSU.
53
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
8. Program the NSU using CDE and IMAT; see page 116 for
programming instructions.
9. After programming the NSU, plug the T1 cable from the demarcation
point for the T1 provided by the Carrier to either L0 or L1 on the back
of the NSU. Each connector (L0 or L1) has LED indicators beside the
connector to indicate sync or not. For example:
-
Red LED indicates no sync (check connection or switch 6 is in
wrong position).
-
Flashing green LED indicates synch but D-channel is not
synchronized (check programming (see table below) on IMATs to
ensure correct protocol).
-
Solid green LED indicates that D-channels and B-channels are all
in sync and PRI trunks on NSU are ready to process calls.
.
Table 6: Pinouts for T1 Line/Network Termination
Pin
Line
Termination Mode
Network
Termination Mode
1
Tx Ring
Rx Ring
2
Tx Tip
Rx Tip
3
Unused
Unused
4
Rx Ring
Tx Ring
5
Rx Tip
Tx Tip
6
Unused
Unused
7
Unused
Unused
8
Unused
Unused
Figure 9: NSU DIP Switch Location
54
Basic Installation
Table 7: NSU DIP Switch Setting
DIP Switch
Function
Settings
Notes
TX Ground
Down: Ground
Up: Floating
Set to Up
RX Ground
Down: Ground
Up: Floating
Set to Up
3
E1 Twisted Pair
cable selector
(RJ45, PRI)
Down: Enabled
Up: Disabled
Set to Up
120 ohm impedance
(Europe)
4
TI Cable Selector
(T1/D4)
Down: Enabled
Up: Disabled
100 ohm impedance
Default - Down
EI, coaxial cable
selector (R2)
Down: Enabled
Up: Disabled
Set to Up
75 ohm impedance
(Europe)
Line/Network
Termination
Selector
Down: Line
Up: Network
If connecting to Telco, set
switch to Up
1
2
5
6
55
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Installing SX-200 Peripheral Cabinets
You can connect up to seven Peripheral Cabinets to the MX controller via
CIM or FIM cables. The peripheral cabinet types can be any mixture of SX-200
ELx, EL, ML or LIGHT.
FIM Connectivity
There are three variants of the FIM II modules.The same variant of fiber
interface module (1, 5, or 14 km) must be at both ends.
Note: The SX-200 ICP does not support single FIM modules.
CIM Connectivity
There is only one variant of the CIM. In the peripheral cabinets, a CIM sits
on a Bay Control Card III (BCC III), on a Peripheral Interface Module
Carrier card, or on a PRI card.
•
The CIM (Copper Interface Module) supports a distance of up to 30
meters or 100 feet.
•
The CIM requires Category 5 UTP crossover cable (TX and RX pairs
reversed) with RJ45 connectors.
56
Basic Installation
Cabinet installation and programming
The following procedure applies to the installation of new peripheral
cabinets. Cabinets migrating from an existing SX-200 EL/ML installation
install in a different manner; see “Migrating an SX-200 EL/ML to an
SX-200 ICP” in the SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation for more
information
1. Install the peripheral cabinet (including Bay Power Supply, Bay Control
Card, interface cards and required Fiber or Copper Interface Module).
2. Complete the peripheral interface cabling.
See Tip and Ring Assignment tables in Appendix C (page 369) for
cabling and cross connecting the peripheral cabinets.
3. Connect one end of the fiber or copper cable to the interface module
in the control cabinet and the other end to the CIM or FIM connector in
the controller.
4. Power up the cabinet.
5. Enter CDE mode on the maintenance terminal.
6. In Form 04 (System Options/System Timers)
-
Enable the required number of TDM Bays (Option 133)
-
Make sure there are enough TDM devices available (Options 103).
7. In Form 53 (Bay Location Assignment)
-
Assign a bay number to the CIM or FIM ports used to connect the
peripheral cabinets.
8. In Form 01 (System Configuration)
-
Configure the cards (select node type as required).
9. Complete the remaining CDE programming for the cards.
For detailed programming information, refer to the SX-200 ICP Technical
Documentation.
57
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Peripheral Cabinet Interface Cards and Modules
The following table lists the peripheral cabinet interface cards and modules
supported by the SX-200 ICP.
Table 8: Peripheral Cabinet Interface Cards and Modules
Interface Card
Devices supported
Circuits
Maximum loop resistance
/loop lengths
DID Trunk card
(high power)
Direct Inward Dial (DID)
trunks from CO
6
Loop resistance: 2450 W
(includes set resistance)
Loop length:
26 AWG - 7986 m (25955 ft.)
22 AWG - 19995 m (64984 ft.)
LS/GS Trunk
card
(low power)
Ground start and Loop
start CO trunks
6
not applicable
LS/CLASS
Trunk card
(low power)
Loop Start CO trunks
8
not applicable
ONS/CLASS
Line card
(low power)
DTMF telephone sets
Rotary telephone sets
12
External loop resistance:
600 W (includes set resistance)
External wire resistance:
400 W
External loop length:
22 AWG - 3560 m (11700 ft.)
24 AWG - 2250m (7400 ft.)
OPS Line card
(low power)
DTMF telephone sets
Rotary telephone sets
6
External loop resistance: 1800 W
(includes set resistance)
External wire resistance:
1600 W
External loop length:
26 AWG - 7225 m (23700 ft.)
22 AWG - 18290 m (60000 ft.)
(Page 1 of 2)
58
Basic Installation
Table 8: Peripheral Cabinet Interface Cards and Modules (continued)
Interface Card
Devices supported
Digital Line card
(DNIC)
(low power;
high power if a
console is
connected to a
SX-200 LIGHT)
SUPERSET 4001
SUPERSET 4015
SUPERSET 4025
SUPERSET 4090
SUPERSET 4125
SUPERSET 4150
SUPERSET 401+
SUPERSET 410
SUPERSET 420
SUPERSET 430
SUPERSET 3DN
SUPERSET 4DN
DATASET 1100
DATASET 2100
SUPERCONSOLE 1000
SUPERSET 7000
DSS/BLF Interface Unit
MOH/Pager Unit
12
24 AWG (25 IWG) - 1000 m
(3300 ft.) including up to 50 m
(162.5 ft.) 22 AWG (22 IWG)
quad wire and up to 3 m
modular line cord without bridge
taps
Mitel Express
Messenger
Card
(DNIC, low
power)
2, 4, 6, and 8 voice mail
ports
NA
NA
Universal card
(high power)
Four modules:
MOH/Paging
DTMF Receiver,
E&M Trunk, Console
Music-on
Hold/Paging
module
Circuits
Maximum loop resistance
/loop lengths
Total power rating of modules on
Universal card cannot exceed 10
1 each
power rating = 1
loop length - not applicable
DTMF receiver
module
DTMF telephone
keypads and end-to-end
signaling equipment.
4
power rating = 2
loop length - not applicable
E&M trunk
module
E&M tie trunk
1
power rating = 3
26 AWG - 1068 m (3500 ft.)
24 AWG - 1708 m (5600 ft.)
22 AWG - 2715m (8900 ft.)
LS/CLASS
Trunk
module
4 LS/CLASS trunks plus
SFT for circuit 1 (SPINE
Bay only)
4
External loop resistance: 1600 W
(Page 2 of 2)
59
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Peripheral Cabinet Control and Digital Services
Cards and Modules
The following table lists the peripheral cabinet control and digital services
cards and modules supported by the SX-200 ICP
Table 9: Digital Control and Digital Services Cards and Modules
Card or Module
Important Details
Bay Control Card II
One for each bay
Bay Control Card III
Requires the SX-200 ELx cabinet. Note: BCC III cards are
not compatible with Revision 1 of the 200 bays. Rev 2 bays
are required to supply the proper card mounting and
subsequent module mounting.
T1 Trunk Card
A 24 circuit, high power card to CO or to another PBX,
maximum distance is 655 feet of shielded cable to the
Channel Service Unit
PRI Card
For the SX-200 ELx cabinet Rev 4.4 or greater
(PN 9109-600-002-NA)
Supports the T1/E1 module and the FIM II or CIM. The PRI
card is not included in the high power card count. The PRI
card is a separate bay.
T1/E1 module
Provides up to 2 T1 links of ISDN connectivity (24 or 48
channels) on the PRI card. Provides up to 2 T1 links of T1/D4
connectivity on the BCC III.
FIM II
Installs on the BCC III or the PRI card.
Copper Interface
Module (CIM)
Installs on the BCC III or the PRI card.
DSP Module (Single)
Installs on the BCC III. Provides CLASS functionality for 8
ONS/CLASS Line cards, 16 DTMF receivers and 16
conference bridges for Record a Call.
60
Basic Installation
Peripheral Cabinet Configuration Rules
FIM Carrier Assignments
•
The SX-200 RM peripheral cabinet supports the Peripheral Interface
Module Carrier (FIM II or CIM)
•
The SX-200 RM peripheral cabinet supports the Peripheral FIM
Carrier II
•
The SX-200 LIGHT peripheral cabinet supports the Peripheral FIM
Carrier
T1 Trunk Card Configuration Rules
•
The system software supports up to two T1 links (includes T1 links
from T1/E1 modules and T1 cards) in any bay with a maximum of eight
T1 links in the system.
•
The MOSS System Option 96, Number of Links (0-8) monitors how
many T1 links (from T1/E1 modules) that the system will support. This
count includes T1 links from the T1/E1 modules on the PRI cards and
BCC III cards. The count does not include T1 links from the T1 cards.
•
PIC slot 5 must be left vacant when a T1 card is installed in slot 10 or
when Link 1 from a T1/E1 module on a BCC III is programmed.
•
PIC slot 6 must be left vacant when a T1 card is installed in slot 11 or
when Link 2 from a T1/E1 module on a BCC III is programmed.
Note: Do not insert T1 trunk cards into slots 5 or 6 of a peripheral cabinet.
Digital Line Card Configuration Rules for SX-200 RM Cabinets
Systems with BCC II cards have performance limits:
•
In high traffic configurations, keep the Digital Line Card (DLC) count to
a maximum of 7 per bay when using BCC II cards. If you have 8 DLCs
per bay, keep the device count to 84 or less. This will avoid slow
softkey response during peak traffic periods.
•
With 2 T1 cards in a bay, do not add more than 5 DLCs or 60 devices.
This avoids dial tone delays during peak traffic periods.
•
With 1 T1 card in a bay, do not add more than 6 DLCs or 72 devices.
This avoids dial tone delays during peak traffic periods.
Tip: A BCC III supports 8 DLCs per bay and is therefore ideal for high traffic
conditions.
61
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
PRI Card Configuration Rules for SX-200 RM Cabinets
•
The PRI card requires a Stratum 3 clock MMC installed in the SX-200
ICP controller.
•
The peripheral cabinet supports one or two PRI cards in Slot 10 or 11.
Inserting the PRI card in any other slot besides 10 or 11 will cause
the power supply to fail.
•
The PRI card will appear as a peripheral bay on the SX-200 ICP
controller, and the two links of the T1/E1 module installed on the PRI
card will appear as slots 5 and 6 on that bay (not on the peripheral
cabinet).
•
The PRI card bay number is designated in Form 53.
•
The PRI card requires a FIM II or CIM to connect to the SX-200 ICP
controller.
•
The S1 switch settings on the PRI Card inform the T1 module of the
location of the clock source. Both switches must be set to closed as
indicated in the following illustration (to designate the interface module
as the clock source).
62
Basic Installation
Installing an ASU
Up to two ASUs can be connected to the controller via CIM ports. There is
no need to power down the controller to make the connection.
Figure 10: ASU Front View
Figure 11: ASU Rear View
To install an ASU:
1. Mount the ASU.
Note: The ASU can be located up to 30 meters (100 feet) away from the
SX-200 ICP.
2. Connect a cross-over Category 5 cable with RJ-45 connector to the
CIM port on the ASU and a free CIM port on the controller.
3. Complete telephony cabling for the ASU. See Appendix C for ASU Tip
and Ring assignments.
4. Connect power to the ASU.
5. Wait for the CIM LEDs to turn on indicating that the CIM link is
synchronized.
6. Program the ASU in CDE.
63
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
CDE Programming
1. In Form 53 (Bay Location Assignment)
-
Assign a bay number to the CIM ports used to connect the ASU to
the controller.
2. In Form 01 (System Configuration)
-
Program the bays assigned in Form 53 as node type ASU BAY.
-
Configure the card(s) in slot 1 and 2 only.
3. Complete the remaining CDE programming for the cards. See
“Programming a Single Line Voice Station” on page 114.
64
Basic Installation
Installing an ASU II
ASU II units can be connected to the controller via Quad CIM or embedded
CIM ports. The controller supports two Quad CIMs and up to eight ASU IIs.
There is no need to power down the controller to make the connection.
Figure 12: ASU II Front View
Figure 13: ASU II Rear View
65
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
To install an ASU II:
1. Mount the ASU II.
Note: The ASU II can be located up to 30 meters (100 feet) away
from the SX-200 ICP
2. Connect a cross-over Category 5 cable with RJ-45 connector to the
CIM port on the ASU II and a free CIM port on the controller.
3. Complete telephony cabling for the ASU II. See Appendix C for ASU II
connector pinout.
4. Connect power to the ASU II.
5. Wait for the CIM LEDs to turn on indicating that the CIM link is
synchronized.
6. Program the ASU II in CDE.
CDE Programming
1. In Form 53 (Bay Location Assignment)
-
Assign a bay number to the CIM ports used to connect the ASU II
to the controller.
2. In Form 01 (System Configuration)
-
Program the bays assigned in Form 53 as node type ASU BAY.
-
Configure the card(s) in slot 1 and 2 only.
3. For ONS devices, complete the remaining CDE programming for the
cards. See “Programming a Single Line Voice Station” on page 114.
4. Program LS trunk devices in CDE Form 14 (Non-Dial-In Trunk) or CDE
Form 15 (Dial-In Trunks).
66
Basic Installation
Connecting the Phones and Trunks
ONS/CLASS, DNIC and LS/CLASS ports
Cross connect the ONS, DNIC and LS/CLASS ports to lines at the
breakout box according to the Amphenol connector pin assignments in
table below.
After connecting the LS trunks, use the Line Quality Test to program the
audio configuration settings. For more information, see “Running the Line
Quality Test for LS Trunks” on page 144.
Table 10: Amphenol Connector Pin Assignments
Pair(s)
Circuit Type
Bay/Slot/Circuit
Default DN
1/26 and 2/27
ONS/CLASS
1/13/3, 1/13/4
200 and 201
3/28 and 4/29
ONS/CLASS
1/13/5, 1/13/6
Unassigned
5/30
Not Used
6/31 and 7/32
DNIC
8/33 to 10/35
1/13/1, 1/13/2
Not Used
11/36 to 16/41
LS/CLASS
1/13/7 - 1/13/12
17/42 to 22/47
LS/CLASS
1/13/13 - 1/13/18
23/48 to 25/50
198 - SC 1000
199 - Subattendant
Not Used
Notes:
1. ONS/CLASS ports do not support high-voltage messagewaiting lamps.
2. Circuits 1/13/5 and 1/13/6 are on the Analog Option Board.
3. Trunks circuits 1/13/7 and 1/13/8 are System Fail Transfer
trunks. In the event of a system or power failure, the trunks
connect to ONS circuits 1/13/3 and 1/13/4 respectively.
4. ONS ports are not designed with the necessary safety protection
for off premise connections. ONS ports must not be used to
connect to off premise phones.
67
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
IP Phones
1. Ensure that the controller is connected to the Layer 2 switch.
2. Plug the cables from the IP phones into the Layer 2 switch ports.
3. Connect the IP Phone to a power source; see page 33 for powering
options.
4. Wait while the IP phone boots. After booting, the display on the phone
shows “USE Superkey TO SEND PIN.” On 5201 IP phones, the MW
lamp is lit.
5. Using the IP phone's dial pad, enter the IP Set Registration PIN access
code (default, ***) followed by the IP Phone extension number.
Note: You MUST use a default IP Phone extension number (102 - 117) or
a number previously programmed in CDE. You cannot use extension
numbers 198 and 199; they are reserved for the Console and Subattendant
station in the default database.
6. Press Superkey (or Hold for 5201 and 5207 IP phones).The phone is
now ready for use. (The type of phone and its MAC address is
automatically registered with the controller in Form 09)
68
Basic Installation
.
Note: 5215 and 5010 IP phones will fail to register on a system that has a
Default or Premier database because of the line appearances programmed
on keys 8 and 10—keys that exist on the 5207 but not on the 5215 or the
5010. To register these phones, first delete the line appearances in Form
09, or follow the phone replacement procedure on the next page to delete
all key programming.
Note: Release 4.0 will not install the 5330/5340 firmware load on systems
using 256 MB CompactFlash. To use the full feature set of this phone with
the SX-200 ICP, you need a 512 MB CompactFlash or an internal hard
drive. Flash-based systems that do not plan to use this phone can upgrade
to Release 4.0 without hardware changes.
Note:
69
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Adding a PKM
A Mitel Programmable Key Module (PKM) provides the user with
additional personal keys for their telephone set.
Table 11: PKM Models
Model
Number of
Keys
Connects to
Number of PKMs that
can be attached
PKM 48
48
SUPERSET 4025
SUPERSET 4125
SUPERSET 4150
SUPERCONSOLE 1000
2
PKM 12
12
SUPERSET 4025
SUPERSET 4125
SUPERSET 4150
1
5415 PKM
48
2
5020 IP
5410 PKM
12
5448 PKM
48
5412 PKM
12
1
5220 IP
5224 IP
2
1
Note: The 5448 PKM, and 5412 PKM are the only programmable key
modules qualified by Mitel for connection to Mitel telephones.
Requirements
Interface Modules/Units
•
The PKM 48 and PKM 12 require a SUPERSET Interface Module
(SIM1 or SIM2) in the attached phone.
•
A DSS/BLF Interface Unit is required to attach a PKM 48 to an older
model SUPERCONSOLE 1000 (part numbers 9189-000-001 and
9189-000-003).
•
THE PKM 5415 and 5410 require a Mitel 5421 Interface Module in the
attached phone.
•
The 5448 PKM and 5412 PKM require a Programmable Key Module
Interface Module (5422 PKM IM) in the attached phone.
70
Basic Installation
Power
All PKMs are powered by an AC adapter that attaches either to the
Interface Module or to the host phone.
Adapter
Connects to...
Adapter
Included?
SIM 1/SIM 2
No
Phone (see Warning)
Yes
Phone
No
Console (Backlit version - PN
9189-000-300/1only)
or
DSS/BLF Interface Unit
No
Host
SS 4025
Voltage
Part Number
12V
SS 4125
SS 4150
5020 IP
5220 IP
24V
50000690
50002790*
12V
700063021
5224 IP
Console
Yes
* Universal model
WARNING: Never plug a power supply into a SIM1or a SIM2
installed in a SUPERSET 4150 or SUPERSET 4125 telephone. If
you do, you will lose the full duplex functionality of the speaker
phone.
CDE programming
Associate the PKM with the attached phone in Form 09, Desktop Device
Assignments.
Installation
Any connection of this set to an off-premise application, an out of
plant application, or to any other exposed plant application may
result in a safety hazard, and/or defective operation, and/or
equipment damage.
71
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Notes:
1. Ensure that the SUPERSET 4025, SUPERSET 4125, or 4150
telephone has the latest firmware upgrade available on the
firmware status command in maintenance; see page 213.
2. The PKM 12, PKM 48, 5415 PKM, 5410 PKM, 5448 PKM, and
5412 PKM are the only programmable key modules qualified by
Mitel for connection to Mitel telephones.
Figure 14: PKM Connections to a SUPERSET 4025
.
Figure 15: PKM Connections to a SUPERSET 4125/ 4150
72
Basic Installation
Figure 16: PKM Connections to a 5020 IP, 5220 IP & 5224 IP Phone
PKM to an Attendant Console
The PKM 48 provides an attendant console user with 48 DSS/BLF keys.
Up to two PKM 48 devices can be attached.
SUPERCONSOLE 1000 part numbers 9189-000-300 and 9189-000-301
can directly connect up to two PKM 48 devices. Direct connection requires
the purchasable MOSS System Option 102.
SUPERCONSOLE 1000 part numbers 9189-000-001 and 9189-000-003
require a DSS/BLF Interface unit to associate the PKM 48 devices. The
DSS/BLF Interface unit requires a power adapter and needs to be
programmed in Form 09 to associate with the PKM.
Note: The SUPERCONSOLE 1000 supports the connection of PKM 48
devices or a printer, both are not supported.
73
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Connecting Music on Hold, Paging
and Door Phone/Door Opener
Music-on-Hold (MOH) interface
The mini (1/8" - 3.5 mm) phono jack on the back panel of the SX-200 ICP
controller provides an interface to an external music source (radio, CD
player, etc.) for Music on Hold.
Input signals must be in the range of 10 to 100 mVrms. Any DC voltage
applied to the input must be less than 50 VDC.
Note: Powering down the SX-200 ICP redirects the MOH source to the paging
output. To stop the music from being heard over the pager, power down both
the MOH source and paging amplifier before powering down the controller.
CDE Programming
MOH requires no CDE programming in the default database. If a different
database is used, assign Music-on-Hold to PLID n/13/29/0 where “n” is the
IP Bay number (default 1) in Form 18.
Paging
The controller provides a single dedicated paging circuits for the
connection of customer-provided paging equipment. The equipment
connects to the DB-9 on the front of the controller. See Appendix C for
connector pinouts and relay states.
CDE Programming
The default database has programming for single zone paging to Zone 1,
which any station can access by dialing *12. No additional programming is
required.
If using a different database, complete the following programming:
1. In Form 18 (Miscellaneous System Ports), program a paging device.
2. Enable COS Option 303 (Paging Zone 1 Access) in the Class of Service
of each extension that requires access to the paging equipment.
74
Basic Installation
Door Phone/Door Opener
Customer-provided door phone units (up to four) can be connected to ONS
circuits to provide two-way communication between an entryway and
designated extensions. Door entry is controlled by the general-use relays
in the controller—three at the front panel DB-9 connector and one at the
rear panel RJ-45 connector. Each relay connects to an electric lock that is
operated by key presses at the designated extension(s). See Appendix C
for connector pinouts and relay states.
The relay contacts are rated at 90mA @60 Vac or Vdc peak and are
normally open.
CDE Programming
1. In Form 18, assign an extension number to a Door Relay.
2. In Form 09, enter the Door Relay extension number from Form 18 into
the ASSOC field of the ONS door phone. Assign the door phone a
Name (e.g., Door Phone) to identify it on the door answerer’s display.
3. In Form 19, assign the door phone to its own tenant group and
program Station Dial 0 Routing to direct calls from the door phone to
an answering position.
4. (Optional) Program an Open Door feature key to the door answering
phones.
5. Set COS Option 115 in the door phone’s COS to ring the door
answerer the required length of time (default - 30 seconds).
Note: If you have a Subattendant phone or a console, you can set call
forwarding on the Door Phone to ring a destination instead of programming
it as described above.
75
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Connecting a Night Bell and Alarm Device
Night bells and devices such a lamps used to signal Critical alarms
connect to the general-use relays via the DB-9 and RJ-45 connectors. See
Appendix C for connector pinouts and relay states.
The night bell and alarm device each require an independent power supply.
The contacts are rated at 90mA @60 Vac or Vdc peak. Connection of the
bell or alarm device must be through an auxiliary relay if the total current
requirement exceeds the relay contact ratings.
All equipment (bell, power supply, etc.) are customer-supplied.
CDE programming for a Night Bell
The default database contains the required CDE programming for Night
Bell operation If using a different database, complete the following
programming:
1. In Form 18 (Miscellaneous System Ports), assign an extension
number to the night bell extension (default 340) at bay/slot/circuit/
subcircuit n/13/29/01, where “n” is the IP bay number (default 1).
2. In Form 14 (Non-Dial in Trunks), assign the night bell extension as
night answer point.
CDE programming for an Alarm Device
•
76
In Form 18 (Miscellaneous System Ports), assign Major Alarm to
bay/slot/circuit/subcircuit n/13/29/2, where “n” is the IP bay number
(default 1).
Basic Installation
Setting up an FTP Server on a Maintenance PC
An FTP server is required to back up all configuration data and voice mail
messages in the controller. The server is also used to download new
software to the controller through its built-in FTP client and to upload
Maintenance logs.
Any FTP server application designed for the Windows environment will
work. Windows 2000 and XP have one built into them. Others can be
downloaded for free from the Internet.
Server setup varies by vendor; the basic steps are provided below. For
specific instructions, see the vendor’s documentation.
The PC hosting the FTP server must connect to the controller through a
TCP/IP (LAN) connection. Connecting through the serial Maintenance port
on the controller will not work.
CDE Programming
•
In Form 04, System Options/System Timers
-
•
Enable Option 109, Remote Software Download.
In Form 47, System IP, Subform 01
-
Enter the IP address of the FTP server and the user name and
password from Step 2 of the FTP server setup procedure.
For information on upgrading the controller software via FTP, see page 202.
For information on backing up and restoring the controller database via
FTP, see page 199.
Note: If future attempts to connect to the FTP server fail, check the IP address
of the PC to see if it has changed. Follow the steps above to reprogram the
system with the new address.
FTP Server Setup
1. Create a directory (or directories) on the PC to hold the files you will
transfer to and from the controller—example,
C:\FTPdir\backups
C:\FTPdir\software
C:\FTPdir\logs
Note: Ensure that the folders are writable.
77
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
2. In the server application,
-
Create a User for password-protected logins or allow Anonymous
(no password required) logins.
The default database is programmed to allow Anonymous logins.
The default user name is FTP.
-
Set up the paths to the directories you created in step 1.
-
Enable read/write access to directories.
3. Restart the server.
Note: To verify that the FTP Server works, log into it from the PC. Go to the
CMD prompt (DOS) and enter ftp < IP Address of the FTP Server >. Look for
the message “Anonymous user logged in” or a prompt to enter a user name.
78
Basic Installation
System Health Check
Complete the following procedure to verify that the system is working
properly.
1. Press Superkey followed by the prime line/intercom key (bottom key,
or bottom-right key when the phone has two rows of personal keys).
The extension number appears in the phone display. Record the
extension numbers.
2. Verify that you can make calls between the IP phones.
3. If an analog phone is connected to an ONS port (extensions 201 to
203) on the controller, verify that you can call it from an IP phone.
4. Place a call into the system and verify that the call rings all IP and
DNIC phones as they should with the default key system configuration.
5. Verify that you can place an external call from the IP phones.
Note: If you are not using the default database, you must program ARS to
access an outside line.
6. If you cannot perform all of the above tasks, check your cable
connections. If the problem persists, see Basic Troubleshooting and
Repair (p. 233).
7. Proceed to Chapter 3, Basic Programming.
79
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
80
Chapter 3
Basic Programming
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
82
Basic Programming
Programming Overview
This chapter provides the key procedures to follow when programming the
system. Refer to the SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation for
comprehensive and detailed programming information.
The key steps to programming the system are
ˆ Prepare to enter customer data
ˆ Enable your purchased MOSS options
ˆ Program the features for each phone
ˆ Program Embedded Voice Mail
ˆ Program Phonebook
ˆ Program Analog Trunks
ˆ Run the Line Quality test
Optional programming:
ˆ Program the Attendant Console
ˆ Program a Subattendant Set
ˆ Program a Printer Port
ˆ Program Single Line / Multi-Line Sets
ˆ Program an Analog Device to a SIM2
ˆ Program Symbol MiNET Wireless Phones
ˆ Programming an NSU or a PRI Card in a Peripheral Cabinet
ˆ Programming a T1 Trunk
ˆ Program Datasets for Hotel/Motel or ACD
ˆ Program the PMS Interface
ˆ Program Call Forwarding - External
83
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Preparing to Enter Customer Data
You can use a desktop or laptop computer to program the controller on-site
or from a remote location.
PC requirements
•
Windows 98, NT, 2000 Professional, ME or XP
•
for serial connections, a VT100™ emulator such as HyperTerminal
•
for remote or LAN-based connections, a secure Telnet client that
supports SSL/TLS (Mitel Telnet client version 1.0.0.1 or later
recommended), or a web browser (Internet Explorer 6 or Mozilla
Firefox) to access the SX-200 ICP Web Interface
•
a Network Interface Card (NIC)
The PC can connect to the controller via a serial connection to the
Maintenance port or via a secure Telnet connection to port 2000.
Serial Connection to the Controller
1. Connect an RS-232 straight DTE serial cable between the controller's
Maintenance port and the PC's serial port.
2. Program the PC's serial port (from the communication program) with
the following settings:
Baud Rate: 9600 or 19200
Stop Bits: 1
Data Bits: 8
Flow Control: None
Parity: None
3. Verify the connection as follows:
-
In the VT100 emulator or other communications program, press
RETURN several times.
While the maintenance session is active, do not disconnect the serial cable
or attempt to open another maintenance session with a Telnet connection.
Doing so will cause an error message stating that CDE is currently in use.
84
Basic Programming
Secure Telnet Connection to the controller
Telnet is a terminal emulation program for TCP/IP networks such as the
Internet. To enable a Telnet connection between a PC and the controller,
the PC must be equipped with a secure Telnet client that supports
SSL/TLS. The Mitel Telnet client is recommended.
With the controller connected to the LAN and the PC connected to the LAN
or Internet:
1. Install and then launch the secure Telnet client.
2. Enter the hostname or IP address of the controller, and port 2000.
For example, to open a connection with the Mitel Telnet client, enter:
open 192.168.1.2 2000
The IP address in the example is the default; use Form 47 to check or
change it
3. Log in to SSL/TLS with login name ‘installer’ and default password
‘1000.’
4. Select a Terminal Type.
5. Select an Application.
6. Log in to the application with username ‘installer; maint1; maint2;
supervisor; or attendant’ and default password ‘1000.’
While the maintenance session is active, do not disconnect the Ethernet
cable or attempt to open another maintenance session with a serial
connection. Doing so will cause an error message stating that CDE is
currently in use.
85
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Web Interface Connection to the Controller
A web browser can be used to connect to the SX-200 ICP from the LAN
and manage the system using the embedded SX-200 ICP Web Interface.
Before using the SX-200 ICP Web Interface, configure the management
PC as follows:
•
disable your web browser's pop-up blocker software
•
install Sun Java plugin version 1.5 or later
With the controller connected to the LAN and the PC connected to the LAN
or Internet:
1. Launch the web browser (IE 6.x or Mozilla Firefox).
2. Enter http://<controller IP or hostname>
For example, http://192.168.1.2
The IP address in the example is the default; use Form 47 to check or
change it.
3. Log in to the SX-200 ICP Web Interface with login name ‘installer’ and
default password ‘1000.’
A CDE session will open.
While the maintenance session is active, do not disconnect the Ethernet
cable or attempt to open another maintenance session with a serial
connection. Doing so will cause an error message stating that CDE is
currently in use.
86
Basic Programming
Port Usage
If the SX-200 ICP is operating behind a firewall, you may need to open the
following ports.
Table 12: Port Usage for IP Trunks
Function
Transport
Port
AMC Communications
TCP
22
DNS
UDP
53
DHCP Server
UDP
67
DHCP Client
UDP
68
TFTP
UDP
69
HTTP
TCP
80
HTTPS
TCP
443
IP trunk signalling
TCP
1066
Secure IP trunk signalling
TCP
1067
Telnet to CDE/MTCE
TCP
2000
Telnet to 6000 MAS
TCP
2005
IMAT
TCP
6543
MiNet Server
TCP
6800
VM CMPS Server
TCP
6830
MiNet Client
TCP
6900
MiTAI™
TCP
8000
MiTAI (SSL)
TCP
8001
Phone Rx B1
UDP
9000
Phone Rx B2
UDP
9002
E2T IP
UDP
50000 to 50127
User Defined (Hotel PMS/Call Log)
TCP
61320 to 61328
87
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Enabling MOSS Options
MOSS options provide additional functionality or capacity to the system. If
this is a new system and you have purchased options, such as additional
voice mailboxes or additional IP set licenses, you must enable them.
Note: Before enabling MOSS Options in a Premier Business system, replace
the factory-installed default database with the Premier database provided on
the software CD-ROM. Replacing the database prevents conflicts with Option
114 (Maximum IP Sets). The conflict is caused by the different number of IP
phones programmed in the two databases. For information on replacing
databases, see “Installing an Alternate Database” on page 201.
To enable MOSS options:
1. Select CDE Form 04.
2. Press ENTER MOC and enter the Mitel Options Code printed on the
MOSS Sheet that is included with the system software package.
3. Enter the Mitel Options password to activate the purchased options. The
password must be the password that is printed on the MOSS sheet.
4. Program any other required options.
5. Select Confirm if prompted to reset the controller.
6. After the system resets, go into Maintenance and revise Alarm
Thresholds to prevent unnecessary alarms.
Notes:
1. Attempts to enable unpurchased options causes the system to
respond with PASSWORD/OPTIONS CONFLICT -- "QUIT" TO
EXIT -- "ENTER" TO RE-EDIT. Conflicts are resolved by
entering the correct password; a system reset is not required.
2. The system warns if changing an option requires a reset. The
reset is automatic and occurs when the change is confirmed.
3. If a database from another system is installed in the controller, the
System ID and Password will no longer match. Phone service will
be lost (some phones may appear to be in service, but will display
SYSTEM BUSY when they go offhook) and a MOSS alarm
message will display in the CDE forms header. Enabling the
options using the above procedure clears the alarm and restores
phone service.
.
88
Basic Programming
System Options to Avoid
Certain options in Form 04 could cause unexpected behaviors in system
operation if changed from their factory-set (default) values.
Table 13: System Options to Avoid
Option #
Option Name
Default
60
Tone Plan
NA
68
SX-200 ICP DSP DTMF Receiver Channels
(0...7)
7
69
DTMF ON Timer (5-15 in 10 ms increments);
9 (90 ms)
70
DTMF OFF Timer (5-15 in 10 ms increments);
9 (90 ms)
71
Slot 10 FIM Capacity (2 or 3 Bays)
2
72
Slot 11 FIM Capacity (2 or 3 Bays)
2
Programming the Customer Data Entry
(CDE) Forms
The CDE Forms are factory-set with default values that make programming
the system faster and easier. The defaults allow you to install the system
and connect up to 20 IP phones plus two analog terminals (phone, fax, or
modem) and place extension-to-extension calls without doing any
programming. You will also be able to receive fax and modem calls, but will
have to program ARS to make external calls from ONS devices.
The default database configures the system to operate as a square key
system with six trunk appearances per phone.
Note: The default numbering plan uses three-digit extension numbers. If you
require a four-digit plan, either reprogram Forms 9, 17, and 50 or install the
four-digit database available on Mitel Online. For more information, see
“Installing an Alternate Database” on page 201.
89
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Programming Features for each Phone
Before you begin
•
Ensure that the phone-related MOSS options are specified in CDE
Form 04, System Options.
•
Enable COS options for features that are COS dependent.
To program features for IP phones:
•
Program the appropriate features for each phone either from the
phones (using Superkey) or in the Expand Set Subform for Form 09.
The table below shows the codes to enter when programming features
that are not selectable via SUPERKEY.
The figures on page 92 show the key numbers required for
programming features via CDE.
A list of the features and the phones that support them is in Appendix D.
Table 14: Feature Codes
Code
Feature Key
Code
Feature
00
Speedcall (See Note)
14
Night Answer
01
Forward All
15
Forward Call
02
Account Code
18
Release
03
Do Not Disturb
19
Single Flash
04
Auto Answer
20
Double Flash
05
Music
21
Headset Mode
06
Direct Page
22
Handset Mute
07
PA Paging
23
Call Park
08
Pickup
24
System Park
09
Campon (I Will Wait)
25
Forward Always
10
Callback
26
Forward Busy
11
Swap (Trade Calls)
27
Forward No Answer
12
Privacy Release
28
Forward Busy/No Answer
(Page 1 of 2)
90
Basic Programming
Table 14: Feature Codes (continued)
Code
13
Feature Key
Code
Feature
Override (Intrude)
To program features using Feature codes:
•
Using the phone dialpad, enter the Program Feature Key access code.
•
Press a programmable key.
•
Enter the feature code listed above.
•
Press SPEAKER or CANCEL.
Note: After dialing 00, dial the number to be stored.
(Page 2 of 2)
91
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
The programmable keys on 5010 and 5215 IP Phones are numbered as
follows:
Note: Key 1 is reserved for the phone’s prime directory number.
The programmable keys on 5207 (not shown), 5020 and 5220 IP Phones
are numbered as follows
92
Basic Programming
The programmable keys on 5212 and 5330 (not shown) IP Phones are
numbered as follows
93
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
The programmable keys on 5224 and 5340 (not shown) IP Phones are
numbered as follows
The keys on the 5448 PKM are numbered as follows:
94
Basic Programming
The keys on the 5412 PKM are numbered as follows:
95
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Programming Embedded Voice Mail
Note: Embedded voice mail Release 6.22 (included in SX-200 ICP Releases
2.0 and 2.1) now supports notification on every new message regardless of
whether or not notification for previous messages has already been
answered. This feature is normally deactivated by default and may only be
enabled or disabled by accessing the Administrator's mailbox.
CDE Programming for Embedded Voice Mail
The default database includes most of the programming required for a fully
operational voice mail system. The defaults are as follows:
•
•
16 Voice Mail mailboxes are assigned with the same extension
numbers as the first 16 IP phones (extension 102 to 117)
-
Attendant Console (SUPERCONSOLE 1000; extension 198)
-
Subattendant (extension 199)
-
Two ONS ports (extensions 201 and 202)
Hunt Group for Voice Mail ports with pilot number 300
-
COS 6 and
-
extension 301 to 324 for voice mail ports (default is from 301 to 304)
•
System-wide Call Forward No Answer to voice mail, for internal and
external calls
•
Maximum number of saved messages per mailbox is 10, which the
system deletes after 15 days.
Voice mail programming that is NOT provided in the default database
includes:
•
Auto Attendant Setup
•
Bilingual Prompting
•
Mailbox Greetings and Names
•
Distribution Lists
•
RAD Setup
•
Record a Call
•
PMS Integration
96
Basic Programming
•
Open and closed greetings
Note: The default password for mailboxes is 1111.
See “CDE Programming for Embedded Voice Mail” in the Technical Reference
for programming requirements when not using the default database.
Voice mail forms
Use the following CDE forms to complete the voice mail programming:
Table 15: Voice Mail Options
Form
49
Options
Used to set the following system-wide parameters:
• Default Prompt Language
• Alternate Prompt Language and Language Change Number (for
bilingual operation)
• Fax Destination Number
• Message Notification
• Digital Pager Callback Number
• Auto Attendant Transfer to Any Extension
• Auto Attendant Transfer Restrictions
• Directory Voice Prompt for First/Last Name
• Generate Account Codes in SMDR (for Message Notification Calls
• Personal Contact Numbers
• Synchronize Business Open/Closed Greetings with System
Day/Night mode
• Business Hours
• Length of Mailbox numbers
• Length of passcodes
• PMS Protocol (for PMS integration)
• RAD Greeting Setup
• SMTP/IMAP Server Addresses (required for Unified Messaging)
(Page 1 of 2)
97
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 15: Voice Mail Options (continued)
Form
50
Options
Used to add and delete mailboxes and to customize the following
mailbox settings:
• Mailbox type (extension, guest, information-only, transfer-only, etc.)
• Message Notification
• Forward of Voice Mail to E-mail using SMTP or IMAP (Unified
Messaging - standard)
• Routing for Multi-Level Auto Attendant and Personal Contacts
• Operation Extension
• Language
• Play Message Envelope? (priority, date, time, and caller ID)
• Maximum Message Storage
• Delete Saved Messages
• Set Password
• Personal Contacts and Menus (for Multi-Level Auto Attendant)
Note: Mailbox creation and setup can be done automatically for each
new extension added in Form 09 by enabling Option 277 in the
extension's Class of Service (Form 03). If System Options 107
(Lodging), 108 (Property Management System) or 124 (Voice Mail
Property Management System) are enabled, the mailboxes created will
be GUEST instead of EXTENSION type mailboxes. Form 50 is used
to customize mailbox following initial setup.
51
Used to set up distribution lists of system-wide use.
Note: For each list created, record a name for identification purposes.
(Page 2 of 2)
98
Basic Programming
Setting up RADs
Before you begin,
•
determine how the customer intends to use the RADs.
•
map the expected call flow to determine how many messages are
required and the order of play.
•
script the messages and say them several times to ascertain how
much time they take.
•
verify that sufficient voice mail ports and DSP resources are available;
see DSP Configuration Options, page 12.
Note: All embedded voice mail ports can operate as dedicated RAD ports.
However, a least one non-RAD port is required to record RAD greetings; to
administer the voice mail system by telephone; and for message notification
by pager.
When configuring voice mail ports, ensure that some of the last ports
are not configured as RAD ports to avoid any potential conflicts with
message notification. It is recommended that at least two or three
ports be left free for message notification dependant upon system
usage. Embedded voice mail will attempt to use the last
programmed voice mail port that is available for message
notification. If the last port is not available, the second last port will
be attempted and if that port is busy, the third last port and so on.
Embedded voice mail will continue in this fashion until it finds a free
port but message notification will not function properly on a port
assigned to RAD.
To program RADs:
1. Form 04, System Options/System Timers
-
Enable System Option 134, Recorded Announcement Devices.
2. Record RAD greetings
-
Access the System Administrator's mailbox (see Using the
Administrator’s Mailbox, page 102.)
-
Press 8 to select the RAD Greetings menu.
-
Press 1 to record a greeting.
-
Select RAD greeting number to record (1- 200).
99
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
If the selected RAD greeting already exists, you will hear it along with
prompts to accept, review or re-record it.
-
Record the greeting, speaking clearly into a handset (do not use a
handsfree or speaker phone).
-
Follow the voice prompts to record each additional greeting set.
3. Form 49 (Voice Mail Options), RAD Setup subform
-
Assign greeting sets to the RAD ports and specify how often the
sets play.
Note: Leave fields for unneeded greetings blank.
Note: Verify that disconnect supervision is provided by the CO.
4. Form 17, Hunt Groups
-
Select unused voice mail ports and assign them to their own hunt
group. Leave the hunting method set to CIRCULAR.
-
Set each RAD hunt group type to RECORDING.
5. Recording Hunt Group Options subform of Form 17
-
Give the RAD hunt group a name — for example, Greeting 1.
-
Set the Message Length timer to the duration of the RAD greeting
set (Greeting 1 + Greeting 2 + Greeting 3...) multiplied by the
amount of times the set repeats plus three seconds.
Note: When the Message Length timer expires, the Recording Failure to
Hangup Timer starts. If the RAD port is still off-hook when this timer expires,
the port is placed into DND state making it unavailable to answer calls. The
port remains unavailable until DND is disabled. The Recording Failure to
Hangup Timer is Option 404 in Form 03, COS Define.
-
Set the RAD Greeting set (number 10-39) as programmed in Form 49.
6. Form 03, COS Define
-
Put RAD ports in a COS of their own, with only COS option 223
(Flash Disable) enabled.
Setting up Record a Call
1. Form 04, System Options
-
100
Enable Record a Call, Option 87.
Basic Programming
2. Form 02, Feature Access Codes:
-
Choose an access code for Send Message (feature number 41; default
code *41) if sharing Record a Call ports with voice mail messages.
3. Form 03, COS Options
-
Set the following COS options
COS of Voice
Mail Ports
used for RAC
COS Option
COS of
Phones
using RAC
COS of
Attendants
using RAC
Option 119, Attendant Tone Signalling
Not required
Not required
Enable
Option 229, Voice Mail Port
Enable
Not required
Not required
Option 268, Record a Call in Voice mail Enable
Enable
Enable
Option 269, Record a Call: Start
Recording Automatically
Not required
Optional
Optional
Option 270. Record a Call: Save
Recording on Hang up
Not required
Optional
Optional
4. Form 17, Hunt Groups
-
(Optional) Assign voice mail ports for exclusive use by Record a
Call to their own hunt group. Set the group type to STN/SET.
Note: Dedicating voice mail ports to Record a Call is NOT advisable for basic
systems that have only four such ports.
-
In the Recording Hunt Group Options subform, enter the maximum
number of ports allowed for Record a Call use.
Note: The number entered must be less than the number of available voice
mail ports; otherwise, none would be available for voice mail.
5. Form 19, Call Rerouting Table
-
Enter the voice mail hunt group as the Record a Call Voice mail
Destination For This Tenant.
6. Program a feature key for Record a Call on phones that require it.
7. Form 50, Mailboxes
-
Program a mailbox for each extension that requires use of
Record a Call.
101
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Using the Administrator’s Mailbox
The Administrator's Mailbox allows you to do some voice mail
programming using a telephone. Programming by phone cannot
completely replace CDE programming; however, it is convenient for
certain functions such as adding mailboxes and editing mailbox settings.
The passcode used to log into the Administrator's Mailbox determines
which functions can be accessed:
•
Manager Passcode: Allows the user to perform all the system
administration, mailbox management, and maintenance functions
except changing the Administrator passcode or passcode length.
•
Administrator Passcode: Allows the user to perform all the manager
functions plus changing the Administrator passcode and passcode
length; and defaulting the voice mail database.
Default passcodes are as follows:
Passcode Length
Passcode Type
3
4
5
6
Administrator
864
8642
86420
864200
Manager
648
6483
64830
648300
Important: The Manager passcode should be given to the person
who performs the day-to-day task, such as adding mailboxes and
changing greetings. The Manager passcode provides limited
access to the database, thereby reducing the likelihood of novice
users causing serious disruptions to the system. (Note that users
are still prompted to begin a new installation when they enter the
Manager Passcode, but get the response “Invalid Selection” when
they attempt to do so.) To protect system security, change the
passcodes at first login and keep them confidential.
Accessing the Administrator's Mailbox
Follow these steps to log in to the administrator's mailbox.
1. From any internal DTMF telephone, lift the handset and obtain dial tone.
2. Dial the voice mail hunt group number (default is 300). The system
answers and plays the usual greeting.
3. Press * when you hear the greeting.
102
Basic Programming
4. When prompted for a mailbox number, enter the system administrator
mailbox number: default 999 (or 9999 in four-digit systems). Note: To
prevent confusion between dialing a mailbox that starts with 9 and
dialing 9 for the Directory, an inter-digit timer of 4 seconds is started
when the first digit entered is 9. If no other digits are entered during
these four seconds, the user is transferred to the Directory
5. When prompted for a passcode enter the Administrator's passcode or
the Manager's passcode. (See above for defaults.)
6. You are now logged in to the system administrator's mailbox. Follow
the voice prompts for instructions; use the menu map on the following
page for reference.
103
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Figure 17: Administrator Mailbox Menu
Voice Mail Notification On Every New Message
To activate voice mail notification on every new message (which can only
be performed using the telephone user interface):
1. Access the System Administrator's mailbox.
104
Basic Programming
2. When prompted for a passcode, enter the Technician's passcode
(default is 9731) instead of using either the Administrator’s passcode
or the Manager's passcode.
3. Press 9.
4. Enter 20301 to enable notification on every new message.
To deactivate voice mail notification on every new message (the default
setting):
1. Access the System Administrator's mailbox.
2. When prompted for a passcode, enter the Technician's passcode
(default is 9731).
3. Press 9.
4. Enter 20302 to disable notification on every new message.
105
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Testing voice mail operation
Perform the following tests to verify that voice mail is working properly.
1. Call the business using an outside line or cell phone. Verify that you
hear the company open or closed greeting (as appropriate) and that
the message is clear and understandable.
2. Call the business using several outside lines. Verify the number of
rings allowed before the system answers.
3. Call the business using an outside line. When the auto attendant
answers, press 0 and verify that the system transfers the call to the
attendant.
4. Call the voice mail hunt group using an internal line. Verify that you do
not hear the company greeting. Verify the number of rings allowed
before answer.
5. Call the voice mail hunt group using an internal line. Verify that you do
not hear the company greeting. When the system answers, press *0
and verify that the system transfers the call to the attendant.
6. Call to several extensions directly (not through auto attendant) to verify
that the calls are forwarded to the correct mailbox.
7. Leave a message at an extension to verify that the messaging waiting
indicator (light) comes on.
Note: ONS/CLASS lines do not support high-voltage message-waiting
lamps.
8. (Optional) Call the voice mail hunt group from a fax terminal and verify that
the Auto Attendant answers and transfers the call to the fax extension.
9. (Optional) Call an extension that has message notification enabled
and verify that it is working correctly.
10. (Optional) Leave a message at an extension and verify that the
message is forwarded to the user's e-mail account.
Note: Once a message has been deleted, it cannot be recovered.
106
Basic Programming
Programming Phonebook
1. Form 04, System Options/System Timers
-
Enable System Option 128, Phonebook.
Note: The option must be purchased (listed on MOSS sheet).
Note: Phonebook and Speak@Ease (Option 85) cannot both be enabled.
2. Form 19, Call Rerouting Table
-
Program the voice mail hunt group number to the “Phonebook
Number For This Tenant” field.
3. Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments
-
Program a Phonebook feature key on phones that do not have
softkeys.
4. (Optional) Form 02, Feature Access Codes
-
Enter the access code for Feature 65 to allow DNIC-based single
line phones to access the Phonebook. All types of phones can also
use the access code. (Default, *65)
5. Form 50, Mailboxes
-
Enter a NAME for each mailbox owner. Only mailboxes with names
are listed in the Phonebook.
Note: Phonebook searches will only work if the first and last name entered
in Form 50 are in the order specified by the Directory Voice Prompt option in
Form 49. For example, if the option is set to LAST NAME, then the name
“Tom Jones” should be entered as Jones Tom in Form 50. However, you may
want to enter the name in Form 9 as first name, last name (Tom Jones)
because it looks better on the called party's display. And at the same time,
you may want Phonebook searching by last name. In this case, set “Directory
Voice Prompt” in Form 49 to LAST NAME, enter “Tom Jones” as the device
name in Form 9 Tom Jones, and then name the mailbox in Form 50 “Jones
Tom.” Only one space is permitted between the first and last name.
6. Form 49, Voice mail Options
-
Set the Directory Voice Prompt option to search the Phonebook by
first or last name.
107
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Programming an Attendant Console
Except for LDN assignments, the programming for a
SUPERCONSOLE 1000 is provided already completed in the default
database (see page 319 for the defaults). If you are starting with a blank
database default, follow the steps below to program the console:
1. Form 01, System Configuration
-
Program one of the two DNIC circuits.
2. Form 07, Console Assignment
-
Assign an extension number, COS, COR, and Tenant for each
console bay/slot/circuit entry.
3. Form 08, Console LDN Assignment
-
Assign a directory number and label to each required console
LDN key.
Programming a Subattendant Set
The programming for a subattendant set is provided already completed in
the default database (see page 319 for the defaults). If you are starting with
a blank database default, follow the steps below to program the console:
1. Form 01, System Configuration
-
Program a Digital Line Card or DNIC module.
2. Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments
108
-
Assign set type to SUB, extension number, COS, COR, and name
(optional) for each bay/slot/circuit.
-
Assign a separate COS with subattendant options.
-
Set type SUB can only be SUPERSET 4150, SUPERSET 430, or
SUPERSET 4DN.
-
Complete the sub-form for assigned keys, types, and options.
Basic Programming
Programming a Printer Port
System Printer Port
•
Form 34, Directed I/O
-
Program the printer port in Form 34.
-
Define Printout Types that are to be delivered to the system printer
port.
-
Remove printer port for print types not used.
-
Speed of printer port is programmed in Maintenance. Defaults:
Baud Rate: 300
Stop Bits: 1
Data Bits: 8
Flow Control: None
Parity: None
Note: Printer ports only work on the SX-200 ICP controller, not on Peripheral
cabinets.
Dataset Printer Port
1. Form 11, Data Circuit Descriptor
-
Define a circuit descriptor to match characteristics of device type.
Refer to Form 04, System Options and Timers on page 133 for
typical circuit descriptor.
2. Form 12, Dataset Assignment
-
Assign the type of data device for the dataset PLID. Available types
are DSCONS Console (output only, maximum 2400 baud) and
1103/2103 Standalone dataset.
-
Assign a Tenant, Extension number, COS, COR, and circuit
descriptor number.
3. Form 34, Directed I/O
-
Define printout type to be delivered to the dataset.
109
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
IP Printer Port
Data for the functions listed below can be output through an IP socket in
the controller to a telnet-enabled application for printing.
•
SMDR
•
ACD Real Time Events
•
CDE Data Print
•
ACD Agent Summary
•
Maintenance Logs
•
ACD Group Summary
•
Traffic Measurement
•
Hotel/Motel Audit
•
IP Traffic Measurement
•
Hotel/Motel Wakeup
The default database sends SMDR and CDE Data Print output to IP socket
61328. If you are using a different database, follow the procedure below to
program a printer port.
1. Form 11, Data Descriptor
-
Define a circuit descriptor to match the characteristics of the device
type. The default circuit descriptor number 1 works for most
applications.
2. Form 12, Data Assignment
-
-
Program a SOCKET type data device to an available PLID in the
following range:
PLID
Port
PLID
Port
1/13/20
1/13/21
1/13/22
1/13/23
1/13/24
61320
61321
61322
61323
61324
1/13/25
1/13/26
1/13/27
1/13/28
61325
61326
61327
61328
Assign a Tenant, Extension number, COS, COR, and circuit
descriptor number.
3. Form 34, Directed I/O
-
110
Define the printout type to output.
Basic Programming
Programming Stations/Sets Automatically
The AUTO PROGRAM function in Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments,
checks for unprogrammed circuits in the system and programs them as
follows:
•
Extension numbers are automatically assigned according to a Bay, Slot,
Circuit address format “BSCC”, where
-
B is the Bay number (1-8)
-
S is the slot number (1-8)
-
CC is the cct number (01-12).
The system prompts for a starting extension number.
•
•
Other parameters assigned to ONS and OPS devices:
-
COS = 2
-
COR = 1
-
Tenant = 1
Other parameters assigned to DNIC and IP sets:
-
COS = 1
-
COR = 4 for all set types except SUPERSET 430 and
SUPERSET 4150
-
COR = 5 for the SUPERSET 430 and SUPERSET 4150
-
Tenant = 1
Note: Before an extension number can be automatically assigned, a DNIC
set or DMP must be physically connected to the circuit. If no set or console
is detected on a circuit, that circuit is skipped and no extension number is
assigned.
To automatically program all connected sets, DNIC sets and DMPs:
1. Install all ONS cards, OPS cards, DNIC cards. Do not program stations,
DNIC, sets or DMPs.
2. Connect the DNIC sets or DMPs to the circuits.
3. Access Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments.
111
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
4. Press Auto Program.
The system prompts for an extension number to assign to the first
auto-programmed extension. The number is incremented by one for
each subsequent extension—for example, 100, 101, 102.
5. Enter a starting extension number.
Conflicts with existing extension numbers result in an error message
and a prompt to press the CONTINUE or ABORT softkey.
Auto-programming will not proceed to the next BAY/SLT/CCT until a
valid extension number has been found for the current position.
Note: The maximum length of extension numbers is five. It is recommended
that the length be equal to the “Length of Mailbox Numbers” in Form 49, to
take advantage of automatic mailbox creation.
After verifying that the unprogrammed sets are physically connected,
the system automatically programs all unprogrammed circuits. The
system displays all of the devices that have been programmed.
If a circuit cannot be programmed because an extension number has
already been assigned to that circuit, a warning is displayed. Press
ABORT to cancel the procedure or press CONTINUE to skip the
device and resume programming the other devices in the range.
Deleting a Device and All Dependent
Resources
The DELETE softkey in Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments, deletes a
device and all of its dependent resources including
•
All line keys (including LDN) that are programmed on a deleted set,
standalone BLF, or PKM module
•
All line and feature keys that are programmed on associated BLF or
PKM modules
•
The associated BLF and PKM modules
•
Any other line appearances and BLFs of the deleted station or set.
A warning message appears if any of the above exists. To continue, press
CONFRIM. To abort, press CANCEL.
112
Basic Programming
Deleting a range of devices and dependent resources
The RANGE DELETE softkey in CDE Form 09, Desktop Device
Assignments, allows block deletion of devices and all dependent resources.
To delete a range of devices and all dependent resources:
1. Press RANGE DELETE.
The system displays: FROM BAY: SLOT: CIRCUIT:.
2. Enter valid Bay, Slot and Circuit numbers for the first device and press
the ENTER softkey.
The system displays: TO BAY: SLOT: CIRCUIT:.
3. Enter valid Bay, Slot and Circuit numbers for the last device and press
the ENTER softkey.
The system prompts you to choose whether or not you want to receive
warnings as devices are deleted.
4. To receive a warning prior to deleting each device and its dependent
resources, press YES. To delete all devices and dependent resources
without warning, press NO.
The system prompts you once again to confirm the deletion of the range.
5. To proceed with the deletion of the range of devices and all dependent
resources, press CONFIRM. Press CANCEL to abort.
If you chose to receive warnings each time a device is deleted, the
system displays “deleting all keys, ...“ for each device in the range.
6. To proceed, press CONFIRM. Press CANCEL to abort the deletion of
the specific device and continue with the next device.
To abort the deletion of a range of devices, press ABORT. Any devices
that were deleted prior to pressing the ABORT key will remain deleted.
113
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Programming a Single Line Voice Station
The default database for a basic system has programming for two
ONS/CLASS circuits. The Analog Option Board adds two more. If you are
starting with a blank database, follow the steps below to program a single
line voice station:
1. Form 01, System Configuration
-
Program an ONS or OPS line card.
-
Program a Digital Line card or DNIC module for SUPERSET 401+,
and SUPERSET 4001 sets.
2. Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments
-
Assign an extension number, COS, COR, and name (optional) for
each bay/slot/circuit (set type remains STATION).
3. Form 30, Device Interconnection Table (optional)
-
Set the required interconnect restrictions (for example, to restrict
connections between specific device types).
4. Form 05, Tenant Interconnection Table (optional)
-
Set the required interconnect restrictions (for example, to restrict
connections between specific tenants).
5. Form 19, Call Rerouting Table (optional)
-
Program how to handle the caller’s call violations.
-
Each tenant requires its own Call Rerouting Table.
6. Form 03, COS Define (optional)
-
Create a unique class of service (COS) if required.
7. Form 20, ARS: COR Group Definition
-
Create a COR group that includes the COR number which you will
assign to the station.
-
This COR group restricts the external calls that the user can dial.
Ensure that the system is provisioned with a sufficient number of DSP.
114
Basic Programming
Programming a Multi-Line Set
The default database for a basic SX-200 ICP has programming for sixteen
multi-line IP phones and two multi-line DNIC sets. See page 320 for circuits
locations, extension numbers and other defaults. If you are starting with a
blank database default, follow the steps below to program a multi-line set:
1. Form 01, System Configuration
-
Program a line if not already programmed.
2. Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments
-
Assign set type, extension number, COS, COR, and name
(optional) for each bay/slot/circuit.
-
Complete the Expand Set subform for key types and options.
3. Form 30, Device Interconnection Table (optional)
-
Set the required interconnect restrictions (for example, to restrict
connections between specific device types).
4. Form 05, Tenant Interconnection Table (optional)
-
Set the required interconnect restrictions (for example, to restrict
connections between specific tenants).
5. Form 19, Call Rerouting Table (optional)
-
Program the action that the system will take to handle the caller’s
call violations.
-
Each tenant requires its own Call Rerouting Table.
6. Form 03, COS Define (optional)
-
Create a unique class of service (COS) if required, or use an
existing COS.
7. Form 20, ARS: COR Group Definition
-
Create a COR group that includes the COR number which you will
assign to the station, or use an existing COR.
-
This COR group restricts the external calls that the station user can
dial.
115
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Programming an Analog Device to a SIM2
(DNIC Phones Only)
The analog interface in the SIM2 supports devices such as analog
telephones, fax machines, or modems. The SUPERSET provides the
power to the analog interface.
Ensure that the set firmware revision level matches the system firmware
revision level. If the revision level on the system is higher than the set
revision level, upgrade the set firmware.
Refer to Upgrading Set Firmware (page 213).
When adding an analog set to a SIM2, use Form 12 to program the port.
The port type is AIM.
Programming an NSU or a PRI Card in a
Peripheral Cabinet
The NSU and PRI card support the following purchasable MOSS options:
QSIG (option 86), NFAS (option 91), D-Channel Backup (option 92),
Remote LAN Access (option 93), Min/Max (option 94), Auto Min/Max
(option 95), Number of Links 0-8 (option 96).
Option 91 to 95 are downloaded to each NSU and PRI card installed. Option
96 enables the number of ISDN T1 links purchased. These MOSS options
serve all the NSUs and PRI cards in the system. If you change any of these
options, you must reset the NSU and PRI card to enable them, and you may
need to download a new IMAT database into each NSU and PRI card.
Note: If you purchase a number of T1 links less than the number of T1 links
you install and program, Mitel cannot reliably predict which T1 links the
system will use after a reset. If you purchase a number of T1 links (System
Option 96) greater than the number of T1 links you install and program, the
T1 links programmed will remain consistent.
CDE programming
1. Form 53, Bay Location Assignment
-
116
Assign a bay number to the CIM or FIM ports used to connect each
NSU or PRI card to the controller.
Basic Programming
2. Form 01, System Configuration
-
Program the bay(s) assigned in Form 53 as ISDN nodes.
-
Program a T1 Trunk Card in Slot 6 and 8 (assuming both spans will
be programmed)
3. Form 03, Class of Service (COS)
-
Create a separate COS for ISDN trunks.
Note: COS Level 7 in the default database has all COS options required by
ISDN trunks enabled except for Option 246 (SMDR - Extended Record).
-
Enable the following COS options for the ISDN Trunks:
246 – SMDR- Extended Record
701 – No Dial Tone
702 – SMDR - Overwrite Buffer. (Required if option 806 SMDRRecord Incoming Calls enabled)
801 – Incoming Trunk Call Rotary
802 – Limited Wait for Dial Tone
811 – ANI/DNIS Trunk
814 – SMDR - Record ANI/DNIS
Tip: Ensure that COS Option 800 (ANI Applies) is NOT enabled in the
class of service of the ISDN trunks.
-
For extensions (sets and stations), the following COS options must
be set:
Table 16: Extension COS Options for Systems with
an NSU or PRI Card
COS Option
Setting
236 – Outgoing Trunk Callback
Disable
237 – Outgoing Trunk Campon
Disable
502 – Display ANI/DNIS Information and
possibly
613 – Display ANI information only
Enable
503 – Enable Calling Name Display
Enable
702 – SMDR Overwrite Buffer
Enable
Notes
Must have 502 enabled for
613 to function.
Required if option 806 SMDR
– Record Incoming Calls
enabled
117
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
4. Form 04, System Options/System Timers
-
Assign values to the first two options in table below and enable the
others as required:
Table 17: NSU MOSS Options
System Options
Setting
Notes
Option 48 – Limited Wait for Dial Tone
1-15 secs
Set to 1 sec.
Default = 5 sec.
Option 96 – Number of Links
2
Purchase 1 for each link used.
Default = 0
Option 86 - QSIG
Optional
Enabling Option 86 allows the
called party to see the name of the
caller on their telephone display.
The option is not required if
connected to a DMS100 Central
Office.
Option 91 – NFAS
Optional
If Option 91 is to be disabled,
Option 92 must be disabled first.
Not required if using a single link
PRI.
Option 92 – D-Channel Backup
Optional
If Option 92 is to be enabled, Option
91 must already be enabled.
Not required if using a single link
PRI
Option 94 – Min/Max
Optional
If Option 94 is to be disabled,
Option 95 must be disabled first.
Option 95 – Auto Min/Max
Optional
If Option 95 is to be enabled, Option
94 must already be enabled.
5. Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptor
-
Assign a T1 trunk circuit descriptor. To receive CLID or DDI digits,
the PRI trunk must be a non-DISA trunk that is programmed with a
T1 E&M trunk circuit descriptor. The Debounce timer must be set
to 100 milliseconds and the Incoming Start type and Outgoing Start
type must be set to WINK.
6. Form 13, Options Subform
118
-
Set the DTMF option to NO.
-
Set the QSIG Supplementary Services to “Yes” if you want to insert
the calling name ID when the trunks are programmed for QSIG or
connected to a DMS100.
Basic Programming
7. Form 15, Dial-In Trunks
•
PRI trunks are Dial-In Trunks and are not normally used in a
Non-Dial-in configuration.
Search for the correct Bay/Slot/Circuit and enter the following for
each trunk:
-
COS number – see previous requirements
-
COR number
-
Tenant number – unless site has tenanting set to 1
-
N – number of incoming DID digits – usually 4
-
M – number of digits to absorb – usually 0
-
X – digits to be inserted (up to 2 digits)
-
CDN – Circuit Descriptor Number
-
Trunk Number – Enter a trunk number (1-200)
8. Form 16, Trunk Groups
-
Locate an empty Trunk Group and add the PRI trunks (trunk
numbers programmed in Form 15) to the Trunk Group. (Program
them in reverse order to prevent contention with incoming calls
from the CO.)
-
Add a name to the Trunk Group for future reference.
-
Set Group Type to Terminal (recommended) or Cyclic.
-
Enable SMDR (outgoing only) if required.
9. Form 42, T1 Link Descriptor
-
Create a Link Descriptor for the PRI trunks using the recommended
settings in the following table:
Table 18: T1 Link Descriptor Values for PRI trunks
Descriptor
Alarm debounce timer
Value
(300 –3200 ms)
2500
Line Coding
(AMI, AMI&ZCS, B8ZS)
B8ZS
Line Build Out
(0, -7.5, -15. –22.5 dB)
0 dB
Line Length
(max 132, 265,398,533 or 655)
266-398
Framing
(D4 or ESF)
D4
(Page 1 of 2)
119
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 18: T1 Link Descriptor Values for PRI trunks (continued)
Descriptor
Value
Slip rate – maintenance limit (0 – 9000) /24 hrs
255
Slip rate – service limit
7000
(0 – 9000) /24 hrs
Slip rate – network sync limit (0 – 9000) /24 hrs
7
BER – maintenance limit ( 10**-n , n = (3,4,5,6 )) / hour
4
BER – service limit ( 10**-n , n = (3,4,5,6 )) / hour
3
Framing losses – maintenance limit
255
Framing losses – service limit
(0 – 9000) /24 hrs
(0 – 9000) /24 hrs
9000
RTS timer – service limit exceeded (1- 255 min)
30
RTS timer – net slip limit exceeded (1- 255 min)
30
RTS timer – after alarm
10
(0 – 300 sec)
(Page 2 of 2)
10. Form 43, T1 Link Assignment
-
Assign the Link Descriptor to the PRI trunks (referencing the Bay
and Slot location).
11. Form 44, Network Sync
-
Enter the links according to their Bay/Slot/Circuit in the order that
you want them to be used as the network sync source. Typically,
CO’s are the first choice for a sync source. When using both PRI
and TI trunks, make the PRI trunk the clock source.
12. Form 22, Modified Digit Table
-
120
DID Calling Party Number to the network interacts with the current
SX-200 ICP system networking functionality and ignores
programmed node-IDs in the NSU or PRI card. The Node ID
Information Element (“*8”) for Analog Networking, if programmed in
the Modified Digit Table, will be ignored by the NSU or PRI card. If
*6 is programmed in the digit modification table the DID calling
extension number is sent to the NSU or PRI card and can be sent
to the network as the calling party. The extension must belong to a
block of DID numbers purchased from the Network provider.
Basic Programming
The following table shows how Analog Networking and Call-by-Call
information co-exist in the Modified Digit Table.
Entry
Quantity to
Delete
Digits to be
Inserted
Comments
01
1
*4000*6*4*04
ISDN CxC and DID
In the “Digits to be Inserted” field, the definition of characters are:
*4
000
*6
*4
*04
No SMDR for further modified digits
Call-by-Call digits, (speech, default O/G, clid)
Send caller ID (DID to network)
Start SMDR again for further modified digits
Inserts Caller's Name (for calls over ISDN Trunks)
13. Complete ARS programming
-
ARS programming must match with the service selection
programming that is entered through the ISDN Maintenance
Administration Tool (IMAT) computer.
Programming Tip:
When programming ARS, it is recommended that Quantity to Follow
always be zero. This is accomplished by padding Digits to Analyze with Xs.
For example, instead of entering digits as shown in Example A, enter them
as shown in Example B:
Example A:
DIGITS TO ANALYZE
613
1800
1
592
QUANTITY TO FOLLOW
7
7
10
4
Example B:
DIGITS TO ANALYZE
613XXXXXXX
1800XXXXXXX
1XXXXXXXXXX
592XXXX
QUANTITY TO FOLLOW
0
0
0
0
14. Program the IMAT database according to the instructions in the next
section.
121
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
IMAT Programming
The IMAT software is used to program hardware and call characteristics
for the NSU and PRI card. IMAT is also used to install software upgrades
and backup the NSU database.
Note: You must have IMAT software version 7.3 or greater.
Maintenance activities include access to the following maintenance
information:
•
a list of all software files and versions on the NSU
•
log messages that contain a history of activities and the status of faults
•
a database
Installing IMAT Software
You can install IMAT on the Maintenance PC or on its own PC (IMAT PC).
Note: If using a dial-up connection to the NSU, we strongly suggest that you
use a non-networked computer (a Windows 95/98 networked computer may
have difficulties communicating with Dial-up Networking).
To install IMAT on the PC:
1. Close all the applications running on the PC.
2. Insert the SX-200 ICP software CD-ROM in the CD drive.
3. Open the Tools folder, then the Disk 1 folder.
4. Double-click the Setup.exe file. The installation program starts. Follow
the prompts to install IMAT.
Programming IP Settings
Collect the following information:
•
The Static IP Address that will be programmed on the NSU. Choose
an IP Address that will not conflict with the IP Phone range, which
starts at the default 192.168.1.20 and continues to 192.168.1.250. For
example, you might choose 192.168.1.15 as the static IP address.
•
The gateway address (if there is a gateway on your network)
•
The subnet mask (the default setting is 255.255.255.0 which is
represented in hexadecimal as ffffff00)
122
Basic Programming
To program a static IP address on the NSU:
1. Ensure the NSU is disconnected from the SX-200 ICP Controller and
that no power is applied to the NSU. Re-apply power only after
completing CDE and IMAT programming.
2. If you have not already done so, connect a serial cable from a com port
on your PC to the Maintenance port on the NSU.
3. Launch a Hyperterminal session on the PC (38400, 8, N, 1, no flow
control).
4. Apply power to the NSU by connecting the power cord.
Messages are displayed on the PC while the NSU is booting up.
5. When the PC displays “Press any key to stop this autoboot”, press any
key on the PC keyboard. If you do not stop the autoboot on time,
remove the power cord from the NSU and repeat this step
The PC displays “[MC269AA Boot]”
6. Type ‘c’ on the PC keyboard.
The PC displays “boot device”.
7. Press the Enter key until “net on ethernet” is displayed.
8. Enter the IP Address of the NSU and Subnet mask as shown in the
following example:
192.168.1.2:ffffff00 (where ffffff00 is the subnet mask 255.255.255.0)
Note: There are 6 x f's and 2 x 0's,
9. Press the Enter key until the PC displays “gateway inet (g):”
10. Enter the IP Address of the Gateway as shown in the following example:
192.168.1.1
11. Press the Enter key until the PC displays “[MC269AA Boot]”
12. Enter “@” to continue the bootup or power down the NSU.
Connecting a Windows PC to the NSU
Only the direct cable connection is described here. For information on
connecting to the NSU via modem and or LAN, see the IMAT Online Help.
By default, Windows does not support a direct cable connection. You must
add a device driver. Windows takes the information from a Mitel file and
creates the driver called NT Direct Connection.
123
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
To install a direct connection device driver in Windows:
1. Use the instructions for your Windows operating system to install a
new modem.
2. Browse to find the install file located at: c:\Program Files\Mitel\Imat.
3. Select a COM port.
•
Windows creates a driver called NT Direct Connection.
4. Set the following parameters:
Maximum speed: 38400
Only connect at this speed enabled
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Mode: Auto Answer (in Advanced Settings).
Error control: Clear if you have a direct connect cable.
Flow Control: Clear if you have a direct connect cable.
5. To connect the PC to the NSU, connect an RS-232 straight DTE serial
cable between the NSU’s serial port and the PC’s serial port.
Note: If you are connecting through a modem, use a null modem adapter on
the NSU side.
To create a Dial-Up Network connection on Windows 95/98:
Note: You might need to do this procedure twice to create two Dial-up
Networking connections: one for on-site direct access, and one for remote
modem access.
1. Click the Start button, select Programs, Accessories, then Dial-Up
Connections.
2. Double-click Make New Connection.
3. Enter an appropriate name for the connection (for example, Direct for
direct connections, Remote or a customer’s name for remote
connections) and click Next.
4. Enter an Area Code and Telephone Number and select a Country
Code from the drop-down list. Click Next.
Note: Even though it is not needed for a direct connection, Windows requires
that you enter this information.
5. Click Finish.
124
Basic Programming
6. Right-click your new connection icon and click Properties.
7. Click Configure. Ensure the fields are set as follows:
Data bits: 8
Parity: none
Note: If you are creating a direct connection, make sure NT Direct Connection
is listed in the drop-down list in the Make a New Connection window.
For a direct connection:
Maximum speed: 38400
Check: only connect at this speed.
Select wait for dial tone before dialing.
Select cancel the call time at 60 seconds.
Click Advanced and turn off error control and flow control.
For a remote connection:
-
Stop bits: 1
-
Click Advanced and turn on error control and select Compress data.
-
Turn on flow control and select Hardware.
8. Click OK.
9. Select Server Types tab and make sure that PPP: Windows, Windows
NT3.5, Internet or PPP:Internet appears in the Type of Dial-Up Server field.
10. In the Advanced Options field, select Log onto Network and Enable
software compression.
11. Make sure that only TCP/IP is selected in the Allowed network
protocols field.
12. Select the Scripting tab and enter:
c:\program files\mitel\Imat\pridun.scp.
13. Click OK.
To create a Dial-Up Network connection on Windows 2000:
Note: You may need to follow this procedure twice to create two Dial-up
Networking connections: one for on-site direct access, and one for remote
modem access.
1. Click the Start button, select Programs, Accessories,
Communications, then Dial-Up Connections.
2. Double click Make New Connection, and then click Next.
125
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
3. Select Dial-up to the Internet, and then click Next.
4. Select I want to set up my Internet connection manually, or I want to
connect through a local area network (LAN). Click Next.
5. Select I want to connect through a phone line and a modem, and then
click Next.
6. Use the COM Port that has been configured as a null Modem
connection: 38400, 8, none, 1.
7. In the Choose Modem box, from the drop-down list select
Communications cable between 2 computers. Click Next.
8. Clear the box Use area code and dialing rules, and then click Advanced.
9. For the Connection type, select PPP (Point to Point Protocol).
10. For the Logon procedure, select Use logon script, and then click
Browse. Select the appropriate script c:\program files\mitel\Imat\
pridun.scp, click OK, then Next.
11. In the Internet account logon information box, leave the username and
password fields blank and then click Next.
12. Dialog boxes appear that warn you that you will not be able to connect to
your Internet service provider without your user name and your password.
Disregard these warnings and click Yes on these boxes to continue.
13. Enter the Connection name, and then click Next.
14. In the box to set up an Internet mail account, select No, then click Next.
15. De-select the option to connect to the Internet immediately, then click
Finish.
16. In the Network and Dial-up Connections window, right-click on the new
DUN connection, point to Properties, then click Configure.
17. From the Maximum speed (bps) list, select 38400 for the baud rate.
18. Click OK until you exit the windows.
Using IMAT
To start IMAT:
1. Launch IMAT (ignore messages about username configuration error).
2. In the File menu, select Connect to Remote Site.
3. Choose the Connection Medium: Serial or Ethernet Network Card.
126
Basic Programming
4. If you selected Ethernet Network Card, enter the IP Address of the
Remote Site.
If you selected Serial, select the connection name you entered when
you created the dial-up network connection.
5. For the Ethernet Remote System, select PRI Card / Universal NSU.
6. Click Connect.
IMAT displays a confirmation of the connection (for example
“Connected over Ethernet”).
7. Press Okay.
8. In the File menu, select Load -> Database -> Sources -> PRI Card
/NSU. This loads the IMAT with the database from the NSU.
9. Press Load.
IMAT provides a confirmation of the connection (for example
“Database received”).
10. Press Okay.
11. In the File menu, select Load -> SW Versions -> Sources -> PRI Card
/Universal NSU. This loads the IMAT with the Software version from
the NSU.
12. Press Load.
IMAT provides a confirmation of the connection (for example
“Software Version received”).
13. Press Okay.
14. Verify that the SW Version of the NSU matches the SW version listed
in the FCI delivered with the latest SX-200 ICP load:
-
In the Maintenance menu, select Software versions. Verify the
package version that is listed against the FCI.
-
If the package version and the FCI don't match, select SW Upgrade
From IMAT (the NSU load is on the CD).
-
After the Upgrade is completed, select Remote Site Reset.
15. Program the NSU Config for the links provided by your PRI provider:
-
In the Config menu, select Site Options.
-
Confirm the System Type: Universal NSU.
127
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
-
Confirm the Connected Platform: SX200 EL/ML/ICP.
-
If the following options are required, enable them: Qsig, Network
Side Interface.
-
In the Config menu, select PRI Link Characteristics.
-
Verify BOTH links for Protocol type: DMS250, DMS100, 4ESS,
NI2, QSIG.
-
Verify BOTH links for Physical type: T1/CSU or T1/DSX1.
-
Verify BOTH links for Characteristics: line coding, line length,
framing, invert data, invert D channel.
-
To get a view all of your settings, from the Config menu select View
Database.
To save a database:
1. In the File menu, select Save, then Database.
2. In the Files box, type in the Destination of the database (if you have
changed the database you can save it back to the PRI/Universal NSU
and/or you can save a copy of the database to your PC) and give it a
file name.
3. Click Save.
Note: If you save the database changes to the NSU, you must reboot the
NSU. You can do this by selecting Maintenance -- Remote Site Reset. (This
should be done after hours or when there is no traffic on the NSU.)
To convert a database:
If you are loading a database with a software version that is earlier than the
current IMAT version, IMAT displays the Local Database Load window,
which allows you convert the ISDN database to a newer version.
1. In the Local Database Load window, select the new database version
from the Database Version drop-down menu.
2. Click OK.
Closing IMAT
Note: Always save any open databases before closing IMAT
128
Basic Programming
Programming an Embedded PRI Trunk
1. Form 53, Bay Location Assignment
-
Assign the Dual T1/E1 Framer module a bay number.
Note: Reset the system after updating Form 53.
2. Form 1, System Configuration
-
Program the node type as ONB T1 NODE. Program the trunk card
as T1 ISDN for the slots specified in the following table.
Module Location
Slot
MMC1
MMC2
2 and/or 4
6 and/or 8
Note: One link of the Dual T1/E1 Framer can be programmed for PRI (T1
ISDN) and the other for T1 (T1 Trunk).
Note: A trunk must be programmed in form 14 or 15 before it the will show
as installed in Form 1.
3. Form 03, Class of Service (COS)
-
Create a separate COS for ISDN trunks.
Note: COS Level 7 in the default database has all COS options required by
ISDN trunks enabled except for Option 246 (SMDR - Extended Record).
-
Enable the following COS options for the ISDN Trunks:
246 – SMDR- Extended Record
701 – No Dial Tone
702 – SMDR - Overwrite Buffer. (Required if option 806 SMDRRecord Incoming Calls enabled)
801 – Incoming Trunk Call Rotary
802 – Limited Wait for Dial Tone
811 – ANI/DNIS Trunk
814 – SMDR - Record ANI/DNIS
Tip: Ensure that COS Option 800 (ANI Applies) is NOT enabled in the class
of service of the ISDN trunks.
129
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
-
For extensions (sets and stations), the following COS options must
be set:
Table 19: Extension COS Options for Systems with embedded PRI
COS Option
Setting
236 – Outgoing Trunk Callback
Disable
237 – Outgoing Trunk Campon
Disable
502 – Display ANI/DNIS Information and
possibly
613 – Display ANI information only
Enable
503 – Enable Calling Name Display
Enable
702 – SMDR Overwrite Buffer
Enable
Notes
Must have 502 enabled for
613 to function.
Required if option 806
SMDR – Record Incoming
Calls enabled
4. Form 04, System Options/System Timers
-
Assign a one to five second value to System Option 48, Limited
Wait for Dial Tone if ISDN trunks are present. Purchase and
program the correct Number of Links (option 96), and if required,
purchase and enable Remote LAN Access (option 93).
Notes:
1. Options 86, 91, 92, 94, and 95 are not available with embedded
PRI.
2. A system reset may be required after some options are
programmed. For example, changing the number of links in
option 96 requires a reset.
3. Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptor
-
130
Assign a T1 trunk circuit descriptor. To receive CLID or DDI digits,
the PRI trunk must be a non-DISA trunk that is programmed with a
T1 E&M trunk circuit descriptor.
Basic Programming
4. Form 13, Options Subform
-
Set the Debounce Timer to 100 milliseconds.
-
Set the DTMF option to NO.
-
Set the Incoming Start Type to WINK.
-
Set the Outgoing Start Type to WINK.
5. Form 15, Dial-In Trunks
•
PRI trunks are Dial-In Trunks and are not normally used in a
Non-Dial-in configuration.
Search for the correct Bay/Slot/Circuit and enter the following for
each trunk:
-
COS number – see previous requirements
-
COR number (if required)
-
Tenant number – unless site has tenanting set to 1
-
N – number of incoming DID digits – usually 4
-
M – number of digits to absorb – usually 0
-
X – digits to be inserted (up to 2 digits) or Feature Access Code
67 (Digit Translation Table Access) programmed on Form 02
-
CDN – Circuit Descriptor Number
-
Trunk Number – Enter a trunk number (1-200)
6. Form 16, Trunk Groups
-
Locate an empty Trunk Group and add the PRI trunks (trunk
numbers programmed in Form 15) to the Trunk Group. (Program
them in reverse order to prevent contention with incoming calls
from the CO.)
-
Add a name to the Trunk Group for future reference.
-
Set Group Type to Terminal (recommended) or Circular.
-
Enable SMDR (outgoing only) if required.
131
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
7. Form 42, T1 Link Descriptor
-
Create a Link Descriptor for the PRI trunks using the recommended
settings in the following table:
Table 20: T1 Link Descriptor Values for PRI trunks
Descriptor
Value
Alarm debounce timer
(300 –3200 ms)
2500
Line Coding
(AMI, AMI&ZCS, B8ZS)
B8ZS
Line Build Out
(0, -7.5, -15. –22.5 dB)
0 dB
Line Length
(max 132, 265,398,533 or 655)
0 - 132
Framing
(D4 or ESF)
ESF
Slip rate – maintenance limit (0 – 9000) /24 hrs
255
Slip rate – service limit
7000
(0 – 9000) /24 hrs
Slip rate – network sync limit (0 – 9000) /24 hrs
7
BER – maintenance limit ( 10**-n , n = (3,4,5,6 )) / hour
4
BER – service limit ( 10**-n , n = (3,4,5,6 )) / hour
3
Framing losses – maintenance limit
255
Framing losses – service limit
(0 – 9000) /24 hrs
(0 – 9000) /24 hrs
9000
RTS timer – service limit exceeded (1- 255 min)
30
RTS timer – net slip limit exceeded (1- 255 min)
30
RTS timer – after alarm
10
(0 – 300 sec)
Embedded PRI Protocol
DMS100
Embedded PRI Protocol Variant
None
Embedded PRI Network/User
User
Embedded PRI Unknown Numbering Plan
Disabled
Embedded PRI Bearer Capability Voice
Speech
Embedded PRI CLIR Voice
Allow
Embedded PRI Invert D Channel
No
8. Form 43, T1 Link Assignment
-
132
Assign the ISDN trunk T1 Link Descriptor to the slot(s) specified in
Form 1.
Basic Programming
9. Form 44, Network Sync
-
Enter the links according to their Bay/Slot/Circuit in the order that
you want them to be used as the network sync source. Typically,
CO’s are the first choice for a sync source. When using both PRI
and TI trunks, make the PRI trunk the clock source.
10. Form 22, Modified Digit Table
-
DID Calling Party Number to the network interacts with the current
SX-200 ICP system networking functionality and ignores
programmed node-IDs in the Dual T1/E1 Framer module. The
Node ID Information Element (“*8”) for Analog Networking, if
programmed in the Modified Digit Table, will be ignored by the
module. If *6 is programmed in the digit modification table the DID
calling extension number is sent to the module and can be sent to
the network as the calling party. The extension must belong to a
block of DID numbers purchased from the Network provider.
The following table shows how Analog Networking and Call-by-Call
information co-exist in the Modified Digit Table.
Entry
Quantity to
Delete
Digits to be
Inserted
Comments
01
1
*4000*6*4*04
ISDN CxC and DID
In the “Digits to be Inserted” field, the definition of characters are:
*4
000
*6
*4
*04
No SMDR for further modified digits
Call-by-Call digits, (speech, default O/G, clid)
Send caller ID (DID to network)
Start SMDR again for further modified digits
Inserts Caller's Name (for calls over ISDN Trunks)
11. Complete ARS programming in CDE.
Note: If Calling Party Number (CPN) substitution is programmed, make sure
that Form 22, ARS: Modified Digit Table, contains an entry with CPN enabled
for embedded PRI. Entries for offboard PRI cards and NSUs should have
CPN disabled.
133
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Programming an Embedded T1 Trunk
1. Form 53, Bay Location
-
Assign the module or card a bay number.
Note: If two modules are installed, assign them to the same bay.
2. Form 01, System Configuration
-
If the module is in MMC slot 1, program a T1 Trunk card in slot 2
and/or 4 of the assigned bay. If the module is in MMC slot 2,
program a T1 Trunk card in slot 6 and/or 8.
Note: One link of the Dual T1/E1 Framer can be programmed for PRI (T1
ISDN) and the other for T1 (T1 Trunk).
Note: A trunk must be programmed in form 14 or 15 before it the will show
as installed in Form 1.
3. Form 03, COS Define
-
Enable COS Option 802, Limited Wait for Dial Tone.
4. Form 04, System Options and Timers
-
Program Option 48, Limited Wait for Dial Tone, and Option 96,
Number of Links (0-8).
5. Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptors
-
Specify options for the T1 trunk types.
6. Forms 14 (Non-dial-in Trunks) and 15 (Dial-in Trunks)
-
Specify options for specific trunk circuits.
Note: CDE Form 14 and 15 do not accept programming changes if the T1
card is installed in the Peripheral Cabinet, and the T1 link is down but still
active. To make a programming change, unplug the T1 card, make the
change and then re-insert the card.
7. Form 43, T1 Link Assignment
-
Select a T1 link descriptor for the T1 link.
8. Form 42, T1 Link Descriptors
-
Specify options for the T1 link descriptors.
9. Form 44, Network Sync
-
134
Enter the links according to their Bay/Slot/Circuit in the order that
you want them to be used as the network sync source. Typically,
COs are the first choice for a sync source.
Basic Programming
10. Forms 22, 23 and 26
-
Complete the ARS programming required to access the T1 trunks.
11. Form 16, Trunk Groups
-
Put the trunks in a trunk group.
Programming Analog Trunks
Non Dial-In trunks
1. Form 01, System Configuration
-
Program a trunk card that meets the trunk type requirements.
2. Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptor
-
Create a trunk circuit descriptor that corresponds to the type of
trunk that you are programming.
3. Form 03, Class of Service
-
Assign trunk options only.
4. Form 14, Non-Dial-in Trunks
-
Assign COS and Tenant.
-
Assign the directory number or an abbreviated dial number which
incoming calls will ring for Day Service, Night Service 1 and 2
modes.
-
Assign a Circuit Descriptor Number (links this form to Form 13).
-
Assign a Trunk Name if desired. This name appears on the
consoles and on the set displays for incoming and outgoing calls.
-
Assign a Trunk Number in the range 1 to 200.
Note: For T1 cards or T1/E1 modules in Peripheral Cabinets - Form 14 does
not accept trunk programming changes if the card or module is installed and
the T1 link is down but active. To make a programming change for a T1 card,
unplug the T1 card, make the programming change and then re-insert the
T1 card. To make a programming change for a T1/E1 module, insert a
Peripheral Interface Card (PIC) into the software location (slots 5 or 6) for
that T1 link, make the programming change, and then remove the PIC from
the slot to reset the T1 link.
5. Form 16, Trunk Groups
-
Assign to a trunk group if outgoing.
135
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Programming a range of Non Dial-in Trunks
The RANGE PRGRM softkey allows block programming of trunks on the
same card. You must program the first trunk in the range and then press
RANGE PRGM to copy the values to the range of trunks that you specify.
The following fields are copied from the first trunk in the range:
COS, TEN, DAY, N1, N2, CDN
The TK NAME and COMMENTS fields are left blank.
The trunk numbers are assigned in sequence, beginning with the first trunk
in the range. If there are trunks that are already programmed within that
range, those trunks are skipped. The trunk number sequence is
incremented each time a trunk is skipped. If the trunk number is incremented
to a value that is already used, the sequence continues to increment until a
free number is found. The trunk numbers restart at 1 if necessary. An error
message is displayed if there are no more free trunk numbers.
Note: BRI trunks are not supported.
To program a range of trunks:
1. Program the first trunk in the range. Enter values for the COS, TEN,
DAY, N1, N2, CDN fields.
2. Press RANGE PRGRM.
3. The system displays: FROM BAY: SLOT: CIRCUIT:.
4. Enter valid Bay, Slot and Circuit numbers for the first trunk and press
the ENTER softkey.
5. The system displays: TO BAY: SLOT: CIRCUIT:.
6. Enter valid Bay, Slot and Circuit numbers for the last trunk and press
the ENTER softkey.
7. The system copies the values from the first trunk to all the trunks
specified in the range.
136
Basic Programming
Dial-in trunks
1. Form 01, System Configuration
-
Program a trunk card that meets the trunk type requirements.
2. Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptor
-
Create a trunk circuit descriptor that corresponds to the type of
trunk that you are programming.
3. Form 03, Class of Service
-
Assign trunk options only.
4. Form 15, Dial-in Trunks
-
Assign COS, COR, and Tenant.
Note: Assign a separate COS for the Dial-In Trunk.
-
Column N lists the number of expected digits.
IMPORTANT: Changing the N field of a working system from
0 to any other digit or vice versa removes the trunks from the
trunk group.
Note: If this digit is 0, the system treats this as a Tie trunk. If this digit is not
0, the system treats this as a DID trunk.
-
Column M lists the number of digits to absorb. To absorb no incoming
digits, set to 0. To absorb n digits, enter n (a whole number).
-
Column X defines the digits to insert.
Do not insert 0 as a blank. To insert no digits, leave blank.To
insert digits, enter the actual digits.
-
Assign a Trunk Name if desired. This name appears on the
consoles and on the set displays for incoming and outgoing calls.
Note: For T1 cards or T1/E1 modules in Peripheral Cabinets - CDE Form 15
does not accept trunk programming changes if the T1 card or T1/E1 module
is installed and the T1 link is down but active. To make a programming change
for a T1 card, unplug the T1 card, make the programming change and then
re-insert the T1 card. To make a programming change for a T1/E1 module,
insert a Peripheral Interface Card (PIC) into the software location (slots 5 or
6) for that T1 link, make the programming change, and then remove the PIC
from the slot to reset the T1 link.
137
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
5. Form 16, Trunk Groups
-
Assign to a trunk group if outgoing.
Programming a range of Dial-in Trunks
Follow the instructions on page 136 for range programming Non Dial-in
Trunks.
DISA trunks
1. Form 01, System Configuration
-
Program a trunk card that meets the trunk type requirements.
2. Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptors
-
Select a DISA circuit descriptor to match hardware type.
Note: Assignment of a DISA circuit descriptor to a trunk changes the trunk
to a DISA trunk.
3. Form 03, Class of Service
-
Assign trunk options only.
4. Form 15, Dial-In Trunks
-
Assign COS, COR, and Tenant.
Note: Assign a separate COS for the Dial-In Trunk.
-
Column N: set to 0
-
Column M: set to 0
-
Column X: leave blank
-
Assign a Trunk Name if desired. The name is what appears on the
consoles and phone displays for incoming and outgoing calls.
Recommended Options for System Security
Form 03: Enable Option 808 (Special DISA).
Form 04: Enable Option 5 (Verified Account Codes) and specify a time for
Option 54 (DISA Answer Timer).
138
Basic Programming
Form 33: Enter appropriate DISA access codes.
Notes:
1. If the DISA trunk is a loop-start CO trunk, then loop- start
interconnection rules apply and the restrictions on-loop start CO
trunks applies.
2. Four-circuit/Eight-circuit LS/CLASS trunks can also be
programmed as DISA trunks.
Programming T1 and PRI trunks as DISA trunks
1. Program the trunk(s) as T1 E&M. (A T1 E&M circuit descriptor is not
required.)
2. Form 02, Feature Access Codes
-
Program Feature Number 19 (Direct Inward System Access) with
a number that is within the DID range.
3. Form 03, COS Define
-
Enable COS Option 606, Telephone - Enhanced Answering
Position (provides answer supervision to telco when the SX-200
ICP provides it dial tone).
4. Form 19, Call Rerouting Table
-
Program the DISA access code from Form 02 as the DISA Day
Service Routing for this Tenant.
Programming ANI/DNIS on an Incoming trunk
Note: The following does not apply to PRI trunks.
ANI (Automatic Number Identification) - the local carrier sends the phone
number of the calling party to the PBX.
DNIS (Dialed Number Identification Service) - the local carrier sends the
digits dialed by the calling party to the PBX.
ANI/DNIS is available only to incoming trunks with trunk descriptor
“T1-E&M” and “T1-DID/TIE”, which accept DTMF signaling and have the
wink timer active.
139
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Only MCI and US Sprint Standards are supported. MCI sends the ANI
digits without delimiters. Sprint delimits the DNIS and ANI digits with
asterisks.
DNIS digits on a dial-in trunk are used to route that trunk call, and no
further digits will be expected.
1. Create an ANI/DNIS trunk by creating a separate COS. Enable the
following options in the trunk's Class Of Service:
-
COS Option 802 - Limited Wait for Dial Tone
-
COS Option 811 - ANI/DNIS Trunk
-
COS Option 246 - SMDR Extended Record (for SMDR to report the
ANI and DNIS digits).
2. In the Trunk Circuit Descriptor parameters set
-
DTMF = ENABLED
-
Incoming Start Type to Wink
-
Wink Timer to 100-350 for MCI and 140-290 for US SPRINT
-
Debounce Timer to 100 ms or greater.
3. To define which information will be displayed on the sets, ANI, DNIS,
both, or none (standard trunk label display), select the required
following COS options:
-
COS Option 502 - Display ANI/DNIS Information = ENABLE
-
COS Option 613 - Display ANI Information Only = ENABLE /
DISABLE
4. To display ANI and DNIS digits on a console when talking to an
ANI/DNIS trunk, enable COS Option 502 - Display ANI/DNIS
Information for the console.
Notes:
1. Intercept reason (FROM xxx DND) and Forwarding Information
(FWD FROM xxxx) take priority over DNIS.
2. Tenant Name and Calling Line ID take priority over ANI
information (immediately following the word TRUNK).’
3. COS Option 613 - Display ANI Information Only does not apply
to a console.
140
Basic Programming
The following tables identify displays during each call state according to
digits sent by the trunk and COS options selected for the display set.
Note: If a name is received on the incoming trunk in the scenario where you
would see the DNIS in the ringing state, you will see the ANI instead.
Table 21: ANI/DNIS Digits on Phone Display
(COS Option 502 Enabled and COS Option 613 Disabled)
COS Option 502 - Display ANI/DNIS = YES (enable)
COS Option 613 - Display ANI only = NO (disable)
Phone display during
ringing
Phone display after
answer
ANI and DNIS sent
DNIS
ANI
ANI sent
ANI
ANI
DNIS sent
DNIS
DNIS
Neither sent
Trunk Number or Label
Trunk Number or Label
Table 22: ANI/DNIS Digits on Phone Display
(COS Option 502 Enabled and COS Option 613 Enabled)
COS Option 502- Display ANI/DNIS = YES (enable)
COS Option 613 - Display ANI only = YES (enable)
Phone display during ringing
Phone display after
answer
ANI and DNIS sent
ANI
ANI
ANI sent
ANI
ANI
DNIS sent
Trunk Number or Label
Trunk Number or Label
Neither sent
Trunk Number or Label
Trunk Number or Label
141
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
The following table describes the set display for logged in ACD Agents with
the delivery of ANI/DNIS digits on the incoming trunks.
Table 23: ANI/DNIS for ACD Agents
COS 502
COS 613
COS 654
Path
Name
Talking
State
Ringing State
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
None
ANI
ANI
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
None
DNIS
ANI
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
None
Path Number
Trunk Name
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
None
Path Number
Trunk Name
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
None
Path Number
Path Number
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
None
Path Number
Path Number
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
None
ANI
Path Number
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
None
DNIS
Path Number
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Yes
Path Name
ANI
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Yes
Path Name
ANI
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Yes
Path Name
Calling Trunk Name
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Yes
Path Name
Calling Trunk Name
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Yes
Path Name
Calling Path Name
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Yes
Path Name
Calling Path Name
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Yes
Path Name
Path Name
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Yes
Path Name
Path Name
142
Basic Programming
CLASS trunks
1. Form 01, System Configuration
-
Program the ASU Trunk card, the LS/CLASS Trunk module, or the
LS/CLASS Trunk card.
2. Form 03, Class of Service, Define for trunks.
Assign a separate COS for the trunk.
-
To have Calling Line ID digits reported in the SMDR records,
enable COS Option 806 (SMDR-Record Incoming Calls) and COS
Option 814 (SMDR-Record ANI/DNIS/CLASS). Enable COS
Option 702 (SMDR - Overwrite Buffer).
-
To have CLASS name reported in the SMDR records, enable COS
Option 246 (SMDR-Extended Record) and COS Option 814
(SMDR-Record ANI/DNIS/CLASS).
3. Form 03, Class of Service, Define for SUPERSET sets.
-
To display Calling Line ID digits on a SUPERSET display set or
console, enable COS Option 502 (Display ANI/DNIS/CLASS
Information) in the class of service for the set/console. Enable COS
Option 613 - Display ANI Information Only if required.
-
To display CLASS name before Calling Line ID digits on phones
with 2-line displays, enable COS Option 503 (Display CLASS
Name) in the class of service for the set.
4. Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptor
-
Assign the CLASS trunk with the circuit descriptor. LS/CLASS
trunks in the controller or an ASU use ASU CLASS circuit
descriptor. An LS/CLASS Trunk module in a Peripheral Cabinet
uses “4-CIRCUIT CLASS” and an LS/CLASS Trunk card uses
“8-CIRCUIT CLASS“.
-
Program the option “CLASS Trunk” in the circuit descriptor options
subform for the appropriate ASU, 4-circuit, or 8-circuit CLASS trunk.
5. Form 14, Non-Dial-In Trunks or Form 15, Dial-in Trunks
-
Program the CLASS trunks. In Form 15 the CLASS trunk becomes
a DISA trunk.
6. Form 04, System Options and Timers
-
Program the CLASS receivers for the LS/CLASS Trunk module.
The LS/CLASS Trunk card provides its own CLASS receivers and
does not require programming in Form 04.
143
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Running the Line Quality Test for LS Trunks
Run the Line Quality test to measure and program optimum audio
configuration settings (line length and impedance) for AMB CLASS
circuits.
1. Form 13 (Audio Configuration subform)
-
Program the trunks so that one trunk provides milliwatt tone for all
other trunks in a loopback setup when the test is performed.
Sample setup (trunk 6 provides milliwatt tone):
Trunk #
1
2
3
4
5
6
Tel #
1111001
1111002
1111003
1111004
1111005
1111006
Milliwatt
6
6
6
6
6
1
Note: If the local CO provides a milliwatt tone number, do not configure
the loopback setup described above. Instead, enter the milliwatt tone
number in Form 13 (Trunk Circuit Descriptors) and run the Line
Quality test.
2. Switch to MTCE.
3. Press
DIAGNOSTICS
LS_MEASURE
select LINE_QUALITY (for one trunk) or BATCH_QUAL (for all trunks)
Respond to the prompts to run the test.
When the test is complete, LENGTH and IMPEDANCE are
programmed automatically in Form 13 (Audio Configuration subform).
Note: LENGTH and IMPEDANCE must be set to AUTO in order to
be programmed automatically when the test is run. Refer to the logs
to determine the actual settings for AUTO. To view the logs, press
DIAGNOSTICS > LS_MEASURE > TEST_RESULTS > ENTER.
144
Basic Programming
Programming Symbol MiNET Wireless
Phones (Optional)
A site survey by Symbol Technologies followed by the installation and
configuration of Air Access Points (also by Symbol) precedes
programming of the phones.
1. Complete programming on the SX-200 ICP.
In Form 09 (Devices Assignments) enter the following information:
-
Device Type (WRLSS)
-
Directory Number
-
PIN (must be four digits)
In Form 03 (COS Define), assign a Class of Service and Class of
Restriction to the phone.
2. Install the Symbol NetVision MiNET phone administrator tool on a
Windows NT or Windows 2000 PC (see below).
3. Upgrade the Symbol phone firmware to use the MiNET protocol. Refer
to the Symbol NVP II MiNET Update Procedure document (Symbol
MiNET.pdf) found on the SX-200 IPCP software CD.
The instructions in the Update Procedure document refer to a
configuration text file. Use the Minet_protocol.txt file provided on the
SX-200 IP software CD. The file is located in the folder
3rd Party/Wireless/Administration_Tool/.
4. Configure the wireless phones using the Symbol NetVision MiNET
Phone Administrator Tool.
Install Symbol NetVision MiNET Phone
Administrator Tool
The tool is found on the SX-200 ICP software CD and must be installed on
a PC that is running Windows NT or Windows 2000.
To install the tool:
1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Click \3rd_Party\Wireless\Administration_Tool \MiNET<xxx>.exe.
3. Click Unzip to place files in C:\temp\symbol.
145
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
4. Click Close.
5. Open the C:\temp\symbol folder.
6. Click setup.exe.
7. Follow the instructions in the install wizard.
Twinning the Symbol phone with a wireline
(desk) phone
Phone twinning provides concurrent ringing and message waiting
indication on as many as five phones.
To set up twinning:
1. Form 02, Feature Access Codes
-
Program the Disable Twin Phone access code (61).
2. For BOTH the Primary Telephone (Symbol MiNET Wireless Phone)
and Secondary Telephone(s)
-
In Form 03, enable Option 276, Twin Phone, and then assign the
COS to the primary and secondary telephone(s).
3. For the Primary Telephone
Tip: In Form 09, ensure that the primary telephone has no key-line
appearance in the system.
Note: The Symbol phone must be programmed as the primary phone.
4. For IP and DNIC Secondary Telephones
-
In Form 09, Expand Set Subform, assign a multicall line key to the
primary DN and make the multiline key the preferred line (LINE
PREF softkey) for incoming and outgoing calls. This is required to
light the message waiting lamp on the secondary phones.
5. For ONS Secondary Telephones
-
146
In Form 09, program the Primary DN (i.e., the DN of the Symbol
phone) in the ASSOC field.
Basic Programming
Programming IP Sockets for Hotel/ Motel
terminals and ACD Monitor
Note: Hotel/Motel front desk terminals, ACD Monitors and other applications
that are not IP-enabled, and that require bi-directional data, must use an
RS232-to-IP serial port converter, such as the Precidia Technologies
Ether232 or iPocket232 (available from the vendor or its resellers), to connect
to the SX-200 ICP. A dataset connection to a DNIC port or an RS-232 serial
port on the SX-200 ICP controller will not work.
1. Form 03, COS Define
-
Select the COS number.
-
Enable the following COS Options:
901 - DTRX Herald
904 - DTRX Complete Message Text
906 - Data SMDR - Does Not Apply
259 - Message Sending (for PMS only)
2. Form 29, DTE Profile
-
Select a DTE profile number. You will use this profile number in
Form 12 - Data Assignment.
-
Select the SEL. Option Subform.
-
Enable: DTRX Echoplex, Editing, and Edit Character = 127.
3. Form 11, Data Circuit Descriptor
-
Select a Circuit Descriptor (CDN).
Match the CDN values to those of the selected Terminal. For
example, All Baud Rates = 9600, Parity = None, Character Length
= 8, and Stop Bits = 1.
4. Form 12, Data Assignment
-
Program a SOCKET type data device to an available PLID in the
following range:
PLID
1/13/20
1/13/21
1/13/22
1/13/23
1/13/24
Port
61320
61321
61322
61323
61324
PLID
1/13/25
1/13/26
1/13/27
1/13/28
Port
61325
61326
61327
61328
147
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
In the Data Terminal Equipment profile (DTE) field, enter the DTE
number you used in Form 29 and the same CDN you used in Form 11.
-
Assign a Tenant, Extension number, COS, COR, and circuit
descriptor number programmed in Form 11.
5. Program the RS232-to-IP serial port converter with the settings in
Table 24 on page 149.
Note: For Remote Port, enter the port number programmed in Form 12, not
6830 as the table shows.
6. Connect the Hotel/Motel terminal or ACD Monitor computer to the
Layer 2 switch using the RS232-to-IP serial port converter.
7. Verify that the device and SX-200 ICP are communicating. If they are
communicating, you will see an exchange of ENQ (Enquire) and ACK
(Acknowledge) commands at the device. If they are not
communicating, see page 271 for troubleshooting information.
148
Basic Programming
Programming Voice mail and PMS Integration
Requirements
•
MOSS Option 124, Voice mail Property Management System.
•
A Hyatt Encore or HIS compatible PMS.
•
An RS232-to-IP serial port converter, such as the Precidia
Technologies Ether232 or iPocket232 (available from the vendor or its
resellers), is required to connect the customer's PMS computer to the
Layer 2 switch. A dataset connection to a DNIC port or an RS-232
serial port on the SX-200 ICP controller will not work.
Follow the instructions supplied with the converter to program its
Ethernet and serial port settings. Programming for the Precidia
programming is provided below. The Ethernet settings (converter IP
address, Subnet Mask and Gateway IP address) to use depend on the
LAN configuration. The serial port settings to use are as follows:
Table 24: RS232-to-IP Serial Port Converter Settings
Setting
Value
Protocol
Telnet (cln)
Port Setting
9600 bps 8n1 [no]
Connection control
Net-Linked
Terminal Type
vt100
Local Port
0
Remote IP
SX-200 ICP RTC IP Address
Remote Port
6830
Fallback IP
0.0.0.0
Fallback Port
0
149
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
SX-200 ICP programming
1. Form 04, System Options/System Timers
-
Enable Option 124, Voice mail Property Management System..
Note: Enabling Option 124 requires a system reset.
2. Form 49 - Voice mail Option
-
Select the PMS Protocol, Hyatt Encore or HIS.
Setting up the Ether232
1. Connect cables (power, Ethernet from Layer 2 switch to Ether232, and
serial from PC to Ether232, or straight-through cable for iPocket 232).
Note: The serial cable connecting the PC to the Ether232 must be a Null
Modem (RS232-Crossover) cable.
2. Start a terminal program on the PC (such as Hyperterminal) and set
the configuration to 9600-8-N-1.
3. Press and hold the Configure button on back panel of the Ether232 for
several seconds until the Ether232 configuration menu appears on the
terminal.
4. Assign the Ether232 a valid IP Address with Subnet Mask and
Gateway IP Address.
5. Configure the Serial Port for the Ether232 with the settings in Table 24.
6. Set the remote IP address. This is the IP address of the SX-200 ICP.
7. Set the remote IP port to 6830.
8. Ensure that all remaining entries are set to zero. If they are not 0 set
them to 0.
9. Save the configuration.
10. Unplug the PC from the Ether232 and connect the PMS computer in
its place.
11. Press any key to establish communication with the SX-200 ICP.
150
Basic Programming
Programming the PMS Interface on the
SX-200 ICP
Requirements
•
Purchase MOSS Option 108, Property Management System.
•
Lodgistix PMS software package (or a package that follows the same
protocol).
•
An RS232-to-IP serial port converter, such as the Precidia
Technologies Ether232 or iPocket232 (available from the vendor or its
resellers), for PMS applications requiring serial connectivity to the
SX-200 ICP. IP-enabled applications can connect via Telnet.
SX-200 ICP programming
1. Determine the customer’s PMS communications protocol requirements:
baud rate, parity, character length and number of stop bits.
2. Form 04, System Options
-
Program the following:
System Options / Timers
Status
04 Message Waiting and Message Register Clear Print
ENABLE
11 Automatic Wake-Up
ENABLE
13 Automatic Wake-Up Print
ENABLE
32 Outgoing Call Restriction
ENABLE
27 Room Status Audit
DISABLE
33 Room Status
DISABLE
34 Auto Room Status Conversion / Wake Up Print
DISABLE
108 - Property Management System
ENABLE
124 - Voice Mail Property Management System
ENABLE
151
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
3. Form 11, Circuit Descriptor
-
Program to match the protocol.
-
Select the Circuit Descriptor Options.
Option Name
Value
Session Inactivity Disconnect Timer
0
Guard Timer
2
Minimum Baud Rate
match customer’s PMS
Default Baud Rate
match customer’s PMS
Maximum Baud Rate
match customer’s PMS
Always use Default Baud Rate when called
YES
DTR Off Disconnect Timer
5
DTR to CTS Delay Timer
100
DTR Forced High
YES
RTS Forced High
YES
DSR Is held High when device is Idle
YES
CTS Is held High when device is Idle
YES
Originate a DTRX Call with Low - High transition of
DTR
NO
Action taken if the Idle DTE has DTR Low
(Auto-Answer)
REFUSE
ASYNC: Keyboard Origination Allowed (Auto Baud)
DISABLE
ASYNC: ADL Auto Baud
DISABLE
ASYNC: Flow Control
XON/XOFF
ASYNC: Break Key Function
Transparent
ASYNC: PBX Attention Character
0
ASYNC: Parity
match customer’s PMS
ASYNC: Character Length
match customer’s PMS
ASYNC: Number Of Stop Bits
match customer’s PMS
DS2100: Operating Mode
ASYNCHRONOUS
152
Basic Programming
4. Form 12, Data Assignment
-
Program a SOCKET type data device to an available PLID in the
following range:
PLID
1/13/20
1/13/21
1/13/22
1/13/23
1/13/24
-
Port
61320
61321
61322
61323
61324
PLID
1/13/25
1/13/26
1/13/27
1/13/28
Port
61325
61326
61327
61328
Assign a Tenant, Extension number, COS, COR, and circuit
descriptor number.
5. Form 34, Directed I/O: program the PMS.
EXT NUM
From Form 12
PRINTOUT
PRINTOUT TYPE
PMS
AUTOPRINT
GUARANTEED
NO
6. Form 03, Class of Service Define
-
Program the following table:
Device
COS Option
Status
Attendant
Consoles
101 Attendant Outgoing Restriction / Room Status
Set Up
ENABLE
105 Attendant Guest Room Key
ENABLE
Room
Phones
202 Alarm Call
ENABLE
220 Do Not Disturb
ENABLE
232 Message Waiting SETUP Lamp
ENABLE
703 Message Register Applies
ENABLE
239 Priority Dial 0 (optional - see step 6)
ENABLE
244 Room Status Applies
DISABLE
608 SUPERSET Status Display
DISABLE
153
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
7. Form 19, Call Rerouting
-
Program “Station Dial 0" routing.
The “Station Dial 0" answer point for all tenants must be a Console
LDN or Subattendant LDN. To allow the customer’s PMS to set
message waiting, you must program Day, Night 1, and Night 2 answer
points to the same LDN.
[ Tenant ___ ] Type Of Call
Station Dial 0 Routing
-
Day
Same LDN
N1
N2
Same LDN
Same LDN
If you require different “Dial 0" answer points for Day, N1, and N2
use “Priority Dial 0" as an alternate method.
8. Form 34, Directed I/O: program the PMS.
EXT NUM
From Form 12
PRINTOUT
PMS
PRINTOUT TYPE
AUTOPRINT
GUARANTEED
NO
9. Do one of the following:
-
Start a Telnet session on the PMS computer to the IP address of the
SX-200 ICP and the socket port number programmed in Form 12.
-
Connect the PMS computer to the Layer 2 switch using the
RS232-to-IP serial port converter. Then, program the converter
with the settings in Table 24 on page 149.
Note: For Remote Port, enter the port number programmed in Form 12, not
6830 as the table shows.
10. Verify that the customer’s PMS computer communicates with the
SX-200 ICP.
For serially-connected PMS computers, you will see an exchange of
ENQ (Enquire) and ACK (Acknowledge) commands at the customer’s
PMS computer if it is communicating with the SX-200 ICP. If they are
not communicating, see page 271 for troubleshooting information.
154
Basic Programming
Programming SpectraLink Wireless
Telephones
Requirements
•
SX-200 ICP Release 2.1 or later software and one IP device license
per Netlink phone.
•
A properly configured and operational wireless LAN—includes
compatible 802.11b wireless access points and SpectraLink Voice
Priority Server (SVP).
Notes:
1. Software for the SpectraLink telephones is provided on the
SX-200 ICP system software CD.
2. The push-to-talk feature of the NetLink i640 requires enabling
multicasting on the subnet used for the wireless telephones and
the SVP Server. Routers are typically configured with filters to
prevent multicast traffic from flowing outside of specific domains.
Where possible, the wireless LAN can be placed on a separate
VLAN or subnet to reduce the effects of broadcast and multicast
traffic from devices in other network segments.
Programming
SX-200 ICP
•
In CDE Form 47, IP Networking, DHCP Options, Common Options
subform, program the following options:
•
3, Default Gateway IP address (default is 192.168.1.1)
•
66, SpectraLink firmware TFTP server IP address
(default is 192.168.1.2)
•
129, SX-200 ICP (RTC) IP address (default is 192.168.1.2)
•
130 - DHCP Server Identifier (default is MITEL IP PHONE)
•
151, SVP server IP address.
•
Register the telephones with the SX-200 ICP either in CDE Form 09
(Desktop Device Assignments) or from the telephones by entering the
IP Set PIN Registration code and the desired directory number.
•
Assign a Class of Service to each telephone in Form 09.
155
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
•
(Optional) Associate the SpectraLink Wireless phone with the user's
desk phone. See Phone Twinning for programming instructions.
•
(Optional) Assign features and line appearances to keys on the phones.
SpectraLink Devices and Access Points
The following table summarizes the programming requirements for
SpectraLink and other associated third-party devices. For detailed
instructions, refer to the SpectraLink documentation on the SX-200 ICP
software CD. See also the documentation supplied with the Access Points
selected for the installation.
Notes:
1. The menus and options in the examples may vary slightly
depending on the version of software in the device or the device
type.
2. Settings not explicitly configured should be left at their default
values.
156
Basic Programming
Table 25: SpectraLink Installation Checklist
NetLink Telephones
Parameter
Requirement
ESS ID
Ensure that ESSID matches Access Point ESSID.
Example:
ESS ID -> Static Entry -> 123456
License
Management
Ensure that selected license setting allows for TFTP Server IP Address
Input.
Example:
License Mgmt -> Set Current -> Type 014
Security
Ensure that selected security matches Access Point Security Settings.
Example:
Security -> WEP -> Authentication -> Open System
Security -> WEP -> WEP On/Off -> WEP On
Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Default Key -> 1
Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Key Length -> 40-Bit
Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Key #1 -> 1111111111
Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Key #2 -> 2222222222
Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Key #3 -> 3333333333
Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Key #4 -> 4444444444
Security -> WEP -> Rotation Secret -> 1
NOTE: Please be aware that once a WEP Key has been entered, it will
not be displayed when re-accessing that Key Information menu.
CAREFULLY enter the required Key to prevent typos.
IP Addresses
Ensure that the defined IP addresses match the host Access Point
subnet settings using either Static or DHCP configuration.
Example:
Static settings
IP Addresses -> Static IP -> Phone IP -> 192.168.0.101
IP Addresses -> Static IP -> TFTP Server IP -> 192.168.0.15
IP Addresses -> Static IP -> Default Gateway -> 192.168.0.1
IP Addresses -> Static IP -> Subnet Mask -> 255.255.255.000
IP Addresses -> Static IP -> SVP IP Addr -> 192.168.0.20
IP Addresses -> Static IP -> RTC IP Addr -> 192.168.0.15
DHCP settings
003 (Default Gateway) - IP Address - 192.168.0.1
128 (TFTP Server IP Address) - IP Address - 192.168.0.15
129 (RTC IP Address) - IP Address - 192.168.0.15
130 (DHCP Server Identifier) - ASCII String - MITEL IP PHONE
151 (SVP Server) - IP Address - 192.168.0.20
(Page 1 of 3)
157
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 25: SpectraLink Installation Checklist (continued)
Access Point (Symbol)
ESS ID & IP
Addresses
Ensure that the correct IP settings for the Access Point, as well as the
desired Net_ID (ESS ID), are configured correctly.
Example:
IP Address - 192.168.0.25
Gateway IP Address - 192.168.0.1
DNS IP Address - 192.168.0.200
Net_ID (ESS) - 123456
Additional DNS - 192.168.0.201
Special
Functions
Ensure that the desired wireless security settings are defined correctly.
Example:
Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Pre-shared Key -> Enabled
Configure Authentication and Encryption -> WEP -> 40 bit
Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Configure WEP/KeyGuard
-> Encryption Key ID -> 1
Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Configure WEP/KeyGuard
-> WEP/KeyGuard Key Maintenance -> Key 1 -> 11111 11111
Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Configure WEP/KeyGuard
-> WEP/KeyGuard Key Maintenance -> Key 2 -> 22222 22222
Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Configure WEP/KeyGuard
-> WEP/KeyGuard Key Maintenance -> Key 3 -> 33333 33333
Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Configure WEP/KeyGuard
-> WEP/KeyGuard Key Maintenance -> Key 4 -> 44444 44444
Set System
Configuration
Ensure that Access Control is enabled in order to make the wireless
network more secure.
Example:
Set System Configuration -> Access Control -> Allowed
Set Access
Control List
Ensure that devices allowed on the wireless network have their MAC
Address entered correctly in the list.
Example:
Set Access Control List -> Address Type -> Individual -> Add-[F2] ->
08:00:0F:01:02:03
(Page 2 of 3)
158
Basic Programming
Table 25: SpectraLink Installation Checklist (continued)
Netlink SVP Server
Parameter
Requirement
SVP-II
Configuration
Ensure that the proper settings for the NetLink wireless phones
SpectraLink Voice Priority management are entered correctly.
Example:
SVP-II Configuration -> Phones per Access Point -> 4
SVP-II Configuration -> SVP-II Master -> 192.168.0.20
SVP-II Configuration -> First Alias IP Address: -> 192.168.0.21
SVP-II Configuration -> Last Alias IP Address: -> 192.168.0.24
SVP-II Configuration -> SVP-II Mode -> Netlink IP
NOTE: Please ensure that the defined Alias IP Addresses Range does
not overlap with any other device, including NetLink Wireless IP
Phones, located on the same subnet.
Network
Configuration
Ensure that the correct IP Settings for the SVP Server are configured
correctly.
Example:
Network Configuration -> IP Address -> 192.168.0.20
Network Configuration -> Subnet Mask -> 255.255.255.000
Network Configuration -> Default Gateway -> 192.168.0.1
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the Access Point(s) in use is/are on the
same subnet as the SVP Server. Each subnet must have its own SVP
server:
(Page 3 of 3)
159
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Programming Call Forwarding - External
Call Forwarding - External forwards calls to an external destination by
using a personal speed call key, system abbreviated dial number, or a key
system personal speedcall.
Call Forwarding - External requires a receiver for dialing. If one is not
available in Call Forward - Don’t Answer, forwarding is ignored. If one is
not available during a reroute, the caller is dropped or given reorder tone.
1. Program the following COS options in the extension’s COS:
-
Enable COS Option 245 (Abbreviated Dialing Access).
-
Enable COS Option 208 (Call Forwarding External).
Note: The device which is calling the destination that is an external call
forward must have COS Option 208, Call Forward External, enabled.
Note: Check for split forwarding COS 260 and COS 709.
-
Disable COS Option 200 (Account Code, Forced Entry - External
Calls) to allow call forwarding to system abbreviated dial numbers.
2. Enable System Option 21 (Incoming to Outgoing Call Forward) for a
trunk or party with a single party trunk on hold to forward externally.
3. Program a feature access code for Feature Access Code 03 (Call
Forwarding - All Calls).
4. Form 30 (Device Interconnection Table) specifies which devices can
be connected together. For external call forwarding that involves two
trunks, verify that they can be connected together.
Toll Control applies to the calling party for Call Forwarding - External to
personal speed call keys or to key system personal speedcalls.
Toll Control does not apply when forwarding to system abbreviated dial
external numbers.
Toll Control does not apply to CO trunks which are externally call
forwarded.
The forwarding destination is the current stored speedcall key number,
personal abbreviated dial number, or system abbreviated dial number.
Note: On a Call Forward - Busy or Call Forward - Always call, the COS of
the caller (trunk or extension) is checked. Keep this in mind when transferring
calls to a phone which is externally Call Forwarded.
160
Basic Programming
Feature Limitations
Note: The capacities in Table 26 are not true hardware limitations, but may
be limits set by software. Most systems will reach practical operational
limitations before these large numbers of devices are reached.
Table 26: SX-200 ICP Feature Limitations
Feature
Limitation
Maximum number of simultaneous calls
248
Maximum number of Call Park keys
24
Maximum number of speech paths or channels used by any
call
2
Maximum number of simultaneous consultations
5
Maximum number of System Park Orbits
25
Maximum number of Specific Park Orbits
25
Maximum number of Voice mail Ports
24
Maximum number of Voice mail Boxes
748
Maximum number of simultaneous add-on (3-way) calls
DSP configuration
dependent
(see page 12)
Maximum number of simultaneous station-controlled
conference calls
DSP configuration
dependent
(see page 12)
Maximum number of parties in conference at one time
5
Maximum number of calls that can simultaneously be
camped on to a station, trunk group, or hunt group
247
Maximum number of simultaneous callbacks that can be
enabled
100
Maximum number of simultaneous call forwards that can be
enabled
650
Maximum number of simultaneous “Dial 0” calls
48
Maximum number of ONS telephones ringing simultaneously
per bay
32
Maximum number of messages queued in the system
750
Maximum number of hunt groups
99
(Page 1 of 3)
161
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 26: SX-200 ICP Feature Limitations (continued)
Feature
Limitation
Maximum number of ring groups
25
Maximum number of members per ring group
50
Maximum number of non-IP members per ring-all grp
32
Maximum number of callers queued for a ring group
20
Maximum number of hunt groups in ACD
99
Maximum number of ACD agents that may be defined
999
Maximum number of active agents in ACD per bay
25
Maximum number of calls that can be simultaneously
connected to Music-on-Hold
unlimited
Maximum number of stations in a station hunt group
50
Maximum number of stations in a call pickup group
50
Maximum number of dial call pickup groups
50
Maximum number of IP nodes that can be assigned
100
Maximum number of trunks assignable to night stations
200
Maximum number of trunks in a trunk group
50
Maximum number of trunk groups
50
Maximum number of calls that can override a given extension
1
Maximum number of attendant consoles
11
Maximum number of attendant consoles on a Digital Line
Card
4
Maximum number of calls that can be simultaneously held by
one attendant
8
Maximum number of incoming calls that can be separately
identified at the attendant console
8
Maximum number of LDNs that can be identified at the
attendant console
9
Maximum number of LDNs
100
Maximum Number of Night Bells
25
Maximum number of calls waiting that can be displayed at
console
99
Maximum number of calls that can be waiting at console
200
(Page 2 of 3)
162
Basic Programming
Table 26: SX-200 ICP Feature Limitations (continued)
Feature
Limitation
Maximum number of abbreviated dial numbers
1000
Maximum number SUPERSET Speed Dial numbers
2212
Maximum number of trunk buffers for SMDR
200
Maximum number of DATA SMDR buffers
128
Maximum number of stations of SUPERSET 4001,
SUPERSET 4015, SUPERSET 4025, SUPERSET 4125,
SUPERSET 4150, SUPERSET 401+, SUPERSET 410,
SUPERSET 420, SUPERSET 430, SUPERSET 3DN and
4DN telephones, DSS /BLF Interface Units, and ONS ports.
650
Maximum number of devices (all sets, stations, trunks,
consoles, and DMP units)
768
Maximum number of IP devices and other resources per
system
- IP trunks
- IP phones
30
248
Compression channels
24
Maximum number of music sources
25
Maximum number of Door relays
3
Maximum number of ASU / ASU II
8
Maximum number of lines: SX-200 Peripheral cabinet
96
Maximum number of TDM bays
7
Maximum number of ISDN bays
4
Maximum number of T1 links, including T1 D4 links, PRI links,
and NSU links
8
Maximum Number of T1 links per system
8
Maximum Number of Page Groups
50
Maximum Number of Paging Zones
9
Maximum Number of Stations in a Page Group
64
Maximum Number of Sub-attendants
25
Maximum Number of LDN Appearances
16
Maximum Number of Line Appearances
32
(Page 3 of 3)
163
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
CDE Cross Reference
Single Line
UCD
Verified Acct.
Voice mail (EMEM)
A2
C
C
C
A8
C
C
C
A7
C
C
C
C
25 - ARS: Route Plans
C
C
24 - ARS: Route Lists
C
21 - ARS: Day Zone Definition
C
20 - ARS: COR Group Definition
19 - Call Rerouting Table
18 - Miscellaneous System Ports
C
17 - Hunt Groups
C
16 - Trunk Groups
15 - Dial-In Trunks
13 - Trunk Circuit Descriptors
C
23 - ARS: Route Definition
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
B
A2
B2
B1
B1
B1
B1
B
A3
A5
B1
A4
C
B1
B1
A3
C
C
A
A1
A1
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
A2
C
B1
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
A2
A3
C
A2
A2
A2
A3
A3
A3
A4
A3
A5
B
B
B
C
B
A4
B
B
A2
A2
C
C
A2
C
C
C
C
C
A2
A5
C
C
C
B
C
C
A3
C
C
C
C
A6
C
C
C
A4
A5
A6
B
C
A4
A3
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
A6
B
C
C
A2
A4
A7
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
A13 A12 A11
A2
A3
C
C
C
C
C
C
A2
A2
A1
B1
C
A3
C
C
A2
C
A1
B1
A3
C
C
A2
A4
A1
B
A3
A1
C
C
A2
C
C
C
Legend:
A Forms must have specific programming completed to perform the task.
B Forms have direct impact on device operation.
C Related to process, or device, but not mandatory.
Digits after the letters (A1, A2...) denote the required order of entry.
164
C
A3
A1
A1
C
22 - ARS: Modified Digit Table
A2
A2
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
A1
C
14 - Non-Dial-In Trunks
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
12 - Data Assignment
C
11 - Data Circuit Descriptor
C
10 - Pickup Groups
06 - Tenant Night Switching Control
A1
A2
09 - Desktop Device Assignments
05 - Tenant Interconnection Table
A4
08 - Attendant LDN Assignments
04 - System Options/System Timers
A7
07 - Console Assignments
03 - COS Define
ACD
ASU
Compression
Console
Dataset
DID Trunk
DISA Dial In
E&M “Tie Trk”
Hotel
IP Trunk
ISDN Device
Key System
Modem
MOH
Multiline set
Night Bell
Non Dial In Trk
NSU
Pager
Phonebook
Printer
RAD
RAD (EMEM)
02 - Feature Access Codes
DEVICE
OR
OPTION
01- System configuration
FORM
C
C
C
C
A3
A4
C
C
A1
C
A2
A5
A6
C
C
C
B1
C
C
B2
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
A4
C
C
B
B
A6
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
40 - ACD Supervisors
41 - ACD Paths
A5 A2
A3
A6
C
C
C
A1
C
B
A7 A8
C
A8 A9 A10
B1
A4
A2
C
B2
C
A9
B
A1
55 - Digit Translation Table
54 - Calling Party Number
53 - Bay Location Assignment
52 - Email
51 - Voice Mail Distribution
50 - Mailboxes
49 - Voice Mail Options
48 - Voice Networking
47 - IP Networking
46 - Key System Toll Control
44 - Network Synchronization
43 - T1 Link Assignment
42 - T1 Link Descriptors
39 - ACD Agent Groups
C
38 - ACD Keys Template
37 - Guest Rm SUPERSET KeysTemplate
36 - Modem Assignment
35 - Global Find Access Code
34 - Directed IO
33 - Account Code Entry
32 - CDE Data Print
31 - System Abbreviated Dial Entry
30 - Device Interconnection Table
29 - DTE Profile
28 - Form Access Restriction Def’n.
27 - ARS: Maximum Dialed Digits
26 - ARS: ARS Digits
Basic Programming
FORM
A1
B
B
A3
C
C
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DEVICE
OR
OPTION
ACD
ASU
Compression
Console
Dataset
DID Trunk
DISA Dial In
E&M “Tie Trk”
Hotel
IP Trunk
ISDN Device
Key System
Modem
MOH
Multiline set
Night Bell
Non Dial In Trk
NSU
Pager
Phonebook
Printer
RAD
RAD (EMEM)
Single Line
UCD
Verified Acct.
Voice mail (EMEM)
165
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
166
Chapter 4
Advanced Installation and
Programming
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
168
Advanced Installation and Programming
Overview
This chapter is for technicians who are installing the controller in an
existing computer network or as a standalone IP networking for both voice
and data.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt the procedures in this chapter
until you have successfully completed the Mitel Advanced
SX-200 ICP I & M Course. For more information, see
“SX-200 ICP Advanced Installation and Maintenance Course”
on page 3.
Topics covered:
ˆ Basic PC Networking
ˆ Planning your LAN
ˆ Implementing Virtual LANs (VLANs)
ˆ Networking Mitel IP-PBXs
ˆ Programming Unified Messaging
169
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Planning your Installation
Adding PCs and data devices to a voice-only LAN or installing the
SX-200 ICP into an existing data LAN requires careful planning.
Completing the following pre-installation questionnaire will help you select
and implement a network configuration that best suits the needs of your
customer.
Tip: Refer to the Engineering Guidelines document on the SX-200 ICP
software CD-ROM on Mitel Online for more information on network planning
and configuration.
Question
Will you connect to a private network or virtual private
network (VPN)?
What are the IP addresses, gateway address, and
subnet mask required for the SX-200 ICP sub network?
or
Will you use an external DHCP server?
Internal configuration questions
How many IP phones are you connecting to the
system?
How many PCs are you connecting to the system?
Are you connecting printers or file servers? How many?
Will these PCs and other devices use the DHCP server
in the SX-200 ICP controller?
Are you providing internet access through the WAN port
a Layer 2 switch port?
External configuration questions
What type of internet connection will you use? Dial-up,
xDSL, cable, or other?
Will you connect the system to an existing LAN?
What type of authentication is required?
Username
Password
PPP Security type
Will you network with other SX-200 ICP or 3300 ICP
systems?
170
Answer
Advanced Installation and Programming
Basic PC Networking
The dual-port IP Phones (5010, 5020, 5212, 5215, 5220 and 5224) provide
an inexpensive way to network a small number of PCs.
Figure 18: Basic PC Network
Enabling the (2nd) Port on IP Phones
IMPORTANT: To ensure optimum network performance, DO
NOT connect servers to the 2nd port on IP phones.
1. Form 04, System Options/System Timers
-
Enable System Option 131, PC (2nd) Port on IP Phone.
Note: The option must be purchased (listed on the MOSS sheet).
2. Form 03, COS Define
-
Enable Option 280, PC (2nd) Port on IP Phone.
171
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Virtual LANs (VLANs)
This section shows examples of the three most common, converged voice
and data networks for an SX-200 ICP.
•
Configuration 1: One DHCP Server per VLAN
•
Configuration 2: One External DHCP Server for Two VLANs
•
Configuration 3: Router on a Stick (one router interfacing multiple VLANs)
Configuration 1: One DHCP server per VLAN
Figure 19: VLAN Configuration 1
172
Advanced Installation and Programming
DHCP Server Settings (Example)
The following settings must be programmed in the DHCP server:
• DHCP IP Address Range
DHCP Options prior to Release 4.0
• Subnet Mask
• Option 128 (TFTP Server
IP address)
• Option 03 (Router)
• Option 125 (ASCII configuration
string) (New for Release 4.0)
• Option 129 (RTC IP)
• Option 130 (IP Phone DHCP Server)
• Option 132 (VLAN ID)
•
• Option 133 (Priority)
Table 27 shows the DHCP settings programmed for this configuration.
See “Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP server (prior to Release 4.0)” on
page 178 for information on programming SX-200 ICP DHCP settings on
a Windows 2000 DHCP server.
Table 27: DHCP Server Settings for Configuration 1 Example
DHCP Server on VLAN 1
(IP: 10.10.10.2)
Scope 1
Internal DHCP Server on
Controller
Scope 1
DHCP
10.10.10.10 to 10.10.10.100
20.20.20.10 to 20.20.20.100
Subnet
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
Opt. 03
10.10.10.251
20.20.20.251
Opt.128
20.20.20.1
20.20.20.1
Opt. 129
20.20.20.1
20.20.20.1
Opt. 130
MITEL IP PHONE
MITEL IP PHONE
Opt. 132
2
2
Opt. 133
6
6
Setting
NOTE: In Release 4.0, DHCP Options 128 - 133 are replaced by Option 125
Ddefault for Mitel-specific options) and Option 43 (for Mitel- and non-Mitel-specific
options.) In this example, the ASCII data string in Option 125 would look like this:
id:ipphone.mitel.com;sw_tftp=20.20.20.1;call_srv=20.20.20.1;vlan=2;l2p=6
For information on programming the controller IP address and DHCP
settings, see page 178.
173
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example)
The following two tables show settings on a Cisco and an HP Layer 2
switch for the Configuration 1 example.
Note: These settings also apply for the other network configuration
examples.
Table 28: Cisco Layer 2 Switch Settings for All Configuration
Examples
Port
Use
Command
A
Access port for
VLAN 1
None (by default, all ports belong to VLAN 1)
Access port for
VLAN 2
L2switch(config-if)#switchport mode access
L2switch(config-if)#switchport access vlan 2
Trunk port with
Dot1q for IP Phone
L2switch(config)#interface fast 0/5
L2switch(config-if)#switchport mode trunk
L2switch(config-if)#switchport trunk encapsulation
dot1q
B
C
D
E
Table 29: HP Layer 2 Switch Settings for All Configuration Examples
Port
Use
Command (on HP VLAN menu)
A
Access port for VLAN 1
VLAN 1 = untagged
VLAN 2 = NO
Access port for VLAN 2
VLAN 1 = NO
VLAN 2 = untagged
Trunk port
VLAN 1 = untagged
VLAN 2 = tagged
B
C
D
E
174
Advanced Installation and Programming
Configuration 2: One external DHCP server for
two VLANs
Figure 20: VLAN Configuration 2
To configure the SX-200 ICP system to use an external DHCP server (for
example, Windows NT server or Windows 2000 server) through the
Layer 2 switch port, you must use Form 47 to disable the controller’s
built-in DHCP server. The local phones and PCs on the SX-200 ICP LAN
will then be able to receive IP addresses from the external server.
175
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
DHCP Server Settings (Example)
The following settings must be programmed in the DHCP server:
• DHCP IP Address Range
DHCP Options prior to Release 4.0
• Subnet Mask
• Option 128 (TFTP Server
IP address)
• Option 03 (Router)
• Option 125 (ASCII configuration
string) (New for Release 4.0)
• Option 129 (RTC IP)
• Option 130 (IP Phone DHCP Server)
• Option 132 (VLAN ID)
• Option 133 (Priority)
Table 30 shows the DHCP settings programmed for this configuration.
See “Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP server (prior to Release 4.0)” on
page 178 for information on programming SX-200 ICP DHCP settings on
a Windows 2000 DHCP server.
Table 30: DHCP Server Settings for Configuration 2 & 3 Examples
DHCP Server on VLAN 1
(IP: 10.10.10.2)
Setting
Scope 1
Scope 2
DHCP
10.10.10.10 to 10.10.10.100
20.20.20.10 to 20.20.20.100
Subnet
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
Opt.03
10.10.10.251
20.20.20.251
Opt. 128
20.20.20.1
20.20.20.1
Opt. 129
20.20.20.1
20.20.20.1
Opt. 130
MITEL IP PHONE
MITEL IP PHONE
Opt. 132
2
2
Opt. 133
6
6
NOTE: In Release 4.0, DHCP Options 128 - 133 are replaced by Option 125
Ddefault for Mitel-specific options) and Option 43 (for Mitel- and non-Mitel-specific
options.) In this example, the ASCII data string in Option 125 would look like this:
id:ipphone.mitel.com;sw_tftp=20.20.20.1;call_srv=20.20.20.1;vlan=2;l2p=6
For information on programming the controller IP address and DHCP
settings, see page 178.
176
Advanced Installation and Programming
Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example)
See “Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example)” on page 174.
Configuration 3: Router on a Stick
Figure 21: VLAN Configuration 3
DHCP Server Settings (Example)
See Table 30, “DHCP Server Settings for Configuration 2 & 3 Examples,”
on page 176.
See “Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP server (prior to Release 4.0)” on
page 178 for information on programming SX-200 ICP DHCP settings on
a Windows 2000 DHCP server.
Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example)
See “Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example)” on page 174.
177
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Programming the controller IP address and DHCP
settings
The IP address of the SX-200 ICP and its DHCP settings are set at the
factory. Use the following procedure if you need to change them.
To change the controller’s IP address and DHCP settings:
1. Establish a serial connection to the Maintenance port on the
SX-200 ICP Controller (see page 84 for instructions).
2. Log in to the CDE application.
3. In Form 47 (IP Networking), Subform 01 (SYSTEM IP)
-
Enter values for IP ADDRESS, IP NETMASK, IP GATEWAY, and
other settings as required.
4. Press ENTER.
5. In Subform 02 (DHCP SERVER)
-
Enter the required values. See the SX-200 ICP Technical
Documentation for information on values to use.
-
To disable the controller’s DHCP server, press the DISABLE
softkey; press ENABLE to re-enable it.
6. Press ENTER.
7. Reset the system (see page 193 for instructions).
Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP server (prior to
Release 4.0)
You can modify a Windows 2000 DHCP server to support IP Phones. A
DHCP server must be configured to support the IP Phones for each
subnet. The following items must be configured:
•
TFTP Server IP address (system IP address of the SX-200 ICP)
•
IP address of the RTC card
•
Mitel tag “MITEL IP PHONE”
178
Advanced Installation and Programming
To modify a Windows 2000 DHCP Server:
1. On the Start menu, point to Programs, then Administrative Tools,
and click DHCP.
2. Highlight the Server name and point to Action, then click Set
Predefined Options.
3. In the Predefined Options and Values window, click Add.
4. In the Option Type window, set the following:
-
Name: IP phone TFTP Server IP Address
-
Type: IP Address
-
Code: 128
Click OK.
-
Value: enter the system IP address of the SX-200 ICP, then click
OK.
5. In the Predefined Options and Values window, click Add again.
6. In the Option Type window, set the following:
-
Name: RTC IP Address
-
Type: IP Address
-
Code: 129
Click OK.
-
Value: System IP Address of SX-200 ICP
Click OK.
7. In the Predefined Options and Values window click Add again.
8. In the Option Type window, set the following:
-
Name: IP Phone DHCP Server
Type: String
Code: 130
Click OK.
Value: MITEL IP PHONE.
Click OK.
If you are using VLANs, do ALL of the following steps. If you are not using
VLANs, do steps 13 to 18 and step 21
9. In the Predefined Options and Values window click Add again.
-
Name: VLAN ID
179
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
-
Type: Hex LONG (32 bit word)
-
Code: 132
Click OK.
-
Value: enter a numeric value for the VLAN.
Note: The server will automatically convert the numeric value to Hex.
10. (Optional) In the Option Type window, set the following:
-
Name: Priority
-
Type: Hex LONG
-
Code: 133.
Click OK.
-
Value: enter a value from 1 to 7; Mitel recommends 0x6.
Click OK.
Note: The server will automatically convert the numeric value to Hex.
11. Highlight the Scope which contains the IP range for the IP Phones and
select Scope Options.
12. In Action, click Configure Options.
13. In the General window, select option 003 Router and enter the IP
address of the default Gateway and then click Add.
14. Click OK.
Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP server (Release
4.0 and later)
Note: Options 128-133 used in previous ICP releases are required to
Note: Neither Windows 2000 nor Windows 2003 support DHCP options
124/125. Options 60/43 must be used instead.
provide backward compatibility with IP sets that have yet to be upgraded
with firmware (version??) that supports options 124/125 or 60/43. After the
upgrade, the old options may be removed to prevent future conflicts with
standard use or with other vendors' use of these options.
180
Advanced Installation and Programming
To create Options 60/43 on a Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 DHCP
server:
1. Upgrade the SX-200 ICP to Release 4.0.
2. Upgrade the IP Phone firmware.
3. Start DHCP Manager.
4. In the console tree, click the applicable DHCP server branch.
5. Right-click the server, then click Define Vendor Classes followed by
Add.
6. In the New Class dialog box, type "Mitel Vendor Class" or other name
for the new option.
7. Type "ipphone.mitel.com"in the right side of the text box under ASCII.
8. Enter a null terminator (0x00) at the end of the hex string under Binary.
9. Click OK and then click Close.
10. On the Action menu, select Set Predefined Options.
11. In the Predefined Options and Values dialog box, select the Mitel
Vendor Class from the Option class list. Click Add.
12. In the Option Type dialog box, enter the following:
Field Name...
Name
Data Type
Code
What to enter...
Mitel Option
String
001
13. Click OK.
14. In the Predefined Options and Values dialog box, select 001 Mitel
Option and the Option name and enter the Mitel Information Data
string with the appropriate values for <IP address> and <N>:
id:ipphone.mitel.com;sw_tftp=<IP address>;call_srv=<IP
address>;dscp=<N>;vlan=<N>;l2p=<n>
15. Click OK.
16. Add the Mitel option to the DHCP scopes that require it, modifying the
ID string accordingly.
181
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Networking Mitel IP-PBXs
IP trunks allow you to interconnect multiple Mitel SX-200 ICP, SX-200 IP
Nodes and 3300 ICP systems in a Wide Area Network (WAN). The IP trunks
carry voice and signal messages through the Ethernet switch to the WAN.
The SX-200 ICP MX supports up to 30 IP trunks on a single “virtual” IP
Trunk card programmed in Bay 1, Slot 6.
Notes:
1. The SX-200 ICP supports end-node functionality only, which
means it can be connected to no more than one other node in
the network.
2. This configuration requires dedicated, managed links to the
Internet and is intended for larger implementations. For smaller
implementations, cable or DSL links can be used if the IP trunks
are carried within IPSec VPN tunnels with traffic shaping
features. The Mitel 6042 Managed VPN is recommended.
Figure 22: IP Trunking Example
182
Advanced Installation and Programming
SX-200 ICP Programming
1. Form 48, Voice Networking
-
Enter the IP Node Number and IP Address of each IP-PBX and
specify the maximum number of calls allowed to each.
Notes:
1. MAX CALLS must be greater than zero (the default); otherwise,
no calls are allowed to the node.
2. Each IP-PBX in the network must be assigned a unique IP Node
Number, which can be any number in the range 1 - 255.
The example below shows the Form 48 programming for a network of
three IP-PBXs. Each IP-PBX (node) has a unique IP Node number that
all the other IP-PBXs must have in their programming. The local site is
always Bay 1; the other sites have no Bay association.
2. Form 03, COS Define
-
-
Enable the following COS options
-
801, Incoming Trunk Call Rotary
-
802, Limited Wait For Dial Tone
-
811, ANI/DNI/CLASS Trunk
It is also recommended that you enable COS option 702 to prevent
calls from being denied access to trunks when the SMDR output is
stopped. If you want to capture incoming SMDR, enable COS
options 806 and 814.
Note: COS number 7 has the default IP Trunk settings.
183
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
3. In Form 04, System Options/System Timers, enable option 86, PRI
Card - QSIG, to allow Calling Name and Number to be transmitted
over IP trunks.
4. In Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptors
-
Set a descriptor to T1 E&M in the Options subform. Descriptor 7 in
the default database has the correct settings for IP trunks. If
selecting another descriptor, set options to the default values,
except:
set Incoming Start Type to WINK
set Outgoing Start Type to WINK
set QSIG Supplementary Services to YES
set DTMF to NO.
5. Form 15, Dial-in Trunks
-
In the CDN field, enter the descriptor number that defines the T1
E&M trunk specified in Form 13.
6. Form 16, Trunk Groups
-
All IP Trunks must be programmed in the same group. To avoid
collisions with incoming IP trunk calls, enter the trunks into the
group in the opposite order that the far end has them entered.
7. Form 23, Route Definition
-
Program route definitions
-
In the Show IP subform, specify the routes of IP Trunk Groups.
8. If the connection to the PSTN is through embedded PRI (Dual T1/E1
Framer or T1/E1 Combo module), program Calling Party Number
(CPN) substitution in the following Forms
-
Form 54, Calling Party Number
Form 19, Call Rerouting Table
Form 22, ARS: Modified Digit Table
Note: In Form 22, for all SX-200 ICP controllers in the network, program a
modified digit entry with CPN enabled for external calls (calls destined to the
PSTN through the embedded PRI). Program another entry with CPN disabled
for internal network calls.
9. If you have not already done so, program the following Forms:
184
-
Form 26, ARS: Digit Strings.
-
Form 22, ARS: Modified Digit Table.
Advanced Installation and Programming
Uniform Numbering Plan
Optionally, you can configure the nodes in your network with a uniform
numbering plan. For example, you can program nodes A, B, and C to
share extensions 1000 to 1999.
1. Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptors
-
Set Present Node ID over IP Trunking to YES in the Options
subform.
2. Form 02, Feature Access Codes
-
Program the Node ID (Feature 34).
3. On each node, program ARS leading digits containing node numbers
for all other nodes in the network. This eliminates the need for users
to insert digits when they return external calls from other nodes.
185
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
186
Chapter 5
Routine Maintenance
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
188
Routine Maintenance
Is the System Healthy?
System health checklist
ˆ LEDs on controller and expansion units are the correct color
ˆ Internal and external calls can be made from IP phones and DNIC and
ONS sets
ˆ Voice mailboxes are accessible
ˆ Users have user guides for their phones
ˆ Database is backed up
189
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Checking the System
1. Check the controller and expansion units. Ensure that all LEDs
indications are correct. See “Checking the System LEDs” on
page 239.
2. Make internal and external calls from the IP phones and analog sets.
3. Call into the system on all line types and ensure that incoming calls
ring (if programmed) the correct destination.
4. Review voice mail programming. Make calls to phones and check that
they forward to voice mail.
5. Ensure the external call forwarding permissions are set correctly.
6. Ensure that remote system access is set up if you plan to perform
remote programming. See “Secure Telnet Connection to the
controller” on page 85.
7. Ensure that you have made recent backups. See “Performing
Backups” on page 199.
190
Routine Maintenance
Installing FRUs
Only persons who have successfully completed a Mitel Installation and
Maintenance training course for the SX-200 ICP should perform removal
and replacement procedures.
WARNING:INSTRUCTIONS MUST BE FOLLOWED
EXPLICITLY WHEN THEY INVOLVE WORK WITH AND
CHANGES TO THE PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY OF THE UNIT.
Precautions
Observe the following precautions when working on the system,
particularly when handling PCB cards or using test equipment to measure
voltages.
•
When installing or replacing PCB cards turn power off, but maintain
the ground connections to the equipment. Power must be OFF when
inserting or removing cards. These cards are identified with
appropriate warnings on their faceplates.
•
Always wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling printed circuit
cards. Handle PCB cards only by the edges and avoid contact with any
exposed electrical connections. When removing a new card from its
package, touch the package to the cabinet frame first to release any
static voltage buildup, prior to removing the card and inserting it into
the equipment.
•
Conductive packages (antistatic packaging) should be grounded prior
to opening them to remove the contents, and similarly grounded prior
to placing a card in the package. Place suspected faulty cards in
conductive packages to prevent further possible damage to the cards.
Cards that are not correctly packed in antistatic packaging when
returned will not be covered by any warranty.
Use proper fitting Phillips screwdrivers (#1 or #2) to prevent
damaging components and fasteners.
191
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Power Down System
The following chart describes system power down procedures.
Table 31: System Power Down
Step
1.
Action
Power Down the controller
•
2.
Disconnect the power cord from the
controller.
Power Down the NSU or ASU
•
3.
Comments
Disconnect the power cord from the
NSU or ASU.
Power Down Peripheral Cabinets
•
Unlock and open door.
•
Turn off Bay Power Supply switch
and remove cabinet line cord from
the wall outlet.
The system is now properly
powered down.
Power Up System
The following chart describes system power up procedures.
Table 32: System Power Up
Step
Action
1.
Plug the controller power cord
into the wall outlet.
2.
Plug the NSU and ASU (if
installed) line cord into the wall
outlet.
3.
Plug the Peripheral Cabinet (if
installed) line cord into the wall
outlet. Turn on Bay Power
Supply switch.
Replace any covers or barriers
that were removed previously.
Close and lock the door.
192
Comments
The system is now properly powered
up, and its door is closed and locked
to prevent unauthorized access to
equipment.
Routine Maintenance
System Reset
The controller can be reset by:
•
pressing the Reset button on the front panel
•
using the RESTART_SYSTEM command from the Maintenance terminal
•
powering the controller down then back up
When the system is reset, it stops all call processing activity, runs
initialization tests. It also reloads software from the external CompactFlash
card if it detects that the card was removed, and then reinserted.
CAUTION: Resetting the system drops all calls in progress. If a
reset is required, do it during periods of low or no call traffic.
System Shutdown
A System Shutdown is required before moving the controller or replacing
hardware in it. Shutdown terminates all calls (except calls between IP
phones or calls carried on IP trunks) and disables the serial and IP
interfaces.
CAUTION: The following procedure takes the system out of
service.
To shut down the system:
1. Log into the Maintenance Terminal (serial connection only) and begin
a Maintenance session.
2. Press the following softkeys:
RE_START
SHUTDOWN
ENTER
After entering the command, wait for this message to display: "System
shutdown complete." Then, unplug the power cord.
To return the system to service:
•
Unplug it and plug it in again, or press the Reset button.
193
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Re-initializing the Controller
Re-initializing the controller re-installs the system software and database.
Perform a re-initialization to recover from a failed attempt to upgrade the
system software or to return an unstable system to a known state.
You can re-initialize the controller two ways:
1. Re-install the software and a new, or previously backed-up database,
from the external CompactFlash card. For instructions, see “Installing
Software Using an External CompactFlash Card (Optional Initial
Install)” on page 34
2. Use an FTP server to download the software and database to the
controller. For instructions, see “Upgrading by FTP” on page 206.
IMPORTANT: Re-initializing a working system with a database
that has different IP addressing information than the database it is
replacing will force the IP Phones to reboot. The phones take 10 to
15 minutes to return to service once the system is re-initialized.
194
Routine Maintenance
Replacing the Hard Drive or CompactFlash
Use this procedure to replace faulty internal media. To upgrade the media
in a working system, follow the procedure on page 45, “Installing a hard
drive.”
Note: Use Mitel-provided CompactFlash cards and hard drives only;
those obtained elsewhere are not supported.
To replace the hard drive or internal CompactFlash
1. Remove the external CompactFlash card, if inserted.
2. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
3. Remove the cover.
4. If replacing the CompactFlash card, remove it, install the new one, and
then skip to step 6.
5. If replacing the hard drive,
a. Unplug the ribbon cable and the power cable from the old hard drive.
b. Remove the old hard drive by unfastening the four small border
screws. Keep the screws.
c. Replace the drive with the new one.
Note: Ensure that the jumpers on the new drive are set to the Master
setting.
d. Connect the ribbon cable and power cable to the new hard drive.
195
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
6. Replace the cover.
7. Restore power to the controller.
8. Perform an Initial (CompactFlash Card) installation from the software
CD; see page 34 for instructions.
Note: When prompted for a database, select Custom to install a backup of
the original database (if available).
Replacing the Analog Main Board
1. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
2. Remove the top cover.
3. Remove the front panel.
4. Disconnect the three power supply connectors.
5. Remove the ribbon cable by flipping up the clip on the connectors at
each end of the cable as shown in the following figure.
196
Routine Maintenance
6. Remove the internal flash card as shown in the following figure.
7. Remove the four standoffs and two screws as shown in the following
figure.
197
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
8. Remove the two screws at the back of the unit as shown in the
following figure.
9. Remove the Analog Main Board.
10. Insert the new Analog Main Board.
11. Re-attach the two screws at the back of the unit.
12. Re-attach the two screws and the four standoffs.
13. Replace the flash card.
14. Replace the ribbon cable and snap the clips at both ends in place.
15. Replace the power supply connectors.
16. Snap the front panel back in place.
17. Replace the top cover.
Other FRUs
To replace the following, follow the installation procedure provided on the
page indicated.
•
Analog Option Board, see page 38
•
DSP Module, see page 40
•
Dual FIM Module, see page 42
•
Quad CIM Module, see page 43
•
Dual T1/E1 Framer Module, see page 44
•
Stratum Clock Module, see page 47
198
Routine Maintenance
Performing Backups
Backing Up a Database
The controller has three databases, one for CDE data, one for voice mail data
(includes configuration, greetings, and user messages) and one for IP
networking settings. All databases are maintained in flash memory (or on the
hard drive, if installed) inside the controller. An FTP server is required to back
up the databases. For information on setting up an FTP server, see page 77.
Note: Database backups do NOT include log files and trap files. Mitel
Technical Support may request these files should you call for assistance; see
““Sending Logs and other System Files to an E-mail Address or FTP Server”
on page 230” for more information.
It is recommended that you back up the database:
•
after the system is first installed and the database is set up
•
after changes have been made to the database
•
before any software upgrades.
Before starting the backup, ensure that the FTP destination directory is
writable (i.e., not read-only). Also, check that the FTP server IP address,
username, and password in Form 47 are correct.
Note: If voicemail storage is full, a backup can not be performed until at least
some of the messages have been deleted. If the largest remaining memory
fragment is more than 500KB but less than 1MB, a major log is generated
and a major alarm is raised. If the largest memory fragment is less than
500KB, a critical log is generated, a critical alarm is raised, and the system
resets immediately. To increase voice mail capacity on flash-based systems,
install an optional internal hard drive.
To back up the database:
1. Log in to the Maintenance Terminal (direct, secure Telnet, or SX-200
ICP Web Interface) and begin a Maintenance session.
2. Press
SYSTEM
DATABASE
BACKUP
FTP_SERVER
FULL or MEDIUM
CONFIRM (enter a a file name)
CONFIRM
199
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
FULL backs up everything; MEDIUM excludes voice mail messages.
Full backups are recommended.
Note: Voice mail is unavailable while the backup is progress.
The system creates a backup to the specified FTP home directory.
Restoring a Database
IMPORTANT: If the IP addressing information in the old and
new (restored) databases do not match, the IP Phones will
reboot. Rebooting begins 10 to 15 minutes after the system
resets (a reset is required following a database restore) and
takes approximately two to three minutes to complete.
Before restoring, check that the FTP server IP address, username, and
password in Form 47 are correct.
1. Log in to the Maintenance Terminal (direct, secure Telnet, or
SX-200 ICP Web Interface) and begin a Maintenance session.
2. Press
SYSTEM
DATABASE
RESTORE
FTP_SERVER
ENTER
CONFIRM
The system prompts you for the file name.
3. Enter the file name.
4. Press CONFIRM.
After the database file is restored, the system automatically resets and
reboots.
200
Routine Maintenance
Installing an Alternate Database
The software CD has two databases on it that you can use instead of the
factory-installed default database. One is blank except for the IP settings in
Form 47 which are the same as those in the default database; the other is
for use with Premier Business systems. Another that has four-digit extension
numbers is available on Mitel Online. You can also install databases that
were programmed on other systems and backed up to a file.
To install an alternate database either:
•
Re-install the system software and the required database to a
CompactFlash card, and then use the card to re-initialize the
controller. For more information, see “Installing Software Using an
External CompactFlash Card (Optional Initial Install)” on page 34.
Or
•
Download the database to the controller via an FTP server.
Notes:
1. To avoid MOSS option conflicts, install the Premier database
BEFORE enabling the MOSS options.
2. Advanced certification is required to install a Premier Business
system.
Installing an alternate database via FTP
Before beginning the installation, Check that the FTP server IP address,
username, and password in Form 47 are correct.
1. Establish a connection between the FTP server and the controller
either through the Layer 2 switch or by connecting directly to the LAN
port on the controller.
2. Copy the required .db file to the FTP server’s home directory.
3. Follow the instructions on page 200 to restore the database to the
controller.
201
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Upgrading the System Software
You can upgrade system software either from the external CompactFlash
card or by FTP, unless upgrading from a Release 1.x system. The internal
media in 1.x systems require repartitioning, which can only be done with a
CompactFlash card that has an “Initial Installation” software load.
Upgrading does not alter the currently installed database.
If you are upgrading to Release 4.0 and you are planning to use Mitel 53xx
IP phones, your upgrade procedure may vary depending on your system
configuration. The following table lists upgrade conditions:
When upgrading to Release 4.0...
Your current system:
...this method will install
Release 4.0 software
WITH
53xx support
Rel 2 or 3 with internal • Initial install OR
hard drive
• Local upgrade OR
...this method will
install Release 4.0
software WITHOUT
53xx support
• FTP upgrade
• FTP upgrade (See Note 1)
Rel 2 or 3 with 512MB • Initial install OR
• FTP upgrade
Flash
• Local upgrade (See Note 2)
Rel 2 or 3 with 256 MB Not available
Flash
• Initial install OR
• Local install OR
• FTP upgrade
Note 1: The FTP upgrade must be done twice to deliver 53xx set support.
Note 2: If your voicemail storage is excessive, there may not be enough
room to install the 53xx software. The upgrade procedure provides a
warning message in this case.
202
Routine Maintenance
Upgrading from Release 1.x to Release 2.0 or later
Release 1.x systems upgraded to Release 2.0 or later no longer require
that the external CompactFlash remain in the controller at all times.
Note: De-program phantom bays programmed on the Release 1.x
system before migrating to Release 2.0 or later.
The recommended procedure for upgrading Release 1.x systems is as
follows:
1. Back up the database to an FTP server. See page 199 for instructions.
2. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
3. Remove the external CompactFlash.
4. Run the Initial [CompactFlash card] Installation from the SX-200 ICP
software CD-ROM. See page 34 for more detailed instructions.
5. Insert the CompactFlash card into the slot on the front of the controller.
IMPORTANT: Use a Mitel-supplied 256 MB CompactFlash card.
DO NOT partition the card and DO NOT copy files to it before
proceeding with the software installation.
6. Power up the controller.
7. Wait for the CompactFlash status LED to turn GREEN, and for the
phones to come up, indicating that the upgrade is complete.
8. Remove the CompactFlash card.
9. Update the IP settings to enable the database to be restored by FTP.
10. Restore the database. See page 200 for instructions.
After the database file is restored, the system automatically resets and
reboots.
11. To prevent unnecessary alarms, revise the Alarm Thresholds in
Maintenance and check the bay number assignments in Form 53.
203
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Upgrading from the External CompactFlash Card
(Release 2.0 or later)
WARNING:THE UPGRADE PROCEDURE WILL INSTALL NEW
SOFTWARE IN THE CONTROLLER.
Installer's PC requirements
•
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows XP operating
system running an FTP server.
•
For serial connections, a VT100 terminal emulator (HyperTerminal)
•
For remote or LAN-based connections, a secure Telnet client that
supports SSL/TLS (Mitel Telnet client recommended), or a web
browser to access the SX-200 ICP Web Interface
•
A serial connection to the controller Maintenance port and/or a
Network Interface Card (NIC) connected to the IP network
•
A CompactFlash Card Reader/Writer
•
256M CompactFlash card (use Mitel-supplied card only).
•
(Optional) System Option 109 - Remote Software Download in Form 04.
Note: Windows 2000 users must clear the browser cache.
You also need
•
The IP address of the controller (default 192.168.1.2)
•
The system software CD or access to the appropriate online resource.
Note: A typical upgrade requires approximately five minutes to complete
once the new software is installed and the system rebooted. Add five minutes
more if installing additional voice mail language files and another 10 minutes
if the upgrade includes a new load of software for the Analog Main Board.
To upgrade the system from the CompactFlash card
1. Remove the external CompactFlash card from the controller (if
installed).
2. Insert the CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash Reader/Writer.
IMPORTANT: Use a Mitel-supplied 256 MB CompactFlash card.
DO NOT partition the card and DO NOT copy files to it before
proceeding with the software installation.
204
Routine Maintenance
3. Insert the system software CD-ROM into the PC or access the file online.
4. Run SX200ICP_SETUP.EXE from the CD.
5. Select Local Upgrade [Flash Card] Installation, then click Next.
6. Select languages for voice mail prompts if applicable. The default is
English and is not selectable.
7. Select the CompactFlash Reader/Writer drive.
8. Select Format to format the CompactFlash card, then click Next.
Note: When formatting the CompactFlash card, select FAT as the file system.
9. Click Finish when prompted.
10. Wait until the computer completes writing to the CompactFlash card
before ejecting it.
Notes:
• To avoid ending the writing operation before it finishes, DO NOT
click STOP prior to EJECT.
•
Certain PC CompactFlash readers have problems with cards
larger than 128M. They report that copying is complete when in
fact not all the files have been copied. If in doubt, eject the card,
re-insert it, and then use Windows Explorer to confirm that files
are present.
11. Remove the CompactFlash card from the Reader/Writer and insert it
into the card slot on the front of the controller.
12. Log into the Maintenance Terminal and begin a Maintenance session.
13. Press
SYSTEM
RE_START
RESET_SYSTEM
The system boots from the CompactFlash card and installs the new
software. Installation is complete when the phones are up and the LED
next to the card slot turns green.
14. When prompted, log into the Maintenance Terminal in CDE mode and
program all the purchased options from the MOSS sheet. (This step is
not usually required for a software upgrade.)
15. Remove the CompactFlash card from the controller when the LED
adjacent to the card slot turns green.
205
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Upgrading by FTP
Before beginning the upgrade, check that the SX-200 ICP is programmed
with the required FTP information in Form 47, Subform 01 (see “Setting up
an FTP Server on a Maintenance PC” on page 77. Also, verify that the
following additional requirements have been satisfied:
•
existing database is backed up to the PC (for instructions, see
page 199)
•
Remote Software Download option (System Option 109 in Form 04)
has been purchased and enabled
•
external CompactFlash card is inserted in the SX-200 ICP (release 1.x
systems only)
The upgrade takes about 3-4 minutes depending on the speed of the FTP
connection. Double the time if installing additional languages for voice mail
prompts.
To upgrade the SX-200 ICP Controller software from an FTP server:
1. Run SX200ICP_SETUP.EXE from the software CD or on-line source.
2. Select Remote Upgrade (FTP) Installation, and then click Next.
3. Select languages for voice mail prompts if applicable. The default is
English and is not selectable.
4. Select the FTP server home directory, then click Next twice to begin
the installation.
5. Click Finish when prompted.
6. Log in to the Maintenance Terminal (direct, secure Telnet, or SX-200
ICP Web Interface) and begin a Maintenance session.
7. Press
SYSTEM
DATABASE
UPGRADE_SW
CONFIRM
8. When prompted, press ENTER to begin the upgrade.
9. If the upgrade failed, consult the Maintenance Logs for the cause.
206
Routine Maintenance
Upgrading the NSU or PRI Card Software
Use the IMAT application to upgrade the software for a PRI card or an
NSU. For more information about using IMAT, refer to “IMAT
Programming” on page 122.
To upgrade an NSU or PRI card to a new version of software or
re-install the software:
1. Ensure that the NSU or PRI card is running by checking its status
LEDs.
2. Connect a computer to the RS-232 serial port of the NSU or PRI card.
3. Run IMAT.
4. Click on File -> Connect to connect to the NSU or PRI card.
5. Download the software from Mitel Online or insert the software
CD-ROM in the computer's CD-ROM drive.
6. Click on Maintenance -> Software Upgrade and proceed with the
software upgrade or re-installation.
7. Click on Maintenance -> Remote Site Reset to reset the NSU or PRI
card.
207
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Migrating an SX-200 EL/ML to an SX-200 ICP MX
Except for the parts in the table below, most of the EL/ML system,
including the customer database, is preserved in the migration to the
SX-200 ICP MX.
Table 33: Retained and Surplus Parts
Retained Parts
Surplus or Unsupported Parts
main cabinet (becomes a peripheral bay) control card in main cabinet
peripheral cabinets
SPINE Bays
customer database
IP Nodes
peripheral interface cards and modules
Control Dual and Triple FIMs/CIMs
telephones and other peripherals
ISDN Gateways
COV cards/COV Vmail
SUPERSET 3 and 4 telephones
Datasets for PMS and ACD monitors
Notes:
1. This migration procedure will work only for an MX controller and
not for a CXi controller.
2. An SX-200 LIGHT system must upgrade to an SX-200 EL/ML
(LW, 19.3.2 or later) before migrating to an SX-200 ICP MX.
3. Mitel Express Messenger (MEM) data (programming, greetings
and messages) are not included in the migration. If MEM is
retained, MWI will not be lost. If you continue to use the MEM
card, the database will remain operational provided that you
enable System Option 98 (Support 3DN, 4DN and 400 series Set
Types).
4. Call logs and callback requests are lost in the migration.
5. The IP bay (i.e., the controller) is bay number 1 by default. It
becomes bay number 8 following the migration. All references in
documentation are to the default.
6. The SX-200 ICP supports a maximum of 30 IP trunks. If Option 115
(Maximum IP Trunks) in Form 04 is programmed with more than the
maximum, only the first available 30 IP trunks will function.
7. Migration causes phantom bays on the SX-200 EL/ML to become
peripheral bays on the SX-200 ICP. You must manually re-program
these bays as phantoms in Form 53.
208
Routine Maintenance
Parts Required
•
SX-200 ICP Release 2.0 software or later
•
Peripheral FIM Carrier (PFC) or Peripheral CIM Carrier (PCC) for the
SX-200 cabinets.
•
Fiber Interface Module (FIM) or Cable Interface Module (CIM) with
appropriate connector cables for the SX-200 ICP.
Note: The SX-200 ICP supports 1KM, 5KM, and 14KM FIMs.
Preparations
Before starting the migration,
•
survey the existing EL/ML hardware to determine any potential
configuration issues such as unsupported devices.
•
ensure that there are enough FIMs or CIMs to connect the EL/ML
cabinets.
•
if the SX-200 EL/ML has T1 or PRI trunks, install a Stratum 3 clock in
the SX-200 ICP
•
compare MOSS sheets for both systems to ensure that sufficient bays
have been purchased (System Option 133 - TDM Bays). Option 102
(Feature Level) of the SX-200 ICP MOSS sheet must be set to 6.
Option 98 (Support 3DN, 4DN and 400 series Set Types) must be
enabled if 400 series telephone sets or some 3rd-party DNIC voice
mail systems are being used.
Migration Procedure
A typical migration requires approximately one hour to complete.
To migrate an SX-200 EL/ML to an SX-200 ICP MX:
1. Back up the database on the SX-200 EL/ML using Kermit.
2. Print CDE Forms 1 and 47 from the EL/ML for reference during
programming.
CAUTION: The following step takes the system out of service.
3. Power down the SX-200 EL/ML control cabinet and peripheral
cabinets.
209
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
4. Install the SX-200 ICP MX and optional modules (Stratum 3 clock,
Quad CIM, Dual FIM, Dual T1/E1 Framer, etc.).
5. Power up the SX-200 ICP MX.
6. Restore the SX-200 EL/ML database to the SX-200 ICP using Kermit
over the serial port.
After the database file is restored, the system automatically resets.
7. Phantom bays on the SX-200 EL/ML become peripheral bays on the
SX-200 ICP. Re-program these bays as phantoms in Form 53.
8. SPINE Bays or IP Nodes are no longer supported and will be
converted to phantom bays. In CDE, reprogram any SPINE or IP Node
bays as follows:
-
In Form 53, add new bay numbers for each SPINE or IP Node.
-
In Form 09, move each set on the SPINE bay to a PER Node and
each set on the IP Node to the IP Bay.
-
Delete all SPINE Bay and IP Node device assignments in Form 18,
Miscellaneous System Ports.
-
Delete each trunk on the SPINE Bay and IP Node and reprogram
on the PER Node Bay and IP Bay respectively.
-
Remove ARS programming for IP Nodes in Forms 26 (including
subform), 22, and 23.
-
In Form 48, modify all IP Node programming.
9. In Form 53, assign the PER Bays to CIM or FIM ports.
10. In Form 04, enter the Mitel Options Code (MOC) and Mitel Options
Password (Option 100). Set all other options as required.
11. Reset the system (if prompted).
12. In Form 47, enter the IP networking information recorded in step 2.
Note: Voice Compression in Form 47 for the IP Node is a System
Option in Form 04 (Option 120, Number of Compression Resources)
in the SX-200 ICP.
13. (Optional) Program the embedded voice mail system with Mitel
Express Messenger information (if installed in the EL/ML) or, if the
MEM card is still being used, enable System Option 98 (Support 3DN
and 4DN Set Types).
210
Routine Maintenance
14. Disconnect the fiber cables from the EL/ML control cabinet. Label the
Tx and Rx cables, identify the Bay that the cables connect to, and label
the front of the SX-200 ICP MX controller to ensure that connections
are made to the proper bays.
15. Remove the main control card from the EL/ML control cabinet.
16. Install the required peripheral CIM or FIM cards into the EL/ML
cabinet(s).
17. Remove all CIM and FIM triple modules from the SX-200 EL/ML
control cabinet.
18. Connect all bays to CIMs or FIMs.
19. Power up the EL/ML cabinet(s).
Note: A system with a BCC III may take as long as 20 minutes to
come up following the upgrade. Subsequent reboots will not incur
this delay.
20. Verify that the migration succeeded by placing calls to and from sets
connected to the Peripheral Cabinet(s). Test the voice mail system by
leaving, retrieving, and deleting messages. Verify that features
function properly, especially call forwarding.
21. Back up the SX-200 ICP database using FTP. (See page 199.)
22. To prevent unnecessary alarms:
•
In Maintenance, revise the Alarm Thresholds.
•
In Form 53, check the bay number assignments. If a bay is
assigned a bay number, it must be connected to a physical device;
otherwise, it will generate an alarm. To prevent this problem, move
disconnected bays from physical connections (CIMs and MMCs) to
phantom bays.
211
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Replacing IP Phones
To replace a registered IP phone, you can
•
Replace it and retain all existing programming for that circuit, or
•
Replace it and re-program the circuit.
Note: 5215 and 5010 IP phones will fail to register on a system that
has a Default or Premier database because of the line appearances
programmed on keys 8 and 10—keys that exist on the 5207 but not
on the 5215 or the 5010. To register these phones, first delete the
line appearances in Form 09, or follow the phone replacement
procedure on the next page to delete all key programming.
To replace a registered IP phone and retain all programming
for that circuit:
•
From the phone
-
•
Dial the IP Set Replacement PIN (default ###) followed by the
extension number of the phone.
From the CDE terminal
-
Access Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments.
-
Select the circuit belonging to the IP phone that is to be replaced.
-
Press Show CESID.
-
Press Show MAC.
-
Delete the existing MAC address.
-
Disconnect the phone from the LAN and connect the new phone in
its place.
-
Register the new phone by entering its MAC address in Form 09.
Or
Go to the phone and dial the IP Set Registration PIN (default ***)
followed by the phone’s extension number.
212
Routine Maintenance
To replace a registered IP phone and re-program the circuit:
1. Access Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments.
2. Delete the extension number of the IP phone that you want to replace.
WARNING:IF YOU DELETE THE EXTENSION NUMBER OF A
PHONE, ALL PROGRAMMED DATA FOR THAT CIRCUIT IS
DELETED.
3. Assign a new extension number or reuse the old one.
4. Program the features for the IP phone.
5. Register the new phone by entering its MAC address in Form 09.
Or
Go to the phone and dial the IP Set Registration PIN (default ***)
followed by the phone’s extension number.
Restarting IP Phones
Restarting the IP Phones causes them to renegotiate their DHCP settings.
IMPORTANT: Because it takes two or three minutes for the
phones to return to service, limit restarts to after hours.
To initiate a restart:
1. Log in to the Maintenance Terminal (direct, secure Telnet, or SX-200
ICP Web Interface) and begin a Maintenance session.
2. Press the following softkeys:
RE_START
IP_PHONES
ENTER
Upgrading Set Firmware
Upgrade the firmware for SUPERSET™ 4025, SUPERSET 4090,
SUPERSET 4125, and SUPERSET 4150 telephones, only if the revision
on the system is higher than the set revision. The boot code and the
firmware revision levels must be checked.
213
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Boot Codes
The SUPERSET boot code must be at revision Boot 3.10 or greater or the
SX-200 system cannot successfully upgrade the set’s firmware.
The boot code appears when a set is first plugged in.
If you attempt to upgrade a set with a boot code lower than 3.10, the
system will erase the set’s firmware and you will not be able to download
the new firmware. The set then becomes unusable.
Firmware Revision Levels
The firmware revision level of the set that you are upgrading must meet the
firmware revision level stated in SYSTEM maintenance. Use the
SET_FIRMWARE STATUS maintenance command to identify the revision
level.
Firmware Commands
Access the firmware commands in the SYSTEM maintenance level and
then choose SET_FIRMWARE to obtain the softkeys to qualify your target
set. See the table below.
.
Table 34: Firmware Commands
Set_Firmware Qualifiers
Result
STATUS
Displays the software revision level the set is
running and whether the set is scheduled for a
download.
DOWNLOAD
Erases and updates the firmware on all specified
sets. The set must be idle and the set’s firmware
revision must be older than the firmware to be
downloaded.
ABORT_DOWNLOAD
Removes specified sets from the scheduled
download.
FORCE_DOWNLOAD
Forces the download to occur even if the set
firmware is newer than the firmware being
downloaded. This command allows a set’s firmware
to be returned to a previous firmware version when
required.
214
Routine Maintenance
Measuring LS Trunks
The LS Measurement tool in Maintenance is used to test LS trunks before
putting them into service. The test results determine the settings to
program for optimum audio quality.
Table 35: LS Measurement Tool Tests
Test
Line Quality
Purpose
Measures the loss level and impulse response of the
trunk and recommends Length and Impedance
settings to program in Form 13 (Audio Configuration
Table subform). If Length and Impedance are set to
AUTO in Form 13, the recommended settings are
programmed automatically when the test is run.
The test results are posted to the maintenance logs,
and e-mailed to the address specified in Form 52
(Email).
Line Length Settings: Short, Long, and Extra Long.
The Extra Long setting is only valid with AMB/AOB
LS trunks. It provides additional gain for signals
transmitted from the CO to the ICP but not for signals
transmitted from the ICP to the CO.
Impedance Settings: 600 Ohm, Complex, DSL, and
Impedance A, B, C, and D.
Impedance A can be used to match the controller to
LS lines that have loading coils. Impedance B, C, and
D are the same as 600 Ohm.
Distortion
Measures distortion on the line using an external silence
(balance) termination number. Run this test only when
instructed to do so by Mitel Product Support.
Echo
Measures the echo characteristics of the line using an
external silence (balance) termination number. Run this test
only when instructed to do so by Mitel Product Support.
215
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Notes:
1. Run the test in VT100 mode, not TTY (line interface) mode.
2. The test can be run for a single trunk, or for all trunks (three
minimum).
3. The test can be immediately, or scheduled for a later time.
4. Approximate test times:
- Line Quality: 2 min / trunk
- Distortion: 40 min / trunk
- Echo: 5 min / trunk
Running the Line Quality Test
To run the Line Quality test:
1. Form 13 (Trunk Circuit Descriptors)
-
Enter the milliwatt tone and silence (balance) termination numbers
provided by the CO.
Note: If the milliwatt tone number is unknown, program a second trunk
to provide milliwatt tone in Form 13 (Audio Configuration Table
subform). If the silence termination number is unknown, take no
action; the termination will be generated automatically.
2. Switch to Maintenance mode.
3. Press
DIAGNOSTICS
LS_MEASURE
select LINE_QUALITY (for one trunk) or BATCH_QUAL (for all trunks)
Respond to the prompts to run the test.
If the test is successful, the results are sent to the logs and emailed to
the address specified in Form 52 (Email).
4. Switch to CDE mode.
5. Form 13 (Audio Configuration Table subform)
-
Use the recommended settings from the logs to program Length
and Impedance for the trunk(s).
Note: If Length and Impedance are set to AUTO, the settings will be
programmed automatically when the test is run. Refer to the logs to
determine the actual settings for AUTO.
216
Routine Maintenance
Running the Distortion Test
Note: This test requires an external silence (balance) termination
number programmed in Subform 13, Circuit Descriptor Options.
To run the Distortion test:
1. Run the Line Quality test and program Length and Impedance for the
trunk in Form 13 (Audio Configuration Table subform)
2. Log into the Maintenance Terminal and begin a Maintenance session.
3. Press
DIAGNOSTICS
LS_MEASURE
select DISTORTION (for one trunk) or BATCH_DIST (for all trunks)
Respond to the prompts to run the test.
The results are sent to the logs and emailed to the address specified
in Form 52 (Email).
4. Forward the test results to Mitel Product Support.
Running the Echo Test
Note: This test requires an external silence (balance) termination
number programmed in Subform 13, Circuit Descriptor Options.
To run the Echo test:
1. Run the Line Quality test and program Length and Impedance for the
trunk in Form 13 (Audio Configuration Table subform)
2. Log into the Maintenance Terminal and begin a Maintenance session.
3. Press
DIAGNOSTICS
LS_MEASURE
select ECHO_TEST (for one trunk) or BATCH_ECHO (for all trunks)
Respond to the prompts to run the test.
The results are sent to the logs and emailed to the address specified
in Form 52 (Email).
4. Forward the test results to Mitel Product Support.
217
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Maintenance Commands
Maintenance Port Characteristics
8 bits/1 start/1 stop/no parity.
Baud rates: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, or 9600 (default).
Maintenance commands do not require the ESC sequence used with CDE
commands.
Telnet Requirements
•
For remote access over a TCP/IP network such as the Internet or the
LAN, both the SX-200 ICP controller and the PC must be connected
to the network. Remote connections require a secure Telnet client that
supports SSL/TLS (Mitel Telnet client version 1.0.0.1 or later
recommended), or a web browser (Internet Explorer 6 or Mozilla
Firefox) to access the SX-200 ICP Web Interface.
•
Host name or IP address of SX-200 ICP controller.
Connect to the controller through TCP port number 2000.
Entering Command Sequences
Maintenance commands are entered by selecting a softkey from a menu,
and then selecting another softkey from the subsequent menu.
Start all maintenance sequences from the Maintenance screen.
Press the DELETE key to delete the most recently entered softkey or
device number.
At the end of a command sequence, press ENTER.
Press the CANCEL softkey at any time to exit the current operation without
committing (saving) any changes, or press the ENTER softkey, when it is
available, to commit changes or initiate an activity.
For example, to show time:
1. Select SYSTEM from the Maintenance screen.
2. Select SHOW from the System screen.
3. Select TIME from the Show screen.
4. Select ENTER from the Show screen or Press ENTER at the keyboard.
218
Routine Maintenance
Logging In
Serial Connection:
1. Launch the terminal or terminal emulator.
2. Press RETURN four times within 1 second, and then follow the prompts.
3. Select a Terminal Type.
4. Select 1 - MAINTENANCE.
5. Enter your username and password.
Secure Telnet Connection:
1. Launch the secure Telnet client.
2. Enter the hostname or IP address of the controller, and port 2000—for
example, to open a connection from a Mitel Telnet client, enter: op
192.168.2.25 2000
3. Log in to SSL/TLS with login name ‘installer’ and default password
‘1000.’
4. Select a Terminal Type.
5. Select 1 - MAINTENANCE.
6. Log in to the application with your username and password.
SX-200 ICP Web Interface Connection:
1. Launch the web browser.
2. Enter https://<controller IP or hostname>:443
For example, https://10.33.63.118:443
3. Log in to the SX-200 ICP Web Interface with login name ‘installer’ and
default password ‘1000.’
4. Select a Terminal Type.
5. Select 1 - MAINTENANCE.
6. Log in to the application with your username and password.
Logging Out
1. Press QUIT (softkey 6).
2. Press key 6 (or wait for logout timer to time out).
219
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Switching between Maintenance and CDE
You can switch between the Maintenance and CDE applications without
having to exit and log in again.
From the top level CDE Form, press TO MTCE (requires correct access
level)
From the top level Maintenance screen, press TO CDE.
Displaying the Card Configuration
From CDE mode:
-
View Form 01, System Configuration
From Maintenance mode:
-
Press:
REPORTS
SHOW
CONFIG
ALL
Showing the System Identity
From Maintenance mode:
-
Press:
SYSTEM
SHOW
IDENTITY
ENTER
System Commands
Table 36: System Level Functions
COMMAND
1-SET
PARAMETER
QUALIFIER
QUALIFIER
QUALIFIER
1-DATE [dd/mm/yy]
2-TIME [hh:mm]
3-PASSWORD
1-ATTENDANT
2-SUPERVISOR
(Page 1 of 4)
220
Routine Maintenance
Table 36: System Level Functions (continued)
COMMAND
PARAMETER
QUALIFIER
QUALIFIER
QUALIFIER
3-MAINT2
4-MAINT1
7-INSTALLER
4-SPEED
1-MAINT-PORT [speed]
8-RESET_TIME
1-AFTER_N_FLTS
8-PRINTER_PORT [speed]
2-DAY/TIME
1-MONDAY
1-TIME [hh:mm]
2-TUESDAY
1-TIME [hh:mm]
3-WEDNESDAY
1-TIME [hh:mm]
4-THURSDAY
1-TIME [hh:mm]
6-FRIDAY
1-TIME [hh:mm]
7-SATURDAY
1-TIME [hh:mm]
8-SUNDAY
1-TIME [hh:mm]
9-DAILY
1-TIME [hh:mm]
1-SYSTEM
8-CONFIRM
3-IMMEDIATELY
9-ALARM_THRESH
1-LINES
2-TRUNKS
3-RECEIVERS
2-SHOW
2-BAY (enter Bay #)
8-CONFIRM
1-SYSTEM
8-CONFIRM
2-BAY (enter Bay #)
8-CONFIRM
1-SYSTEM
8-CONFIRM
2-BAY (enter Bay #)
8-CONFIRM
1-DATE
2-TIME
4-DEVICE
1-MAINT-PORT
4-DATASTN_PLID
1-BAY/SLOT/CCT
3-EXT-NUM
8-PRINTER_PORT
7-LN_APP_COUNT
8-RESET-TIME
9-IDENTITY
3-DATABASE
1-BACKUP
1-KERMIT
(Page 2 of 4)
221
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 36: System Level Functions (continued)
COMMAND
PARAMETER
QUALIFIER
QUALIFIER
QUALIFIER
3-FTP_SERVER
2-RESTORE
1-KERMIT
3-FTP_SERVER
4-SHOW_PARAM
6-TRAP_BACKUP*
7-UPGRADE_SW
8-LOGS_BACKUP
9-SET_PARAM
1-DEFAULT
2-RETRIES
3-BLOCK_CHECK
4-RECEIVE
1-EOL_CHAR
2-8_BIT_CHAR
3-CTRL_CHAR
4-REPEAT_CHAR
6-PAD_CHAR
7-PACKET_SIZE
8-RX_TIMEOUT
9-NUM_PAD_CHAR
6-START CHAR
7-SEND DELAY
4-MONITOR
1-SMDR
2-DATA_SMDR
7-LOGS
1-MAINT_PORT
2-SYS_PRINTERS
5-SUSPEND_PRTR 7-PRINTER_PLID
1-BAY/SLOT/CCT/SCT
3-EXT-NUM
8-PRINTER_PORT
6-QUIT
7-RESUME_PRTR
7-PRINTER_PLID
1-BAY/SLOT/CCT/SCT
3-EXT-NUM
8-PRINTER_PORT
(Page 3 of 4)
222
Routine Maintenance
Table 36: System Level Functions (continued)
COMMAND
8-RE-START
PARAMETER
QUALIFIER
QUALIFIER
QUALIFIER
2-RESET_SYSTEM
3-IP_PHONES
9-STOP
7-LOGS
0 MORE_ KEYS
1-SET_FIRMWARE
1-STATUS
1-BAY/SLOT/CCT
2-SET_TYPE
1-SS4150
2-SS4025
3-EXT_NUM
4-ALL
2-DOWNLOAD
1-BAY/SLOT/CCT
2-SET_TYPE
1-SS4150
2-SS4025
3-SS4090
3-EXT_NUM
4-ALL
3 ABORT_DOWNLOAD
1-BAY/SLOT/CCT
2-SET_TYPE
1-SS4150
2-SS4025
3-SS4090
3-EXT_NUM
4-ALL
4-FORCE_DOWNLOAD
1-BAY/SLOT/CCT
2-SET_TYPE
1-SS4150
2-SS4025
3-SS4090
3-EXT_NUM
4-ALL
2-UPGRADE_BOOT
3-PING
(Page 4 of 4)
223
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Report Commands
Table 37: Report Level Functions
COMMAND
2-SHOW
PARAMETER
1-CONFIG
QUALIFIER
QUALIFIER
QUALIFIER
1-BAY/SLOT/CCT
3-EXT-NUM [number]
4-ALL
2-ALARMS
2-DEVICE TYPE
1-LINES
2-TRUNKS
3-RECEIVERS
4-BAY
3-STATUS
4-ALL
0-MORE
1-BAY/SLOT/CCT
DEVICE STATUS
2-SWID
1-SW_STATION
See Note
2-SW_RECEIVER
See Note
3-SW_CONSOLE
See Note
4-SW_LINE
See Note
See Note
6-SW_DTMF_GEN
See Note
7-SW_SET
See Note
9-SW_DATA_STN
See Note
0-MORE_KEYS
1-SW_CO_TRUNK
2-SW_DID_TRUNK
3-SW_TIE_TRUNK
4-SW_DISA_TRUNK
6-SW_CAP
7-SW_TRUNK_GRP
8-SW_HUNT_GRP
0-MORE_KEYS
3-EXT-NUM [number]
4-ALL
1-CP_DWA
2-CP_DWA_MEM
3-LINK STATUS
6-MT_DWA
(Page 1 of 2)
224
Routine Maintenance
Table 37: Report Level Functions (continued)
COMMAND
PARAMETER
QUALIFIER
QUALIFIER
QUALIFIER
7-MT_DWA_MEM
8-UP_1_PAGE
9-DOWN_1_PAGE
8-VOICEMAIL
9-IP_TRUNKS
6-CHANNEL-MAP
1-LOGICAL
1-CHANNEL NUM
2-PHYSICAL
1-BAY_NUM
2-LINK_NUMBER
7-ERRORS
2-DEVICE_TYPE
3-DIGITAL_SETS
4-HDLC
6-DATASETS
7-CONSOLE
9-T1_TRUNK
3-CLEAR
7-ERRORS
1-BAY/SLOT/CCT
2-DEVICE_TYPE
3-DIGITAL_SETS
4-HDLC
6-DATASETS
7-CONSOLE
9-T1_TRUNK
3-EXT-NUM
4-ALL
8-CONFIRM
6-QUIT
(Page 2 of 2)
Note: The following softkeys are presented when a SWID selection is
made: 1-CP_DWA, 2-CP_DWA_MEM, 3-LINK_STATUS, 6-MT_DWA,
7-MT_DWA_MEM, 8-UP_1_PAGE, 9-DOWN_1_PAGE. Press CP_DWA
to view the device work area for the selected device.
225
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Traffic Measurement Commands
Table 38: Traffic Measurement Level Functions
COMMAND
1-SET
PARAMETER
1-UNITS
QUALIFIER
1-CSS
2-ERLANGS
2- PERIOD
2-OFF
3-DURATION
4-AUTOPRINT
1-ON
2-OFF
7-START_TIME
8-CONDENSED
1-ON
2-OFF
2-SHOW
3-STATUS
3-PRINT
4-READ
5-IP_MEAS
1-SET
1-SAMPLE
2-PERIOD
3-DURATION
4-MAX_DELAY
2-SHOW
3-PRINT
4-READ
5-TRAFFIC_MEA
7-START
8-TO_SERVER
9-STOP
9-STOP
1-TRAFFIC_RPT
3-PRINT
226
3-STATUS
Routine Maintenance
Log Commands
Table 39: Log Level Functions
COMMAND
1-SET
PARAMETER
4-AUTOPRINT
QUALIFIER
1-ON
2-OFF
2-READ
1-NEWEST [number]
2-OLDEST [number]
4-ALL
8-LOGS_TEXT*
9-TRACE_INFO*
3-PRINT
1-NEWEST [number]
2-OLDEST [number]
4-ALL
8-LOGS_TEXT*
4-DELETE
1-NEWEST [number]
2-OLDEST [number]
4-ALL
9-TRACE_INFO*
6-GET_SYS_LOGS
7-TO_EMAIL
8-STOP
9-TO SERVER
* LOGS_TEXT and TRACE_INFO are diagnostic tools that only MITEL
personnel should use.
227
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Diagnostic Function Commands
Table 40: Diagnostic Function Commands
COMMAND
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
1-RANGE_B_OUT
2-CLR_FEATURE
QUALIFIER
BAY/SLOT/CCT/SUBCCT
1-FORWARD
1-BAY/SLOT/CCT
3-EXT_NUM
2-DO_N_DISTURB
1-BAY/SLOT/CCT
3-EXT_NUM
3-CALL_BACK
1-BAY/SLOT/CCT
3-EXT_NUM
4-ALL
1-BAY/SLOT/CCT
3-EXT_NUM
3-BUSY_OUT
1-BAY/SLOT/CCT
3-EXT-NUM
4-LS_MEASURE
1-LOSS_LEVEL
BAY/SLOT/CCT
mW tone number
2-IMPULSE_RESP
BAY/SLOT/CCT
Silence test number
3-DISTORTION
BAY/SLOT/CCT
4-ECHO_TEST
BAY/SLOT/CCT
5-RANGE_RTS
8-RET-TO-SVC
BAY/SLOT/CCT/SUBCCT
1-BAY/SLOT/CCT
3-EXT-NUM
DISC_TRUNK
228
1-BAY/SLOT/CCT
Routine Maintenance
Backing up Log and Trap Files using Kermit
The Log file and Trap file are used for troubleshooting. Mitel Technical
Support may request backups of these files should you call for assistance.
You can use Kermit to back up the files one at a time. Or, you can
download them along with other system files using Kermit (see page
page 231). You can also send them to an FTP server or e-mail address
(see page 230).
Your communication package must support the Kermit protocol to perform
a backup. HyperTerminal can be used for serial connections; a secure
Telnet client that supports SSL/TLS and Kermit can be used for remote
connections.
To back up log and trap files separately using Kermit:
1. Establish a serial connection to the Maintenance Terminal and begin
a Maintenance session.
2. Press,
SYSTEM
DATABASE
TRAP_BACKUP or LOGS_BACKUP
ENTER
(Enter a file name — e.g., C:\Trap_Oct08.txt)
CONFIRM
ENTER
The system then prompts you to exit to a local Kermit session. Ensure
that the Kermit session is set to text mode, because the maintenance
log entries must be copied into a text file.
229
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Sending Logs and other System Files to an
E-mail Address or FTP Server
To send logs and other system files to an e-mail address, program the
SMTP server IP address in Form 49, the recipient’s e-mail address in Form
52, and the system hostname in Form 47, Subform 01. (The system
hostname must be a valid domain host name registered in your DNS, or
listed in your SMTP e-mail server's Hosts file.)
To send logs to an FTP server, program the FTP server IP Address,
Username, and Password in Form 47, Subform 01.
Also, System Option 126, Email Messaging must be enabled in Form 04,
and System Option 81 should be set to the time zone that the SX-200 ICP
is in.
Logs e-mailed or uploaded an to an FTP server are compressed in a .tar
file. The estimated size of compressed file is no more than 1MB. Use
WinZip® or other compression utility to open the file.
To e-mail logs:
-
Press:
LOGS
TO_EMAIL
ENTER
CONFIRM
To send logs to an FTP server:
-
230
LOGS
TO_SERVER
ENTER
CONFIRM
Routine Maintenance
Retrieving Logs and other System Files
using Kermit
Use this procedure to retrieve the logs and system files via a direct or
modem connection to the Maintenance port.
The files are compressed in a .tar.gz file. Use WinZip® or other
compression utility to open the file.
Your communication package must support the Kermit protocol to retrieve
logs and system files. HyperTerminal can be used for serial connections;
a secure Telnet client that supports SSL/TLS and Kermit can be used for
remote connections.
To download logs and other system files using Kermit:
1. Establish a connection (serial or secure Telnet) to the Maintenance
Terminal and begin a Maintenance session.
2. Press,
LOGS
GET_SYS_LOGS
ENTER
(Enter a file name—e.g., C:\Sys_Logs_Oct08.tar.gz)
CONFIRM
ENTER
The .tar.gz extension is mandatory.
The system then prompts you to exit to a local Kermit session.
Maintenance Tips
•
Keep regular backups.
•
Ensure that you record your SysID module number and your MOSS
number.
•
Record all passwords.
231
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
232
Chapter 6
Basic Troubleshooting
and Repair
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
234
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
About this Chapter
This chapter provides standard procedures for troubleshooting the most
common problems in a voice-only SX-200 ICP.
More advanced procedures, including ones for troubleshooting
SX-200 ICP systems installed in a converged voice and data network, are
provided in the next chapter.
Go through this chapter before calling Mitel Technical Support.
Note: The maintenance and troubleshooting of your LAN/WAN network
maintenance is the responsibility of your network provider. Mitel Product
Support can help you isolate minor network problems; for more complex
network problems, Mitel Product Support will escalate to Professional
Services to assist you (this is a billable service).
IMPORTANT: Please see “Contacting Mitel” on page 6 before
contacting Mitel Technical Support.
235
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Troubleshooting Tools
The table below lists the tools available to help you troubleshoot a SX-200
ICP system.
Table 41: Troubleshooting Tools
Level
Tool Name
Location
Function
Applies to
Basic
Logs
SX-200 ICP
Maintenance
Provides a history of
the software logs.
SX-200 ICP
software.
Basic
IMAT
Maintenance or
IMAT PC.
Allows you to load a
databases on the NSU
PRI.
PRI/QSIG
NSUs.
Basic
LEDs
Front of each
unit.
To provide overall
status of unit.
SX-200 ICP
hardware.
Basic
NSU Shell
NSU
Maintenance
Port.
Lists NSU error
messages.
All NSUs.
Basic
FTP server
Mitel On Line
Database Backups
SX-200 ICP
database
Basic and
Advanced
Phone
Debug
Option
IP Phones with
display.
Allows you to:
IP Phone with
display.
Advanced
236
Network
Analyser
3rd Party
•
Monitor the phone
settings
•
Program a static IP
address (see page
285).
•
Hard code
connection speed
and duplex mode
(reboot while
pressing 9). Autonegotiation is
preferred.
Monitor, Characterize,
Debug, and analyze
the network for:
•
lost packets
•
runts
IP Phones, IP
Trunking, Data
on Customer
Network.
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
Before you Contact Technical Support
If you cannot find the source of the problem in this chapter, please collect
the required information listed in the applicable section(s) before calling
Mitel Technical Support (see “Technical Support - Mitel Dealers” on
page 7 for the number to call).
You will also need the additional information below before calling
Technical Support:
ˆ Serial number(s) of your equipment and software.
ˆ Nature of the problem.
ˆ What you were doing when the problem occurred.
ˆ Troubleshooting steps taken.
ˆ Troubleshooting results.
ˆ Your network diagram.
ˆ DHCP server configuration and settings.
ˆ Layer 2 switch configuration and settings.
ˆ Whether the problem is between IP and IP, IP and remote IP, remote
IP and TDM, etc.
ˆ SX-200 ICP log and trap files
ˆ Alarm log details.
ˆ NSU Maintenance log details (if applicable).
IMPORTANT: For voice-only SX-200 ICP systems supported
by technicians with Basic certification, Mitel Technical
Support is entitled to ask that devices other than Mitel
telephones be disconnected from the Layer 2 switch to allow
network characterization.
237
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
General Troubleshooting Steps
1. Verify the status of the LEDs (Power, 10/100 Base TX Auto-MDIX,
CIM Expansion Ports, etc.) See “Checking the System LEDs” on
page 239.
2. From the Maintenance Terminal, review the Alarm details. Identify and
fix each alarm.
3. For IP Phone and physical network connectivity problems:
-
Verify that the device has power.
-
Verify the status of the port link integrity LEDs at each end of the cable.
-
Verify that each device transmits a link integrity pulse (LINK LED on).
-
Verify that proper cabling is installed between the end devices.
-
Verify that a crossover cable was not used to connect the IP Phone
to the Layer 2 Switch instead of a straight-though cable.
If the IP phone still fails, try plugging it into the port of a working IP
Phone (isolates problem directly to phone or programming if phone
fails to boot) or directly into the SX-200 ICP (do this after hours since
all other phones will be out of service.)
Using the Phone Debug Option
To use the debug function on IP Phones that have displays:
1. Press both volume keys, and then release the Volume Down key.
2. While still pressing the Volume Up key, enter cfg (234) on the
telephone key pad.
3. View detail for the following categories:
-
Network Parameters (View Current Values, View DHCP Values,
View Static Values, Modify Static Values)
-
Hardware Configuration (View Current Port Setting, Modify Port
Setting, Analog Line Config)
-
Phone Mode (Protocol, Config Teleworker)
-
Tools and Features (Erase PIN, Edit 802.1x Settings, Edit LLDP
Settings, PING Test, DHCP Trace, Video Configuration, Port
Options, Diagnostics, Restore Defaults)
-
Version info (Main Load, Boot Load, L2Boot Load)
4. Press Superkey to exit the debug menu.
238
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
Checking the System LEDs
Controller LEDs
Figure 23: SX-200 ICP LEDs
Table 42: Controller Status LEDs
LED
Power
Hard Drive
LED
Status
Meaning (All LEDs)
ON
Unit plugged in and operating normally.
OFF
Unit not plugged in OR unit is faulty.
ON or
Flashing
Reading/writing data to/from the flash card (internal
or external) or to hard disk.
OFF
No power OR no flash card or hard disk activity.
FIM
Top LED indicates the status of local FIM.
Bottom LED indicates the status of remote FIM.
ON
In frame synchronization
Flashing
Out of synchronization OR
Tx and Rx cables reversed.
OFF
Power off OR held in reset.
(Page 1 of 2)
239
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 42: Controller Status LEDs (continued)
LED
Status
LED
CIM
Flash Card
Alarm LED Minor
Alarm LED Major
Alarm LED Critical
Meaning (All LEDs)
ON
Communication link established and configured.
Flashing
Link established but not configured.
OFF
No power.
Orange
Flash card in use, do not remove.
Orange
(blinking)
Flash card has not been properly formatted and the
platform is having difficulty accessing it.
Green
Safe to remove Flash card.
OFF
No Flash card detected.
ON
There are problems affecting the system in a small
proportion.
OFF
No problem; system is functioning properly.
ON
There are problems causing a serious degradation
of service.
OFF
No problem; system is functioning properly.
ON
There has been a very serious loss of call
processing capability; an automatic system fail
transfer (SFT) is invoked and the system is reset.
OFF
No problem; system is functioning properly.
(Page 2 of 2)
Table 43: Ethernet Port (LAN/WAN) Status LEDs
LED
Normal
On Reset
ACT/COL
GREEN: Activity
RED: Collision
RED
LINK
GREEN: Link
GREEN
FDX
GREEN: Full Duplex
GREEN
100M
GREEN: 100Mbs
GREEN
240
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
NSU LEDs
Figure 24: NSU LEDs
Table 44: NSU Ethernet Port (LAN) Status LEDs
LED
Status
Color
Meaning
LAN
Flashing
—
LAN activity.
MS
(Message
Status)
ON
Green
Message link open to the system.
OFF
—
Message link not open to the system.
OR
With L0/L1 LEDs marching:
downloading.
ST (Status)
ON
—
Card is booting. OR
Card is not operating.
Flashing
—
Operational (flashes in 0.5 seconds
intervals).
OFF
—
Not operational.
241
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 45: NSU L0/L1 Status LEDs
LEDs
Meaning
Left
Right
—
ON (Red)
No Layer 1.
ON (Green)
—
D-channel established (PRI). OR
Layer 1 established (T1).
Flashing
(Green)
ON
(Yellow)
Alarm indication from far end.
OFF
ON
(Yellow)
Blue alarm from card (this is normal during link
startup; PRI NA or response to yellow).
Flashing
(Green)
—
Layer 1 established (PRI).
Flashing
(Green)
ON
(Yellow)
Alarm indication from far end.
Flashing (alternating
yellow and green)
Downloading (15-20 minutes).
Flashing (alternating
yellow)
Decompressing and copying files (2-4 minutes).
—
OFF
No error.
OFF
—
No Link.
Table 46: NSU FIM Status LEDs
Meaning for Local, Upper
and Remote, Lower FIM
Top LED Status
ON
In frame synchronization.
Flashing
Out of synchronization. OR
Tx and Rx cables reversed.
OFF
Power off. OR
Held in reset.
242
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
Table 47: NSU CIM Status LEDs
Top LED Status
Meaning (All LEDs)
ON
Communication link synchronized with controller.
Flashing
BSP running.
When top and bottom LEDs are alternating, NSU is
powering up. Do NOT interrupt.
OFF
No power.
ASU LEDs
LED
CIM
LED
Status
Meaning (All LEDs)
ON
Communication link established and configured.
Flashing
Link established but not configured.
OFF
No power.
ONS Circuits ON
Circuit is in use.
Flashing
(slow)
Circuit is not available (undergoing maintenance).
Flashing
(fast)
A fault has occurred with the circuit.
OFF
Circuit is idle.
243
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Troubleshooting Phones and Peripherals
Problems
If you cannot solve the problem using the following table, go through the
steps on page 238. If you still can’t find the problem, call Mitel Technical
Support.
Table 48: Phone Connection Problems Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Probable Causes
Corrective Action
All IP PHones are not
receiving power
Controller not fully
initialized
Wait for the controller to fully
initialize. The Power LED should
be solid green.
IP Phone won’t boot.
Display stuck at DHCP
Discovery or IP address (i.e.,
fails to advance to "Enter
PIN")
Phone cannot
connect with the
DHCP server
Check for the following:
• Recycle the power to reboot the
phone.
• Verify that a crossover cable
was not used to connect the IP
Phone to the controller instead
of a straight-though cable.
• Try another phone.
• If it still fails, plug the phone
directly into the Ethernet port on
the SX-200 ICP.
• If it still fails call Mitel Technical
Support.
IP Phone Licences
exceeded
Purchase more licences
Failed to reset
controller following
installation of new
system software.
Reset the controller
COR restricted or
ARS incorrectly
programmed.
Identify the numbers dialed by the
user, then check the route used in
ARS.
Remove the COR number from
COR group table in COR
assignment used in the route. OR
Change the COR group number in
the route assignment form. OR
Modify ARS programming to allow
call.
Can’t make calls externally
(display phone may show call
barred).
(Page 1 of 3)
244
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
Table 48: Phone Connection Problems Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms
Probable Causes
Corrective Action
Cannot make call over
analog loop trunk
(intermittent problem).
System is sending
the dialing digits too
fast for Telco’s
receiver on the
LOOP trunk.
Insert a one or two second delay in
ARS: Modified Digit Table (Form
22) for the route used by analog
loop trunk.
No dial tone on set.
Set is not
programmed.
In CDE, program the extension
accordingly.
Wrong wiring.
Check the wiring between the
phone jack and the Peripheral
Cabinet, MDF, etc.
Faulty handset wire.
Replace the handset cord.
Replace the handset.
Replace the set.
Circuit is manbusy.
Use the Maintenance
DIAGNOSTICS > RET-TO-SVC
command
Circuit is locked out.
Verify the wiring between the
phone and the patch panel.
If NONE of the sets are
responding.
Problem with
controller.
Check for the following:
- No alarms
- The program reboot is scheduled
- There are no error logs
- The database is backed up
Sets cannot receive DID
calls.
Non-DID is enabled
in Station Service
Assignment form.
Disable non-DID in the set’s COS.
Check for NMX fields in Form 15
for Valid entries.
Sets take 10-12 seconds to
receive incoming calls.
ANI/DNIS number
delivery trunk option
is enabled in T1
trunk’s COS.
Disable the ANI/DNIS number
delivery in the trunk’s COS.
Tip: You can assigned an unused
COS to verify if this is the problem.
Dialing digit conflict.
Check the following forms for any
potential dialing conflict:
- Desktop Device Assignments
- Miscellaneous System Portst
- Feature Access Code
- ACD Agent Groups
Problem with
controller.
Call Mitel Technical Support
IP to IP calls OK, but not IP to
TDM calls (rings once, then
call drops).
(Page 2 of 3)
245
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 48: Phone Connection Problems Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms
Probable Causes
Phone service is lost (IP
Phones display SYSTEM
BUSY when they go offhook),
and a MOSS alarm appears
in the CDE forms header.
A database from
another system with
different MOSS
options has been
installed in the
controller.
Enable the correct options to
restore phone service and clear
the MOSS alarm. See “Enabling
MOSS Options” on page 88..
DNIC set displays WAITING
FOR SYNC or WAITING
FOR COMM at 20 second
intervals.
The set is having
trouble communicating with the Peripheral Bay MCC.
Check the wiring. If the problem
persists, replace the set. If the
problem affects multiple sets on
the same card, replace the card. If
the problem affects sets on
different cards, and other causes
can be ruled out, then replace the
bay control card.
The likely cause is
one of the following:
• Defective Digital
Line Card.
• Defective bay
controller card.
• Defective set.
• Loose or
improperly
installed wiring.
Corrective Action
(Page 3 of 3)
246
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
NSU/PRI Troubleshooting
If you cannot solve the problem using the following table, go through the
steps on page 238. If you still can’t find the problem, call Mitel Technical
Support.
Table 49: NSU Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Can’t make calls over NSU
trunks.
Probable Causes
Corrective Action
CIM Cabling
CIM connection requires a CAT 5
crossover cable. Connect the
cable to the left CIM port on the
NSU only.
FIM Module
incompatible
FIM module in controller must be
the 1K version.
Incorrect switch
settings on back of
NSU
Single switch on left side should be
in the down position.
L0/L1 switches should have switch
#4 down
Switch #6 is typically in the up
position if connected to the CO.
If right L0/L1 LED is red (indicating
No sync) try changing Switch 6.
If left L0/L1 LED flashing green
(indicating Sync but D-channel is
not synchronized) ensure the
correct protocol is programmed via
IMAT.
Incorrect CDE or
IMAT programming
See “Programming an NSU or a
PRI Card in a Peripheral Cabinet”
on page 116“ for required
programming.
NOTE: Be sure to check
programming for all links.
Wrong NSU
software load
Check FCI for load requirements.
Wrong IMAT version
Must be Release 7.3 or greater
247
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
PRI Debug Commands
Use the following commands to view logging and debugging information
for PRI cards or NSUs connected to PRI trunks.
To run the PRI debug commands
1. Using a serial cable, connect a PC to the maintenance port of the PRI
card or NSU.
2. Run a VT100 terminal emulator such as HyperTerminal. Settings: 8
bits, no parity, no flow control, 1 stop bit, 38400 baud rate.
3. PRI debug commands:
Option +/- cause: Turns on/off output of cause codes
Option +/- dispcall: Turns on/off calling/called party number display
Option state: Shows the states of the links from the PRI card perspective
Option state_help: Displays the state leter commands
248
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
Troubleshooting Analog Trunks
If you cannot solve the problem using the following table, go through the
steps on page 238. If you still can’t find the problem, call Mitel Technical
Support.
Basic Troubleshooting
Table 50: Basic Analog Trunk Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Probable Causes
Corrective Action
Unable to make any external
calls or frequently unable to
access an external line
Service provider has
not connected line
Try the following:
• Unplug the cable that connects
the trunk to the LS trunk port on
the controller.
• Plug a standard analog phone
or test phone directly into the
service provider’s line jack.
• Listen for dial tone, Check each
line. If dial tone isn’t present on
all lines contact your service
provider.
Faulty wiring
between MDF and
controller
See Appendix D “System Cabling”
on page 369 for tip & ring
assignments.
Faulty programming
Verify that the trunks are
programmed correctly. See
“Programming Analog Trunks” on
page 135.
Faulty Analog Main
Board or Analog
Option Board
Power down the controller.
Remove and replace the suspect
board. See
249
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Troubleshooting Signaling Problems
The following section covers problems caused by faulty trunk signaling.
General Signaling & Supervision Concepts
All trunks share similar basic handshaking functions. The actual signaling
mechanism will vary with the trunk type.
Seize: (request to make a call) The calling party initiates the call by
requesting service from the called party.
Seize Acknowledgment: (ready to receive) The called party indicates
that the call can commence.
This acknowledgment occurs when the calling party expects a response
(Dial Tone) or when the called party needs time to establish appropriate
resources (DTMF receivers).
Digits: (who to talk with) The calling party generates the rotary pulse or
DTMF.
Stop Dial: (slow down, can’t handle the pace) The called party generates
a signal to indicate that digits are in risk of being lost.
Receipt of Digits: (status of call) The called party generates audible tones
to indicate the status of the call (for example, Ringback, Busy, and
Reorder).
Answer Supervision: (called party has answered) The called party
indicates that the call has been answered. This signal is for billing
purposes (Hotel/Motel), generation of SMDR reports, etc.
Disconnect Supervision: (release and go back to idle) Either party
generates this signal to indicate the termination of a call and to return the
trunk to the idle condition.
Loop Start Trunk
The Loop Start Line/Trunk serves the standard domestic applications and
small businesses that have key systems and PBX applications.
250
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
Figure 25: Loop Start Line/Trunk
251
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 51: Loop Start Line/Trunk Summary
Loop Start Line PBX
Outgoing
Loop Start Line PBX
Incoming
Seize
Tip-Ring leads activated
(shorted); Loop Current flows
in line
90Vac is applied to Ring
lead in 2 sec on, 4 sec
off cadence
Seize
Acknowledgment
Loop Current and/or dial tone
generated
—
Digits
Loop Current toggled (Rotary)
or DTMF
—
—
—
Audible Tones - Busy,
Reorder, Ringback dependent
upon digits dialed and called
party condition
—
Signal
Stop Dial
Receipt of Digits
Answer Supervision Some COs can reverse
current flow
Tip-Ring leads activated
(shorted); Loop Current
flows in line
Disconnect
Supervision
Near- end termination:
PBX/Telephone can
break Loop Current
Near- end termination: PBX/
Telephone can break Loop
Current
Test/Verify (Loop Start)
•
Verify far-end (CO) circuits by using a standard telephone set in place
of the Loop Start trunk circuit.
•
Verify near-end (PBX Loop Start) circuits by connecting to a local PBX
ONS circuit.
•
Check for appropriate voltages on Tip-Ring in each call state.
•
During off-hook condition, 18 mA DC minimum should be drawn from
the CO (typical 25-40 mA).
•
Some Key/PBX systems may be polarity sensitive; reverse Tip-Ring to
verify.
252
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
Ground Start Trunk
The Ground Start Trunk serves most PBX-CO connections in an analog
environment.
Figure 26: Ground Start Trunk
253
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 52: Ground Start Trunk Summary
Signal
Ground Start Trunk PBX
Outgoing
Ground Start Trunk
PBX Incoming
Seize
Ring lead goes active. PBX
grounds the ring lead
Tip lead goes active; 90
Vac is applied to Ring
lead in 2 sec on, 4 sec off
cadence
Seize
Acknowledgment
Tip lead goes active; Audible
Dial Tone generated; ground
returned on tip
Tip-Ring leads activated
(shorted); Loop Current
flows in line
Digits
Loop Current toggled (Rotary)
or DTMF
—
—
—
Receipt of Digits
Audible Tones - Busy,
Reorder, Ringback dependent
upon digits dialed and called
party condition
—
Answer
Supervision
CO reverses current flow in
Tip-Ring
—
Disconnect
Supervision
Near-end: PBX opens loop
Far-end: CO removes ground
from ring
Stop Dial
Near or Far-end
termination: Loop
Current is broken
Test/Verify (Ground Start)
•
Verify the far-end (CO) circuits by using a standard telephone for
incoming calls. Verify outgoing calls by using a Butt Set with a groundstart lead (momentarily shorting the ring lead to the ground will
produce a dial tone from the far end).
•
Verify the near-end (PBX Ground Start) circuits by connecting to
known working far end Ground Start circuits.
•
Verify that appropriate voltages are present on Tip-Ring in each call
state.
•
During off-hook condition, 18 mA DC minimum should be drawn from
the CO (typical 35-40 mA).
•
Tip-Ring is polarity sensitive. PBX will be unable to initiate calls if
reversed. Reverse polarity to verify.
254
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
Direct Inward Dial (DID)/Loop Trunk
You use the Direct Inward Dial (DID)/Loop trunk primarily in analog DID
applications; rarely in PBX-PBX Loop Tie trunk applications.
This trunk uses current reversal to signal supervision information and
provides digit flow capability in both directions, when the trunk is in the
loop/tie mode.
Figure 27: Direct Inward Dial (DID)/Loop Trunk
255
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 53: Direct Inward Dial/Loop Trunk Summary
Signal
Seize
DID/Loop Trunk PBX
Outgoing
Tip-Ring leads are activated
(shorted); Loop Current flows in
line
DID/Loop Trunk PBX
Incoming
Tip-Ring leads are
activated (shorted); Loop
Current flows in line
Seize
Immediate Dial - Tip-Ring leads
Acknowledgment stay active
Outgoing Wink - Tip-Ring leads
toggle
Loop Current direction Delay
Dial - Tip-Ring leads reverse
Loop Current following seizure;
reverse again when ready to go
Immediate Dial - Tip-Ring
leads stay active.
Incoming Wink - Tip-Ring
leads toggle Loop Current
direction
Digits
Loop Current toggled (Rotary)
or DTMF
Loop Current toggled
(Rotary) or DTMF
Stop Dial
Tip-Ring leads reverse Loop
Current direction; forward again
when ready
Receipt of Digits
Audible Tones - Busy, Reorder,
Ringback dependent upon
digits dialed and called party
condition
Audible Tones - Busy,
Reorder, Ringback
generated and sent to
calling party dependent
upon digits received and
state of called party
Answer
Supervision
Current flow in Tip-Ring is
reversed
Current flow in Tip-Ring is
reversed
Disconnect
Supervision
Near or Far-end termination:
Loop Current broken
Near or Far-end termination: Loop Current is
broken
—
Test/Verify (DID)
•
Verify the far-end circuits by the use of a standard telephone for
outgoing calls.
•
Verify the near-end circuits by connecting to known working DID/Loop
circuits.
•
Verify that appropriate voltages are present on Tip-Ring in each call
state.
•
During off-hook condition, 20-25 mA should be drawn from the far-end.
256
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
Ear & Mouth (E&M) Trunk
You use the E&M trunk in Tie Trunk applications. The E&M trunks support
all the signaling information.
The Tip-Ring is used in a 2-wire operation shown in Figure 28, “E&M Trunk
- Type (2-wire),” on page 258.
Note: Type 1 may be used in a 2-or 4-wire operation.
The Tip-Ring and Tip Rx-Ring Rx is used in a 4-wire operation shown in
Figure 13 - E&M Trunk - Type V (4-wire).
Type I
Type 1 is used in applications when a telephone company is providing a
transmission path between PBXs. The E&M circuits connect to Telcoprovided Signaling circuits, which prepare the E&M signals for long
distance use.
Each end is identical to the other; all required voltage translation is
provided by the cable carrier.
257
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Figure 28: E&M Trunk - Type (2-wire)
258
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
Type V
Type V is used in applications where short distance direct back-to-back
operation is desired. The M-lead invert is required at both ends.
Figure 29: E&M Trunk - Type V (4-wire)
Table 54: E&M Trunk Summary
Signal
E&M Trunk PBX Outgoing
E&M Trunk PBX
Incoming
Seize
M lead goes active (voltage is
dependent on Type I or Type
V operation)
E lead goes active
Seize
Acknowledgment
Immediate Dial - E Lead stays
idle. Outgoing Wink - E Lead
toggles active/idle. Delay Dial
- E Lead goes active following
M; goes idle when ready to go
Immediate Dial - M Lead
stays idle. Incoming Wink M Lead toggles active/idle
Digits
M toggles (Rotary) or DTMF
through audio path
E toggles (Rotary) or
DTMF through audio path
(Page 1 of 2)
259
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 54: E&M Trunk Summary (continued)
Signal
E&M Trunk PBX Outgoing
E&M Trunk PBX
Incoming
Stop Dial
E lead goes active; goes
inactive when ready to go
—
Receipt of Digits
Audible Tones - Busy,
Reorder, Ringback dependent
upon digits dialed and called
party condition
Audible Tones - Busy,
Reorder, Ringback
generated and sent to
calling party dependent
upon digits received and
called party condition
Answer
Supervision
E lead goes active
M lead goes active
Disconnect
Supervision
Near-end termination:
M lead goes inactive;
E follows
Far-end termination:
E lead goes inactive;
M follows
Near-end termination: M
lead goes inactive;
E follows
Far-end termination:
E lead goes inactive;
M follows
(Page 2 of 2)
Test/Verify (E&M)
•
Loop back to self whenever more than 1 E&M type V circuit is
available.
•
Verify far-end circuits by activating near-end M lead and listening for
far- end dial tone.
•
Verify near-end circuits by activating near-end E lead and listening for
near-end dial tone.
•
Verify that appropriate voltages are present on E&M leads in each call
state.
260
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
Troubleshooting T1 Trunks (D4 DS-1)
A T1 Trunk is a digital trunking standard that supports multiple users.
Unlike analog trunks, the T-1 hardware signaling layer is independent of
trunk usage; synchronization and signaling are dealt with separately.
Figure 30: TI Trunk Synchronization
Synchronization
The T1 trunk establishes and maintains a connection between the two
systems. Sampling clocks of each partner must be synchronized.
-
The Master-Slave arrangement defines the leader and follower; if
connecting to a Public Network T1, the PBX will always be a slave.
-
The Stratum clock levels define the accuracy of the clock and the ability
to match with the incoming master clock signal.The higher Stratum
number synchronizes to the same or lower Stratum number. For
example, a Stratum 4 (PBX) clock synchronizes to a Stratum 3 (CO/
PBX/Channel Service Unit) clock.
-
When the PBX is connecting to more than one T-1 signal, choose the
order of preference of clocking sources in CDE Form 44, T1 Network
Sync (always choose a connection as close as possible to the defined
master source clock).
261
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Signaling Types
Channel Associated Signaling
T1 was originally designed to emulate 24 independent analog trunks. The
Channel Associated signaling supports Loop Start, Ground Start, DID/
Loop, and E&M trunks. The function of each channel is decided and
programmed at each end.
All handshake signaling is done with bits (A&B) taken from the bit stream
which are used to emulate the various analog trunk signals, (off-hook,
on-hook, current reversal, etc.).
Common Channel Signaling
The Handshake signaling for the first 23 channels is managed by the 24th
channel. The Common Channel signaling allows for transmission of digital
information and more advanced digital trunk applications (MITEL’s MSDN,
Bell Canada’s Megalink, ISDN, etc.). Signaling protocol is defined by the
type of service.
Test/Verify (T1)
Synchronization
Most T1 issues are a result of connectivity problems.
-
Verify that the incoming T1 signal is seen at both ends; verify all
hardware connections. Failure at either end indicates loss of an
incoming synchronizing signal.
-
For T1 cards in peripheral cabinets, verify that the switch settings on
the card are set for proper operation. For example: 1 is closed and 2-8
are open. The S1 Switch Settings for the T1 Trunk Cable Length (not
loop length) are as follows:
0-45.8 m (0-150 ft.): 1only closed (see figure below)
45.8 - 137.3 m (150 - 450 ft.): 2, 3, 4 closed
137.3 - 200.5 m (450 - 655 ft.): 5, 6, 7 closed
262
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
The S1 switch settings on the PRI Card shown in the following illustration
inform the T1 module of the location of the clock source and must be set
as indicated.
Loopback
Loopback is used to verify and locate the source of either a cable or a
synchronization problem through the devices in a T1 transmission path.
Devices in the T1 transmission path (PBX, CSU, Channel bank, smart
jacks, etc.) will generally have some type of loopback mode. Loopback
modes will typically have the effect of taking the input T1 stream and
transmitting the stream back to the source; the nodes thereby verify that
portion of the link.
In the absence of a loopback mode, the T1 transmits and receives pairs
that can be directly connected together to physically create a loopback
condition.
263
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
A&B bits
Taken from each of the 24 Channels to emulate the various analog trunk
signalling conditions (off-hook, on-hook, disconnect supervision, etc.) in
either Superframe or Extended Superframe (ESF) format.
Note: ESF is supported by the T1 module on the BCCIII card only.
Table 55: A-B Signaling States (Tie/E&M)
PBX Port
Type
CSU
Type
Tie Trunk
(loop start)
DPO Tx
DPO Rx
DID or Tie
Trunk (loop
start)
DPT Tx
DPT Rx
TIE Trunk
E&M Tx
4wire/2 wire
E&M
E&M Rx
264
PBX port
condition to
channel
Transmit
A
Receive
B
A
CSU condition to
analog facility
B
loop open
0
0
x
x
x
loop closure
1
1
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
x
normal battery
x
x
x
1
x
reverse battery
normal battery
0
0
x
x
x
reverse battery
1
1
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
x
loop open
x
x
x
1
x
loop closure
M-lead grounded
or open
0
0
x
x
x
M-lead battery
1
1
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
x
E-lead open
x
x
x
1
x
E-lead grounded or
open
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
Table 56: A-B Bit Signaling Example (T1/CO)
Transmit
Receive
State
A
B
A
B
Idle state
0
1
1
*
PBX grounds ring (wait for dial tone)
0
0
1
*
CO ground tip (dial tone applied)
0
0
0
*
PBX closes loop and removes ring ground
1
1
0
*
DP
1
0
*
1
1
0
*
Idle state
0
1
1
*
CO ground tip (interval between ringing)
0
1
0
1
CO ground tip (during ringing application)
0
1
0
0
PBX presents call
0
1
0
1
PBX answers call
1
1
0
*
Talking state
1
1
0
*
Talking state
1
1
0
*
CO removes tip ground (far end hangs up)
1
1
1
*
PBX opens loop (idle)
0
1
1
*
Talking state
1
1
0
*
PBX opens loop (near end hangs up)
0
1
0
*
CO removes tip ground (idle)
0
1
1
*
Outgoing call - Basic Operation
Dial pulsing
Completion of dialing
Incoming call - Basic Operation
CO disconnects
PBX disconnects
265
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Troubleshooting Voice Mail
If voice mail is not working properly, refer to the chart below for
suggestions on corrective action. If you are experiencing symptoms that
are not listed here, call your dealer for assistance.
To check the amount of disk space voice mail messages are using and the
status of the voice mail ports, use the Maintenance terminal REPORTS
function.
Table 57: Voice Mail Troubleshooting
Symptom/Trouble
Corrective Action
Notification calls are configured
for a mailbox, but don't seem to
work.
Notification is not enabled at the system level
(see Voice Mail Options Form 49)
-orCO line access is restricted for voice mail
port extension numbers.
-orNotification call number incorrectly
programmed. Try dialing the number from a
telephone to see what happens.
Notification calls use the correct
outside lines, but the pager
never beeps.
Check the notification phone number and
pager type in Form 50, Mailboxes.
The date and time that a
message was left is incorrect.
Check the SX-200 ICP system clock.
The system is warning that the
disk space is almost full.
Delete unused mailboxes and have
subscribers clean out unnecessary saved
messages.
Too much silence before or after
a greeting or mailbox name.
When recording greetings and names, start
speaking immediately after the tone and
press any key as soon as you are finished.
When outside callers reach the
auto attendant and press 0,
either no phones ring or the
incorrect phone rings.
Check that mailbox 0 is correctly associated
with the operator's extension.
When outside callers reach the
auto attendant and press 0, the
operator's telephone rings and
never forwards to voice mail.
Set Call Forward-Busy/No Answer on the
Operator's phone to forward to voice mail.
(Page 1 of 2)
266
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
Table 57: Voice Mail Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptom/Trouble
Corrective Action
Internal callers occasionally
reach the Operator (or other
designated overflow point for the
voice mail port hunt group) when
calling the auto attendant.
All voice mail ports are busy. Try again later.
All voice mail ports are busy. Try again later.
Outside callers occasionally
reach the Operator (or other
designated overflow point for the
voice mail port hunt group)
instead of the voice mail system.
The voice mail system resets
itself at times.
The voice mail system has the ability to
automatically reset itself in the event of a
critical error. The SX-200 ICP also
automatically resets daily at 3:00 AM.
The message lights do not work. Verify that you have the proper access code
to turn the light on by dialing it from a phone
Note: The ONS/CLASS circuits in the
SX-200 ICP controller do not support
Message Waiting lights.
No message light exists on the
phone.
Set up message notification to ring the
extension number whenever messages are
received.
Prompt to “please leave a
message" heard when a a busy
or unanswered extension is
reached repeats.
Bilingual prompts enabled (System Option
121) but only one language installed. Install
the missing language. See “Installing
Software Using an External CompactFlash
Card (Optional Initial Install)” on page 34.
(Page 2 of 2)
267
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
SX-200 ICP Property Management
System Interface
The SX-200 ICP Property Management System (PMS) interface collects
and sends the following Hotel/Motel information to a customer’s PMS
computer through the LAN.
•
Maid and room status
•
Guest check-in and check-out
•
Guest name
•
Auto wake-up and message waiting
•
PMS related maintenance logs.
Property Management System Messages
A PMS message is a string of ASCII text characters.
For example, to light a message waiting lamp for guest room extension
number 2129, the customer’s PMS computer will send a string of ASCII
keyboard commands to the PMS interface.
The PMS message sent is:
^B
MW 1 2129^C
When the PBX’s PMS interface receives and understands the message, it
will send an ACKnowledge character back to the customer’s PMS
computer.
268
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
The following is a PMS message format that enables a telephone’s
message waiting lamp.
^B
Start Transaction STX
The CTRL (^) B
character signals the start of a
PMS message
M
W
space
1
space
Function Code
Status Code
The MW followed
by a space indicates that the PMS
requests a message waiting function
1 followed by a
space turns on
the message
waiting lamp. 0
turns the lamp
off
space
2
1 2 9
Station’s Extension
(Room) Number
Identifies the extension
number of the telephone
on which the message
waiting lamp lights. The
PMS inserts leading
space(s) to indicate that
no number is present
^C
End Transaction
ETX
The CTRL (^) C
character signals
the end of a PMS
message
Message Formats from PBX to PMS
Maid in Room status
Maid in Room status is sent as a 10-character message, as follows:
__________
function code
STS
status code
n space (n is assigned room status code)
station number
nnnnn (with trailing spaces)
Message Registration of Outgoing Trunk Calls
Message Registration of Outgoing Trunk Calls status is sent as a
12-character message, as follows:
____________
function code
MRspace
status code
nnnn (nnnn is a 4-byte peg count)
station number
nnnnn (with trailing spaces)
SX-200 ICP and PMS 5-digit Extension Number Formats
The extension number is sent between the SX-200 ICP and the PMS as a
5-digit number. Numbers that are fewer than 5 digits include spaces:
ICP to PMS - extension number nnnnn with trailing spaces
PMS to ICP- extension number nnnnn with leading spaces.
269
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 58: PMS Keyboard Commands
Commands
PMS Keyboard Keys
Comments
Enquire (ENQ)
^E
Acknowledged
(ACK)
^F
Not Acknowledged (NAK)
^U
Start Transaction
(STX)
^B
End Transaction
(ETX)
^C
Check In
^BCHK1 XXXXX^C
Check Out
^BCHK0 XXXXX^C
Add Name
^BNAM1 a-z XXXXX^C
Replace Name
^BNAM2 a-z XXXXX^C
Delete Name
^BNAM3 a-z XXXXX^C
Send Message
^BMW 1 XXXXX^C
Insert a space before and after the digit 1.
Delete Message
^BMW 0 XXXXX^C
Insert a space before and after the digit 0.
Set Wakeup
^BWKPTTTTXXXXX^C
TTTT is the time in hours:minutes. Use a
24-hour clock.
270
^ = CTRL key
XXXXX is the 5-digit extension number
(use leading spaces).
a-z is the extension name, 20 characters
in length (use trailing spaces), followed by
a single space, followed by the extension
number. Only the first 10 characters of
the name are displayed.
Basic Troubleshooting and Repair
SX-200 ICP and PMS Cannot Communicate
If the SX-200 ICP PMS interface and the customer’s PMS computer
cannot communicate, the system will generate PMS related maintenance
log messages. Typically, PMS maintenance log messages will identify
•
Operating status of the PMS
•
Invalid start (STX) and end (ETX) of text message characters
•
Invalid function code message characters
•
Invalid status code message characters
•
Invalid room number message characters.
Testing the PMS Interface of the PBX
PMS problems typically occur in these areas:
•
PMS Protocol settings: Ensure that the communication parameters
between the systems match.
•
PMS Programming: Verify that all the recommended PMS and
Dataset programming is complete.
•
RS232-to-IP serial port converter: Use a straight-through cable
between the customer’s PMS computer and the converter.
Test the SX-200 ICP PMS interface as follows:
1. Disconnect the customer’s PMS computer from Ethernet-to-Serial
converter.
2. Connect a personal computer to the converter.
-
Ensure that the communications parameters of the personal
computer / terminal match those expected by the PBX’s PMS
interface.
-
Verify that you receive the ENQuire character from the SX-200 ICP
PMS interface. If not, verify that all the programming and the
connections are correct.
271
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
3. Type the PMS message required to light a telephone’s message
waiting lamp, using CAPITAL letters only. See the following example.
^B
M
W
space
Start Trans- Function Code
action STX
(CTRL B)
1 space
x
x
x
x
x
Status Code Station’s Extension (Room)
1 = ON
Number
0 = OFF
Enter the telephone’s extension
number (5 digits with leading
spaces).
^C
End Transaction ETX
(CTRL C)
4. Verify that the telephone’s message waiting lamp is lit.
If the lamp is not lit, check the PMS-related logs in Maintenance. The
logs will indicate which section of the PMS message is invalid.
Note: For the PMS to light a lamp station the Dial 0 for that tenant must be
a console, and the Dial 0 must be the same for Night 1 and Night 2.
5. Type the PMS message required to turn off the telephone’s message
waiting lamp.
6. Verify that the telephone’s message waiting lamp is off.
Turning a telephone’s message waiting lamp on and off from a PC
confirms that the SX-200 ICP PMS interface works correctly.
If problems continue when you reconnect the customer’s PMS computer,
check the maintenance logs for PMS related information, identifying
problems with the customer’s PMS hardware/software.
Note: Faster PMS PCs may have to be forced to wait for a reply.
272
Chapter 7
Advanced Troubleshooting
and Repair
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
274
Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair
About this Chapter
This chapter provides advanced procedures to help you identify and
troubleshoot common problems involving the following:
•
Network connectivity and performance
•
IP Phone registration
•
Audio quality
•
IP trunking
Go through this chapter before calling Mitel Technical Support.
Note: The maintenance and troubleshooting of your LAN/WAN network
maintenance is the responsibility of your network provider. Mitel Product
Support can help you isolate minor network problems; for more complex
network problems, Mitel Product Support will escalate to Professional
Services to assist you (this is a billable service).
IMPORTANT: Please see “Contacting Mitel” on page 6 before
contacting Mitel Technical Support.
275
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
General Network Troubleshooting
It is beyond the scope of this document to cover everything you need to
know to diagnose and eliminate network faults. The information provided
here is only an overview of network troubleshooting. For more information,
see the SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation and the IP Technology
Reference companion to the Advanced Installation and Maintenance
Course.
Check List
ˆ Do you have a Network topology diagram? If not, it is essential to
obtain one or create one for your records.
-
Is your network Managed or Unmanaged? Managed Layer 2
switches allow you to set up VLANs which are recommended,
especially if you are experiencing problems with voice quality.
-
What is your Layer 2 port setup: untagged, tagged, default VLAN,
other VLAN setups?
-
How is the router configured: route from one VLAN to another?
-
Which Layer 2 switches are the routers, servers, and SX-200 ICP
attached to?
-
Is the network configured in a tree structure? Are there any
roadblocks?
-
Are your IP Phones distributed on all of the Layer 2 switches or one
Layer 2 switch?
-
Is the 2nd Port on the IP Phones enabled for PC connection? What
type of IP Phones are being used?
ˆ Do the PCs perform adequately on the network—i.e., is this only a
problem affecting IP Phones?
276
-
Is the problem an IP configuration issue on the IP devices—i.e.,
DHCP on PCs, DHCP on IP Phones or VLAN issue?
-
Does it work by programming static IP addresses to the IP Phone?
To PCs?
-
Can you route to the internet?
-
Can you ping from PCs to all shared network devices (servers,
routers, printers, etc.)?
-
Are PC file transfers extremely slow?
Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair
ˆ Where does the problem lie? Within the LAN infrastructure, WAN
infrastructure, routing between subnets (VLAN's), certain Layer 2
switches, certain ports on the Layer 2 switch, connection to the
SX-200 ICP, etc.?
ˆ Isolate (if possible and after hours). If the problem is reproducible, then
disconnect voice from the LAN (if it’s a data problem) or the LAN from
voice (if it’s a voice problem) and retry scenario.
ˆ Do you have a Network Analyzer (including an Ethernet Tap) that will
capture information such as broadcasts being received, runts,
collisions, network utilization, etc.?
-
Is the problem experienced on one part of the network or
throughout? Don't assume only the person complaining has the
problem (try different areas of the network.
-
Make connections or calls to the problem area with the Network
Analyzer attached and capturing information (one capture from
source, one capture from destination).
277
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Troubleshooting IP Phone Connectivity
Using a network analyzer to debug
If a network analyzer is required to debug an IP Phone it will be necessary
to use an Ethernet tap to ensure that the port settings are not compromised
or changed. For example: using a shared hub to allow the analyzer to “see”
packets being delivered to a Layer 2 port will change connectivity to the
port to 10 MB half-duplex.
If the analyzer indicates there are excessive collisions:
•
check for duplex mismatch problems at the Ethernet port on
SX-200 ICP. The Layer 2 port attached to SX-200 ICP should be set
to 100 Full and not auto.
•
check that for dual-port phones the NIC card of the attached PC to the
IP set is not 10 MB half-duplex. The NIC card should be 100 MB
full-duplex.
•
for CRC errors: check if there is a faulty NIC card or flow-control.
•
if there are excessive runt frames, check for bad cables, duplex
mismatches or bad PC NIC.
Connectivity problems
For IP Phone network connectivity problems, identify the path between two
end devices (example: IP Phone and SX-200 ICP) by doing the following:
•
Execute a ping test from an IP Phone. Do this when the phone is
unable to register with its DHCP server (either the one in SX-200 ICP
or an external one if that is how the network is set up).
Note: This step is not to be confused with the section on Troubleshooting IP
Phone Registration.
-
Disconnect power from the phone.
-
Reconnect power WHILE pressing the Superkey button.
-
Press the “v” (volume down key) until INPUT IP Address.
-
Enter an IP address on the same subnet as the device you will be
pinging (avoid conflicting addresses).
-
If a mistake is made, press the “^” (volume up key) and start over.
Note: All digits must be entered for the IP Address; example 192.168.001.011
278
Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair
-
Press “v” repeatedly until the INPUT MASK prompt appears.
-
Enter the same mask as set for your network— example,
255.255.255.000
-
Press “v” repeatedly until the INPUT GATEWAY appears.
-
Enter the IP address of your Gateway—example, 192.168.1.1
-
Press “v” repeatedly until PERFORM PING TEST prompt appears.
-
Press “#” to indicate Yes.
-
At “INPUT DEST IP ADDRESS” enter the IP Address of the device
that you are proving a connection for (see following step). Example,
SX-200 ICP: 192.168.001.002.
-
The phone will show: Pinging 1 to 5, and then show the results—
e.g., 5 Pings Successful; 0 Pings failed.
-
The phone will have to be powered on and off in order to execute
another ping or boot up normally.
-
PING the following devices (in order):
SX-200 ICP
3rd party DHCP if any
Local gateway.
Remote gateway
Remote IP.
Troubleshooting IP Phone Registration
To troubleshoot IP Phone Registration:
1. Record the error message on the IP Phone display, then go through
IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting.
Note: To rule out DHCP problems, and isolate network-related issues, we
recommend that you program the IP Phone with a static IP Address in Form
47 or from the phone itself; see page 285 for instructions.
2. If you cannot solve the problem using the IP Phone Registration
Troubleshooting Table, go through the General Troubleshooting Steps
on page 238.
279
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
3. If you still can’t find the problem, call Mitel Technical Support.
IMPORTANT: Make sure you have the following information
on hand before calling:
•
Is the problem with the local or remote subnet?
•
DHCP server(s) settings
•
Layer 2 switch configuration and settings
•
Router configuration and settings
•
Network Diagram
•
IP addressing scheme
•
VLAN configuration and settings
Table 59: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting
Error Message on
Display
Invalid VLAN ID
Probable Cause
DHCP Option not set
correctly.
Corrective Action
1. Identify the location of DHCP server and
which DHCP server is assigned IP
address for the corresponding subnet.
2. For an external Microsoft DHCP server
(NT server, etc.), make sure that the
option type is set to LONG.
3. For a Cisco Router DHCP server, make
sure that the option type is set to hex,
and padded with 0s (for example,
0x00000002 for VLAN 2).
4. For the controller internal DHCP server,
set the option type to numeric.
Duplicated IP
Existing data device
owns the IP address.
1. Check the IP address on the phone
display.
2. Disconnect the IP Phone.
3. From a PC on the same subnet, ping
the suspected IP Phone. If there is a
response, identify the data device, and
resolve the conflict.
Corrupted DHCP
server.
On the suspected DHCP server, disable
then recreate the scope. If this is a
Microsoft DHCP server, reboot the server.
(Page 1 of 5)
280
Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair
Table 59: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting (continued)
Error Message on
Display
DHCP discovery
OR
DHCP OFFER X
REJ
DHCP Discovery
OR
DHCP OFFER X
REJ
(VLAN) (after
releasing the first IP
from the native
DHCP server)
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
DHCP server does not
have enough IP
addresses.
Create a larger scope with more IP
addresses on the DHCP server.
DHCP server is acting
up and cannot assign IP
addresses for the
corresponding subnet,
even though there are
enough IP addresses.
For a Microsoft DHCP server, reboot the
server.
For the controller internal DHCP server,
disable DHCP and rebuilt the scope.
L2 switch port is shut
down or not configured
properly.
Check the L2 switch, and ensure that the
port is not shut down. Ensure that this port
can access the DHCP server subnet (that
is, access the port for the same VLAN,
etc.).
DHCP Option 125 or 43 1. Identify if there is one DHCP server for
both VLANs, or if there is one DHCP
(DHCP Option 130
server per VLAN.
-MITEL IP PHONE prior
to Release 4.0) is not
2. For one DHCP server for both VLANs,
programmed up on the
ensure that 125/43 (option 130 prior to
second scope of the
Release 4.0) is programmed in the
DHCP server (or on the
scope of Voice LAN as String type with
second DHCP server).
value of “MITEL IP PHONE”.
OR
3. For one DHCP server per VLAN, ensure
VLAN ID is not
that option 125/43 (option 130 prior to
assigned properly.
Release 4.0) is defined in both DHCP
servers properly.
4. Verify that the vlan tag in the option 125
or 43 data string (option 132 prior to
Release 4.0) is set to assign to the
proper VLAN ID.
One DHCP server for
two VLANs network
configuration: IP helper
(sometimes called
DHCP Relay) address
on the router interface
is not set up correctly.
On the router interface (in which DHCP is
not residing), enter the IP helper address
and specify the IP address of the DHCP
server on the other side of the subnet (that
is, always set up IP helper address on the
DHCP client side).
Ensure the second scope is created for the
corresponding VLAN.
(Page 2 of 5)
281
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 59: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting (continued)
Error Message on
Display
DHCP Discovery
OR
DHCP OFFER X
REJ
(VLAN) (after
releasing the first IP
from the native
DHCP server)
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
The DHCP server is
acting up and cannot
assign IP addresses for
the corresponding
subnet even though
there are enough IP
addresses.
For a Microsoft DHCP server, reboot the
server.
For the controller internal DHCP server,
disable DHCP and rebuild the scope.
The L2 switch port for
the phone interface is
shut down or not
configured properly.
Check the L2 switch and ensure that the
port is not shut down.
For a Cisco L2 switch, ensure that this is a
trunk port with Dot1q encapsulation, and
that this trunk port allows both native and
Voice LAN to pass through.
For an HP L2 switch, ensure that Native
Lan is untagged, and that Voice LAN is
tagged
The L2 switch port for
the router interface is
shut down or not
configured properly.
Identify if there are two physical interfaces
to the router (one per VLAN), or a router on
a stick configuration (one physical with
virtual sub- interfaces).
Ensure that the port(s) on both sides (L2
switch and router) are not shut down.
If there is a physical interface on the router
for each VLAN, make sure that the L2
switch is set to access port for the
corresponding VLAN/ subnet correctly. OR
If there is one physical interface on the
router for multiple VLANs, ensure that this
is a trunk port on the L2 switch, and ensure
that this trunk port allows both native and
voice LAN to pass through.
On the router subinterface, ensure that the
proper VLAN is associated to the remote
subinterface.
The DHCP server does
not have enough IP
addresses.
Create a larger scope with more IP
addresses on the DHCP server.
(Page 3 of 5)
282
Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair
Table 59: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting (continued)
Error Message on
Display
TFTP load failure
Probable Cause
Option 125/43 (Option
128 prior to Release
4.0) is not set up to
point to the right TFTP
server (Controller).
Corrective Action
Check the DHCP server, and confirm that
the sw_tftp tag in option 125/43 (option
128 prior to Release 4.0) is pointing to the
right TFTP server (usually the SX-200 ICP
system IP address).
No network connectivity Confirm that the controller is connected to
between the controller
the network.
and the phone.
For a Cisco L2 switch: verify that the L2
switch is access port (Voice LAN).
For an HP L2 switch: verify that the L2
switch is untagged (Voice LAN).
If the router is involved, make sure that
router’s MTU is set to 600 or more.
Waiting for link
Firmware on controller
is missing or corrupted.
Verify that the firmware is in the sysro/tftp
directory (particularly if the user has
manually copied the firmware).
Confirm if TFTP on the controller is
corrupted (this can be verified by
connecting the IP Phone directly on the
controller, or by observing the behavior of
other IP Phones).
Option 125/43 (Option
129 prior to Release
4.0) is not programmed
correctly.
Check the call_Srv tag in option 125/43
(Option 129 prior to Release 4.0 ) on
DHCP to confirm that the IP address of the
SX-200 ICP controller is correctly
programmed.
The Layer 2 switch port
may be running
spanning tree.
Turn port fast on or disable Spanning tree
(whichever is possible).
The application server
is broadcasting or
multicasting on IP
Phone port or on PC
behind the IP Phone.
Turn off multicasting.
The PC behind the IP
Phone is changing
speed 100/10.
Depending on the NIC, you may need to
hardcode to 100 MB instead of auto
negotiation.
(Page 4 of 5)
283
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 59: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting (continued)
Error Message on
Display
Waiting for link
OR
Lost link to Server
TFTP Fail
(Remote IP phone
(statically
programmed IP
address) cannot
access the SX-200
ICP across the
WAN).
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
IP phone fails to receive Verify if the network or the controller is
Keepalive message in
down.
30 seconds.
There is electrical
interference.
Verify the power source, and change the
location of the power source.
The Layer 2 switch port
for the phone interface
is shut down or not
configured properly.
Check the Layer 2 switch and ensure that
the port is not shut down.
For a Cisco Layer 2 switch: verify that this
is a trunk port with Dot1q encapsulation,
and ensure this trunk port allows both
native and voice LAN to pass through.
For an HP Layer 2 switch: verify that
Native Lan is untagged and Voice Lan is
tagged.
The Layer 2 switch port
for router interface is
shut down or not
configured properly.
Verify which configuration you have
Ensure the port(s) on both sides (Layer 2
switch and router) are not shut down.
If there is physical interface on the router
for each VLAN, make sure that the Layer 2
switch is set to access port for the
corresponding VLAN/subnet correctly; OR
If this is a router on a switch, verify that this
is a trunk port on L2 switch, and ensure
this trunk port allows both native and voice
LAN to pass through.
On the router’s subinterface, verify that the
proper VLAN is associated to the
subinterface.
Typo in IP address,
VLAN ID, gateway.
Delete and reprogram the static IP
address. If there is no VLAN or priority,
don’t put 0 and leave them as blank.
Verify that the gateway IP address is
correct.
(Page 5 of 5)
284
Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair
Assigning Static IP Addresses to IP Phones
To navigate through the set prompts:
•
Use the Volume Down key to move to the next field.
•
Use the Volume Up key to go back to the previous field.
•
Use the * key to move backwards within a field (to correct an error).
•
Use the # key to insert a decimal character and move to the next IP
address field.
To set static IP address on the IP telephones:
1. Ensure that the set you want to program is not connected to the
network and there is no power supplied to the set.
2. Hold down the Volume Up key for 3 seconds and at the same time,
plug the set Ethernet cable and power into the set to display the
STATIC IP SETUP MODE.
The SET STATIC IP PARAM? prompt appears.
3. To begin entering static IP address information, press #.
Wait a few seconds for the USE PRESENT SETTINGS prompt to
appear.
4. Press # to enter IP data. To revert back to DHCP from static
parameters, press *.
The INPUT VLAN ID prompt appears.
5. If you are using VLANS, enter the VLAN ID that will be inserted into
packets sent by the phone. Then press the Volume Down key to move
to the next field. If you are not using VLANS, enter nothing and press
the Volume Down key.
The INPUT PRIORITY prompt appears.
6. Enter 6 if you are using priorities, or leave the field blank. Press the
Volume Down key to move to the next field.
The INPUT IP ADDRESS prompt appears.
7. Enter the customer-supplied static IP address (for example:
10.30.27.191).
Note: Enter two-digit portions of IP addresses as three-digit numbers with
leading zeros. For example, enter '10.12.67.30' as '010.012.067.030.
Note: If you see the INVALID IP ADDRESS message, press the Volume Up
key to return to the field with the incorrect entry. Edit the entry.
The INPUT PDA ADDRESS prompt appears.
285
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
8. Enter the customer-supplied static IP PDA address. Press the Volume
Down key to move to the next field.
The INPUT SUBNET MASK prompt appears.
9. Enter the subnet mask and press the Volume Down key to move to the
next field.
The INPUT DEFAULT GATEWAY prompt appears.
10. Enter the IP address of the Router and press the Volume Down key to
move to the next field.
The INPUT RTC ADDRESS prompt appears.
11. Enter the IP address of the RTC and press the Volume Down key to
move to the next field.
The INPUT TFTP ADDRESS prompt appears.
12. Enter the IP address of the TFTP server that is used to download the
main-load and boot-load images. Press the Volume Down key to move
to the next field.
The INPUT DNS ADDRESS appears.
13. Enter the IP address of the server that will be used during Web
browsing to resolve host names into IP addresses. Press the Volume
Down key to move to the next field.
The INPUT WINS ADDRESS prompt appears.
14. Enter the Windows Internet Name Services (WINS) server IP address.
For more information about this address, consult your Microsoft
Windows documentation. Press the Volume Down key to move to the
next field.
The INPUT PROXY ADDRESS prompt appears.
15. Enter the IP address of the proxy server. Press the Volume Down key
to move to the next field.
The INPUT PROXY PORT prompt appears.
16. Enter the Proxy Port number and press the Volume Down key to move
to the next field.
The TECHNICIAN IP ADDR? prompt appears.
286
Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair
17. To enter the IP address of the debugging utility, press #, enter the
address and then press the Volume Down key to move to the next
field. If you do not want to enter this information, press *.
The STORE IN NVRAM? prompt appears.
18. To store parameters in non-volatile RAM, press #
This ensures that your static settings will be used when the set is
powered-up and when the FLASH software is upgraded. If you do not
want to store the static settings in NVRAM, press *.
The set reboots and applies the new static IP data.
Removing Static IP Addresses on the IP Sets
To return to using DHCP when static parameters were previously enabled:
1. Plug the set cable and power into the set while holding down the Volume
Up key for 3 seconds to display the STATIC IP SETUP MODE.
2. At the USE PRESENT SETTINGS screen, select * = DISABLE to
revert back to DHCP from static parameters.
IP Phone Analyzer
The Mitel IP Phone Analyzer is a software tool for troubleshooting IP
phones. It installs on a PC from the SX-200 ICP software CD. The PC
needs Windows 98, NT, 2000 or XP and a connection on the same
network as the SX-200 ICP.
Installing the IP Phone Analyzer
1. In Form 47 (DHCP Parameters) add Option 131: IP Phone Debug
Window IP to the list of Common Options.
For the IP address, enter the one belonging to the PC that has the
Analyzer installed on it.
2. Insert the SX-200 ICP software CD-ROM in the PC’s CD drive.
3. Open the Tools folder, and then the IP Phone Analyzer folder.
4. Double-click Setup.exe. Follow the prompts to complete the
installation.
287
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Launching the IP Phone Analyzer
1. Click Start on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Programs.
3. Click Mitel IP Phone Analyzer.
For detailed information on using the IP Phone Analyzer, refer to its Online
Help.
Enabling Tool Analysis
From the IP Phone Analyzer Tool:
1. Select Commands, and then Register Set.
2. Enter the IP address of the IP phone.
From the IP phone:
•
Reboot the phone (by removing and restoring power) to add the IP
address of the PC to the phone.
The IP address will appear in the IP Phone Analyzer Status View
window.
The phone will be out of service while it resets.
Disabling Tool Analysis
From the PC hosting the Analyzer Tool:
•
Access the Status View window, left-click on the IP address,
right-click, and then select Delete.
From the CDE/Maintenance Terminal:
•
In Form 47 (DHCP Parameters), delete Option 131 to disable IP
messaging to the Analyzer Tool.
There will be a service outage while the phones reset.
From the IP phone:
•
288
Restart the set to clear PC’s IP address from the phone.
Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair
Troubleshooting Phone Audio Quality
To Troubleshoot Phone Audio Quality:
1. Go to the table below.
2. If you cannot solve the problem using the table, go through the steps
on page 238.
3. If you still can’t find the problem, call Mitel Technical Support.
IMPORTANT: Make sure you have the following information
on hand before calling:
•
Setup scenario
•
Is there a common denominator (router, only one side of
subnet, etc.)?
•
Other call scenarios (IP to IP, IP to TDM, etc.)
•
Layer 2 switch configuration and settings
•
Router configuration and settings
•
Network diagram
•
IP addressing scheme
•
VLAN configuration and settings
•
Layer 2 switch port statistics for FCS, collision and duplex
mismatch.
289
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 60: Audio Quality Problems Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Excessive noise
Faulty cabling
Check for cabling problems.
One way audio
between Remote IP to
TDM (VM)
No gateway IP address
programmed in the
controller.
Make sure that the gateway IP
address is programmed properly.
Distorted audio only
on NSU
Voice encoding is not
inverted.
1. For T1, enable invert for Voice
encoding in link descriptor.
2. For CEPT or API, enable ADI
invert for voice encoding. (This
does not apply to Embedded PRI.)
Echo
Echo between LS trunks
and IP phones.
Measure the loss level and
impedance for LS trunks connected
to onboard ASUs (See “Diagnostic
Function Commands” on page 228).
If necessary, update the Options
subform of Form 13 with matching
settings.
Handsfree mode is used.
Check if far end is using handsfree.
Switch to Handset mode to see if this
corrects it, or lower the handsfree’s
volume.
Echo Canceller is
beyond specifications.
1. Identify the path between the two
end points, and verify if Trunk is
always involved.
2. Check with Telco to see if the trunk
is within specs. On a typical T1,
the input signal should be -15 dB.
If it is too high (-5 dB for example),
echo may result.
3. If this is the case, keep an echo log
to isolate the problem.
Network jitter issue.
If the problem only occurs between
IP devices, check network jitter issue
below.
(Page 1 of 2)
290
Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair
Table 60: Audio Quality Problems Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms
Broken Audio,
intermittent (IP trunks
only)
Echo between IP
Phones
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Handsfree on the far
end.
Ensure that neither device is using
Handsfree. Some handsfree phones
only operate at half duplex.
Packet loss, jitter via
network.
1. Identify the speech path between
the two end points, including
router, switch WAN in the audio
stream.
2. The network administrator needs
to apply QOS/TOS to minimize
jitter over slow speed interface
(T1, Frame Relay, etc.), and give
voice traffic priority over data.
Limited bandwidth and
too many calls across
router, or combination
data and voice.
1. Limit the number of calls to remote
subnets.
2. The network administrator needs
to apply QOS/TOS to give voice
traffic priority over data.
Physical port error
(CRC, faulty cable,
duplex mismatch, HUB).
1. Identify the speech path between
the two end points, including
router, switch WAN in the audio
stream.
2. Verify that there is no duplex
mismatch in each port settings
and/or faulty cable, or faulty port.
3. Make sure that the IP Phone is not
plugged into a HUB.
Compression enabled
Compression will save bandwidth,
but may cause noticeable clipping. If
not sure, disable compression to see
if it makes a difference.
Router’s CPU is
exhausted or congested.
Router may be running excessive
filtering. The network administrator
may need to monitor the
performance of the router.
Layer 2 switch setting
problem.
1. Check the L2 switch for duplex
mismatch and spanning tree.
2. Turn off if possible.
(Page 2 of 2)
291
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Troubleshooting IP Trunks
The tools and techniques used to troubleshoot connectivity problems with
IP Phones also apply to IP trunks. Other problems with IP trunks, such as
poor voice quality and traffic congestion, are often the result of incorrect
CDE programming or insufficient bandwidth.
The following sections summarize the programming requirements and
provide guidance on addressing problems with connectivity and other
quality of service concerns. For more detailed information, see the
SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation, especially the section entitled
“Maintaining Voice Quality of Service.”
CDE Check List
ˆ Form 01, System Configuration
Ensure that the IP trunk card is programmed in Bay 1 Slot 6.
ˆ Form 03, Class of Service
Ensure that the following options are enabled in
COS 7:
-
801 Incoming Trunk Call Rotary
-
802 Limited Wait for Dial Tone
-
811 ANIS/DNIS/Class Trunk
-
702 SMDR Overwrite Buffer
ˆ Form 04, System Options/System Timers
Ensure that IP trunk-related options are programmed as follows
-
Option 86, PRI Card: QSIG: Enabled.
-
Option 115, Maximum IP Trunks: 1-30 depending on traffic.
-
Option 120, Compression Resources: Compression is
recommended with IP trunks to conserve bandwidth.
-
Option 132, DSP Configuration Option: Business 1, Business 2,
Hotel, Analog 1, Analog 2, or Analog 3.
Does the DSP Configuration match the hardware installed and
Compression Resources purchased? It may be necessary to
purchase an additional DSP card(s) to satisfy DSP Configuration
and Compression requirements. For more information, see “DSP
Configuration Options” on page 12.
292
Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair
ˆ Form 13 Trunk Circuit Descriptor
-
There should be a descriptor number with Trunk Type T1 E&M for
the IP Trunks. All IP trunks enabled should be programmed here
and have a Comment identifying them as IP trunks for future
reference.
ˆ Form 15 Dial In Trunk
-
Ensure that COS 7 is programmed for the IP Trunks along with the
correct Circuit Descriptor (CDN) that was created in Form 13.
Verify other settings (COR, Ten, N, M, X) and add a Comment
identifying the trunks as IP trunks for future reference.
-
Enable QSIG Supplementary Services.
ˆ Form 16 Trunk Groups
-
Ensure there is a trunk group for the IP Trunks.
ˆ Form 23 ARS - Route Definition
-
Ensure that there is a route for every remote node networked using
IP trunks. For example, if there is a 3300 ICP and another
SX-200 ICP in the network, then there should be two routes.
Note: When the cursor is on a route for an IP Trunk, a softkey labelled SHOW
IP will appear. Press the softkey to list all routes programmed for IP Trunks.
Ensure that Concurrent Call, Compression, Remote Profile and IP Node are
all programmed. If the far end is a 3300, Remote Profile must be set to 1.
ˆ Form 26 ARS - Digit Strings
-
Make sure there is a digit string programmed which will route calls
(see Form 23 for the correct Route number) to the remote ICP
systems.
ˆ Form 48 - Voice Networking
-
Make sure that the correct IP Node is entered. Each IP-PBX (node)
has a unique IP Node number that all the other IP-PBXs must have
in their programming. The form lists the local site as Bay 1 with no
IP address; the other sites have no Bay association. Comments
should be entered with information such as the location and
IP-PBX type. Knowing the amount of traffic expected to each
remote node will determine what the Max Calls field should be set
at to avoid congestion.
Note: MAX CALLS must be greater than zero (the default); otherwise, no
calls are allowed to the node.
293
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Considerations:
a.
Is one IP Trunk route the primary route used, and if the far end
node is down, will it use the other IP Trunking Route (assumes a
three node network)? If so, then Max calls could be set to 24 on
both routes since you will only use one route at any given time.
b.
If both routes will be used and traffic is assumed to be higher
(e.g., eight calls per route at any given time), then the Max
calls would more likely be set to 12 or lower.
IP Check List
Refer to “Maintaining Voice Quality of Service” in SX-200 ICP
Documentation for more information on the subject matter discussed in
this section.
ˆ Communicate with the engineer responsible for remote node(s) and
gather information about the IP Trunk requirements.
ˆ Gather information about the “pipe” between your location and the far
location.
-
Is it ADSL? ADSL has fast download speeds but slow upload speeds,
plus it usually relies on DHCP to provide local addressing, which
affects the programming in CDE (SX-200 ICP must have a fixed IP
Address that won't change at the far end IP Trunk connections).
-
What is the bandwidth? How much of the bandwidth will be used for
data? Are there any times of the day when the bandwidth is utilized
more than other times? Is the pipe ever removed for general
maintenance or is it susceptible to weather or environmental impacts
(anything that will affect your ability to provide proper service). Do I
need Compression Options based on my findings (refer to the CDE
Checklist at beginning of the section)?
ˆ Gather the IP Addresses for the far end. Ping from both ends to ensure
there is a connection.
ˆ Using ARS, get the far end to call you and you call them.
-
294
Refer to SMDR to get information on what you are dialing and what
is being dialed from the other end.
Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair
Troubleshooting System Boot Failure
During the setting of IP address or inadvertent system corruption, incorrect
boot parameters may be entered and system operation is jeopardized.
Correct information is essential for full functionality. If you are uncertain
about current boot parameters, halting the system during boot up and
entering a "c" at the [VxWorks Boot]: prompt will allow access to the
required information. In most cases a system reboot is unnecessary
because the incorrect boot parameters cause the system to be in constant
reboot mode. Note: All parameters must be entered in lowercase. If you
make a mistake during entry, press enter for each paramater until you pass
the last one, and then press “c” to start over. (There is no backspace
option.)
NOTE: The IP addresses used here are examples only and your
network address should match your local environment.
SX-200 ICP MX 9600 VT100 Terminal Emulation
Parameter
Setting
boot device
ata=auto (See Note 1)
processor number
0
host name
bootHost
file name
/partition1/Kts8250.vx
inet on ethernet (e)
192.168.21.2:ffffff00
inet on backplane (b)
host inet (h)
192.168.20.12
gateway inet (g)
192.168.21.1
user (u)
ftp
ftp password (pw) (blank = use rsh)
@
flags (f)
0x0
target name (tn)
startup script (s)
other (o)
motfcc
Note 1: “ata=auto” means that the system will try to boot from the front
flash card first.
“ata=no auto” means that the system will bypass the front flash card and
boot from the internal flash card or hard drive only.
295
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
PRI Card
38400 VT100 terminal emulation
Parameter
Setting
boot device
flash
processor number
0
host name
file name
vxworks
inet on ethernet (e)
192.168.20.20:ffffff00
inet on backplane (b)
host inet (h)
gateway inet (g)
192.168.20.1
user (u)
ftp password (pw) (blank = use rsh)
flags (f)
0x0
target name (tn)
pricarda3c5
startup script (s)
other (o)
NSU
flash,c:/,xqt,sx2c-na.cmd
38400 VT100 terminal emulation
Parameter
Setting
boot device
flash
processor number
0
host name
file name
vxworks
inet on ethernet (e)
192.168.21.3:ffffff00
inet on backplane (b)
host inet (h)
gateway inet (g)
192.168.21.1
user (u)
ftp password (pw) (blank = use rsh)
flags (f)
0x0
target name (tn)
startup script (s)
other (o)
296
flash,c:/,xqt,b_loader.cmd
Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair
Bay Control Card III - Peripheral Bay
Parameter
Setting
boot device
flash
processor number
0
host name
file name
vxworks
inet on ethernet (e)
192.168.60.115:ffffff00
inet on backplane (b)
host inet (h)
gateway inet (g)
user (u)
ftp password (pw) (blank = use rsh)
flags (f)
0x0
target name (tn)
startup script (s)
other (o)
flash,c:\,xqt,sx2c-bri.cmd
297
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
298
Appendix A
Default Database Values
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
300
Default Database Values
Default Database
Table 61: CDE Forms
FORM NUMBER
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
FORM NAME
System Configuration
Feature Access Codes
COS Define
System Options/System Timers
Tenant Interconnection Table
Tenant Night Switching Control
Console Assignments
Attendant LDN Assignments
Desktop Device Assignments
Pickup Groups
Data Circuit Descriptor
Data Assignment
Trunk Circuit Descriptors
Non-Dial-In Trunks
Dial-In Trunks
Trunk Groups
Hunt Groups
Miscellaneous System Ports
Call Rerouting Table
ARS: COR Group Definition
ARS: Day Zone Definition
ARS: Modified Digit Table
ARS: Route Definition
ARS: Route Lists
ARS: Route Plans
ARS: Digit Strings
ARS: Maximum Dialed Digits
Form Access Restriction Def'n.
DTE Profile
Device Interconnection Table
System Abbreviated Dial Entry
(Page 1 of 2)
301
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 61: CDE Forms (continued)
FORM NUMBER
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
FORM NAME
CDE Data Print
Account Code Entry
Directed IO
Global Find Access Code
Modem Assignment
Guest Rm SUPERSET Keys Template
ACD Keys Template
ACD Agent Groups
ACD Supervisors
ACD Paths
T1 Link Descriptors
T1 Link Assignment
Network Synchronization
Not Used
Key System Toll Control
DHCP Parameters
Voice Networking
Voice mail
Mailboxes
Voice mail Distribution Lists
Email
Bay Location Assignment
Calling Pary Number
Digit Translation Table
(Page 2 of 2)
302
Default Database Values
Default Database Values
This section lists the values in the default CDE database. Only forms with
data in them are listed.
Note: The controller is identified as the “IP Bay” in some CDE forms. The
default bay number of the IP bay is bay 1. However, when an SX-200 EL/ML
database is installed to migrate the system to an SX-200 ICP, the IP bay
becomes bay number 8.
Form 01 - System Configuration
BAY
SLT
CCT
PROGRAMMED
01
01
IP LINE CARD
IP LINE CARD
01
02
IP LINE CARD
IP LINE CARD
01
03
IP LINE CARD
IP LINE CARD
01
04
IP LINE CARD
IP LINE CARD
01
05
IP LINE CARD
IP LINE CARD
01
06
IP TRUNK CARD
IP TRUNK CARD
01
07
IP LINE CARD
IP LINE CARD
01
08
---
---
01
09
IP LINE CARD
IP LINE CARD
01
10
IP LINE CARD
IP LINE CARD
01
11
VOICE MAIL CARD
VOICE MAIL CARD
01
12
VOICE MAIL CARD
VOICE MAIL CARD
01
13
ONBOARD ASU
ONBOARD ASU
COMMENTS
Form 02 - Feature Access Codes
FEATURE
FEATURE NAME
ACCESS
CODE
01
Account Code Access
02
Auto-Answer Activation
*01
03
Call Forwarding - All Calls
*03
04
Call Forwarding - Internal Only
*04
05
Call Forwarding - External Only
*05
06
Call Forwarding - I'm Here
*06
07
Call Forwarding - Cancel I'm Here
*07
08
Dial Call Pickup
*08
09
Directed Call Pickup
*09
10
Do Not Disturb
*10
11
Extension General Attendant Access
0
(Page 1 of 3)
303
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
FEATURE
FEATURE NAME
ACCESS
CODE
12
Paging Access To Default Zone(s)
*12
13
Paging Access To Specific Zones
*13
14
TAFAS - Any
*14
15
TAFAS - Local Tenant
*15
16
Hold Pickup Access (Attendant Hold Slots)
*16
17
Console Lockout Access Code
18
Maintenance Functions (Test Line)
19
Direct Inward System Access
20
Callback Busy <<single digit>>
21
Call Hold
*21
22
Call Hold Retrieve (Local)
*22
23
Call Hold Retrieve (Remote)
*23
24
Abbreviated Dial Access
*24
25
Clear All Features
*25
26
SUPERSET Telephone Loopback Test
27
Tone Demonstration
28
ADL Call Setup
29
ADL Disconnect
30
Last Number Redial
31
Executive Busy Override <<single digit>>
32
Automatic Wake-up
33
Call Park
34
Node ID
35
Maid In Room
36
SUPERSET Room Status Display
37
Direct To ARS
38
UCD Agent Login/Logout
39
Analogue Network Accept Callers Extension
40
SUPERSET Maid In Room Status Display
*30
*33
41
Send Message
*41
42
Call Message Sender of Oldest Message
*42
43
Callback - No Answer
44
ACD Login/Logout
45
Silent Monitoring
46
Flash over Trunk
47
Program Feature Key
48
Key System - Direct Paging
*48
(Page 2 of 3)
304
Default Database Values
FEATURE
ACCESS
CODE
FEATURE NAME
49
Key System - Group Page - Meet Me Answer
50
Key System - Direct CO Line Select
51
Key System - Store Personal Speed Call
*51
52
Key System - Retrieve Personal Speed Call
*52
53
Double Flash over Trunk
54
Analog Network Accept Call Forward Data
55
Analog Network Accept Call Forward Reason
*49
56
Headset Mode On/Off
57
Call Park Orbit Retrieve
58
IP Set Registration PIN
***
59
IP Set Replacement PIN
###
*57
60
IP Set Language Selection
61
Disable Twin Phone
62
Call Park Remote
*62
63
Call Park and Page - Telephone
*63
64
Call Park and Page - PA
*64
65
Phonebook
*65
66
Open Door
*66
67
Digit Translation Table Access
68
Secure Hot swap/unswap
69
DID Number Display
(Page 3 of 3)
100 Attendant Bell Off
X
101 O/G Restriction/Room Status Setup
X
102 Attendant Display of System Alarms
X
103 Attendant DISA Code Setup
X
104 Attendant Flexible Night Service Setup
X
105 Guest Room Key
X
COS7 - IP TRUNK
COS6 - VOICE MAIL
COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS4 - CONSOLE
COS3- SUB-ATT.
COS2 - ONS
COS
OPTION / NAME
COS1 - IP SET
OPTION NUMBER
Form 03 - Class of Service
(Page 1 of 10)
305
COS6 - VOICE MAIL
COS7 - IP TRUNK
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
117
Attendant-Timed Recall (Camp-On) 5 - 240 s; 0=Disable
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
118
Attendant Call Forward - No Answer Timer 10 - 240 s.
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
119
Attendant Tone Signaling
X
X
X
X
X
COS4 - CONSOLE
30
30
106 Attendant New Call Tone
COS3- SUB-ATT.
30
Attendant-Timed Recall (Hold) 5 - 240 s; 0=Disable
COS2 - ONS
Attendant-Timed Recall (No Ans) 5 -240 s; 0=Disable
116
COS
OPTION / NAME
COS1 - IP SET
115
OPTION NUMBER
COS5 - LS TRUNK
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
X
X
107 Attendant Automatic Call Forward - No Answer
X
108 Attendant Audible Alarm
X
109 Attendant Serial Call
X
110
X
Attendant Abbr. Dial Confidential Number Display
111
Attendant Abbreviated Dial Programming
112
Attendant Station Busy-Out
X
X
X
113
Attendant Call Block Key
X
114
Attendant Trunk Busy-Out
X
120 Attendant Conference Disable
X
121 Station Do Not Disturb
X
122 Setup Time/Date
123 Call Forward Setup and Cancel
X
X
124 Attendant Hold Position Security
125 Attendant Multi-New Call Tone
126 Apply Key Line Conference Warning Tone
150 Sub-Attendant Station Setup Advisory Messages
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
151 RESERVED
152 RESERVED
153 RESERVED
200 Account Code, Forced Entry - External Calls
201 Account Code, Forced Entry - Long Distance Calls
202 Alarm Call
203 Broker’s Call
204 Call Block Applies (Room To Room)
(Page 2 of 10)
306
X
X
X
X
X
208 Call Forwarding - External
X
X
X
X
209 Call Forwarding – Always
X
X
X
X
X
COS7 - IP TRUNK
COS4 - CONSOLE
X
X
COS6 - VOICE MAIL
COS3- SUB-ATT.
X
207 Call Forwarding - No Answer
COS
OPTION / NAME
COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS2 - ONS
206 Call Forwarding - Busy
OPTION NUMBER
COS1 - IP SET
Default Database Values
205 Flash For Waiting Call
210 Call Forwarding Inhibit on Dial-In Trunks
X
X
X
212 Can Flash If Talking to an Incoming Trunk
211
Call Hold and Retrieve Access
X
X
X
X
213 Can Flash If Talking to an Outgoing Trunk
X
X
X
X
X
214 Cannot Dial a Trunk after Flashing
215 Cannot Dial a Trunk if Holding or in Conference with One
216 Data Security
X
217 Direct To ARS
218 Directed Call Pickup
X
X
X
219 Discriminating Dial Tone
X
X
X
X
220 Do Not Disturb
X
X
X
X
221 Clear All Features
222 Call Forward Inhibit on Hold Timeout
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
223 Flash Disable
224 Flash for Attendant
225 Hold Pickup (Attendant Paged Access)
226 Inward Restriction (DID)
227 Lockout Alarm Applies
228 Manual Line (Dial 0 Hotline)
229 Voice Mail Port
X
X
230 Message Register Overflow Alarm
231 Message Waiting Setup - Bell
232 Message Waiting Setup - Lamp
X
233 Never a Consultee
234 Never a Forwardee
(Page 3 of 10)
307
COS7 - IP TRUNK
COS6 - VOICE MAIL
COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS4 - CONSOLE
COS3- SUB-ATT.
COS2 - ONS
COS
OPTION / NAME
COS1 - IP SET
OPTION NUMBER
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
235 Originate Only
236 Outgoing Trunk Callback
237 Outgoing Trunk Camp-On
238 Override Security
X
239 Priority Dial 0
X
240 Line Privacy
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
241 Receive Only
242 Repeated Camp-On Beep
243 Non-Busy Extension
244 Room Status Applies
245 Abbreviated Dialing Access
246 SMDR - Extended Record
247 SMDR - Record Meter Pulses
248 TAFAS Any Access
X
X
249 TAFAS Access Tenant
X
X
250 TAFAS Access During Day Service
X
251 Transfer Dial Tone
X
X
X
X
253 Call Forward - Don’t Answer Timer (2 - 6 Rings)
3
3
3
3
3
3
254 Call Hold Recall Timer (PBX Telephones) 0 - 10 Minutes
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
255 Repeated Camp-On Beeps Timer (5 - 15 Seconds)
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
256 UCD Music On Hold Timer (0 - 50 Minutes)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
258 Display Prime as Forwarder
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
259 Message Sending
X
X
X
X
X
3
3
X
252 Broker’s Call with Transfer
3
257 Flash Over Trunk
260 Internal / External Split Call Forwarding
261 ONS Voice Mail Port
262 Ignore Forward Busy with Free Appearance
X
263 Delay Ring Timer (2 - 6 Rings)
3
X
3
3
3
3
264 Half Fwd NA timer for DID call with VM msg on
(Page 4 of 10)
308
COS6 - VOICE MAIL
COS7 - IP TRUNK
COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS4 - CONSOLE
COS3- SUB-ATT.
COS2 - ONS
COS
OPTION / NAME
COS1 - IP SET
OPTION NUMBER
Default Database Values
X
X
265 Voice Mail System Speed Dial Index (0-255)
266 Camp-on before Forward on Busy
267 Softkey Support for Voice Mail
X
X
268 Record a Call in Voice Mail
269 Record a Call: Start Recording Automatically
270 Record a Call: Save Recording on Hangup
271 Privacy Released at Start of Call
272 Guest Suite Extension
273 Display Held Caller ID to ONS/CLASS
274 ONS Ring Group Member
275 Single Button Transfer to Voice mail
X
X
X
X
X
279 Display Account codes on Phone
X
X
X
280 PC (2nd) Port on IP Phone
X
276 Twin Phone
277 Automatic Mailbox Creation
278 Intercom Mode
281 TAFAS Access During Day/Night Service
282 Headset Hard hold
300 Automatic Callback
301 Camp-On
X
X
X
302 Flash-in Conference
X
X
X
X
303 Paging Zone 1 Access
X
X
X
X
304 Paging Zone 2 Access
305 Paging Zone 3 Access
306 Paging Zone 4 Access
307 Paging Zone 5 Access
308 Paging Zone 6 Access
309 Paging Zone 7 Access
310 Paging Zone 8 Access
311
Paging Zone 9 Access
(Page 5 of 10)
309
COS3- SUB-ATT.
COS4 - CONSOLE
COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS6 - VOICE MAIL
COS7 - IP TRUNK
312 Paging Default (0 - 9) (0 Gives All Enabled Zones)
COS2 - ONS
COS
OPTION / NAME
COS1 - IP SET
OPTION NUMBER
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
313 CO Trunk to CO Trunk Connect
X
X
314 CO Trunk to TIE Trunk Connect
X
X
315 CO Trunk to DID Trunk Connect
X
X
316 TIE Trunk to TIE Trunk Connect
X
X
317 TIE Trunk to DID Trunk Connect
X
X
318 DID Trunk to DID Trunk Connect
X
X
319 Extension Non-CO Trunk to Trunk Connect
X
X
320 Transparent Multi-Console Operation
321 Ignore Call Forward After Transfer
322 Confirm Wakeup by Off-hook
323 RESERVED
324 RESERVED
325 RESERVED
326 Account Code, Forced Entry - Data Internal Calls
327 Account Code, Forced Entry - Data External Calls
328 Account Code, Forced Entry - Data Long Distance Calls
329 RESERVED
330 RESERVED
331 RESERVED
400 Contact Monitor
401 Call Park
X
X
X
X
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
402 Long Loop (Off-Premise Extensions Only)
403 Trunk Recall Partial Inhibit
404 Recording Failure to Hangup Timer (1 - 255 Seconds)
405 Can Initiate Call Monitor
406 Allow To Be Monitored (0=dis, 1=no beep, 2=beeps)
407 RESERVED
500 Override
X
501 Override Announce
(Page 6 of 10)
310
X
X
X
COS7 - IP TRUNK
503 Display CLASS Name
COS6 - VOICE MAIL
X
COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS4 - CONSOLE
X
COS2 - ONS
X
COS
OPTION / NAME
COS1 - IP SET
502 Display ANI/DNIS/CLASS Information
OPTION NUMBER
COS3- SUB-ATT.
Default Database Values
X
504 SUPERSET 420 Optional Class Display
505 ONS Stations Support CLASS
X
506 ONS Positive Disconnect (0 = disabled)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
507 Station/Set: Allow My Number to be Displayed
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
508 Station/Set: Show Internal Numbers on My Phone
509 Display Caller ID for Non-Prime Lines
X
X
510 ONS Stations Support CLASS Visual Call Waiting
511
X
X
COV Voice Mail Displays Calling
600 Telephone - Auto-Answer
601 Telephone - Auto-Hold Disable
602 Telephone - Background Music
X
603 Telephone - Disconnect Alarm
604 Telephone - Automatic Outgoing Line
605 Telephone - Message Program
606 Telephone - Enhanced Answering Position
607 Telephone - Associated Modem Line
608 Telephone - Room Status Display
609 Telephone - Night Service Switching
X
0
0
0
611
X
X
613 Display ANI Information Only
X
X
614 Telephone - Handset Volume Saved
X
X
615 Telephone - Offhook Voice Announce
X
X
Telephone - Limited New Call Ring
0
X
610 Telephone - Guest Room Template (0 - 3) (DN)
X
0
0
0
612 Telephone - Headset Operation
X
X
616 Alarm Monitor Point
Ringer
Ringer
Ringer
Ringer
Ringer
Ringer
618 Alarm Audio Level for Sets
Ringer
617 Immediate Off Hook Alarm
(Page 7 of 10)
311
COS2 - ONS
COS3- SUB-ATT.
COS4 - CONSOLE
COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS6 - VOICE MAIL
COS7 - IP TRUNK
COS
OPTION / NAME
COS1 - IP SET
OPTION NUMBER
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
619 Direct Speak@Ease Access
620 SUPERSET Telephone - Max Call Logs Allowed <0-20>
621 Call Logging - Multiple CO/DTS
622 Ring Group Logging
623 Automatic DID Number Assignment
624 Wakeup Alarm Notification
650 ACD - Agent Template (0 - 3; 0 = Disable)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
651 ACD - Supervisor Template (0 - 3; 0 = Disable)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
652 ACD - Senior Supervisor Template (0 - 3; 0 = Disable)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
653 ACD - Agent Always Auto-Answer
654 ACD - Display Path Always
655 Allow Continuous Monitor
680 Key System - Direct CO Access
681 Key Set/Sub Att. - Call Hold Notify Timer (0 -600 s)
682
Key System - Auto Answer - Internal Calls (For SUPERSET
3DN and 4DN only)
683 Key System - Direct Paging Handsfree Answerback
X
X
X
684 Can Make All Set Page
X
X
X
685 Can Receive All Set Page
X
X
X
686 Group Page Includes Overhead Paging
687 All Set Page Includes Overhead Paging
688 IP Set Requires Compression
689 DTS/CO Line Transfer Call Handling
690 Hold And Page
691 Telephone - Day/Night1 Switching
692 Secure Hot Swapping
700 SMDR - Does Not Apply
701 No Dial Tone
702 SMDR - Overwrite Buffer
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
703 Message Register Applies
(Page 8 of 10)
312
COS7 - IP TRUNK
COS6 - VOICE MAIL
COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS4 - CONSOLE
COS3- SUB-ATT.
COS2 - ONS
COS
OPTION / NAME
COS1 - IP SET
OPTION NUMBER
Default Database Values
704 Incoming / Internal Modem Pooling Access
705 Automatic Overflow From Attendant
706 RESERVED
707 RESERVED
708 RESERVED
709 Follow External Call Forward
710 RESERVED
800 ANI Applies
801 Incoming Trunk Call Rotary
X
802 Limited Wait for Dial Tone
803 SMDR - Drop Calls < n Digits (0... 11, 0 = disable)
X
0
0
0
0
0
X
0
0
804 SMDR - Drop Incomplete Outgoing Calls
805 Trunk No Dial Tone Alarm
806 SMDR - Record Incoming Calls
807 SMDR - Display Private Speedcall
808 Special DISA
809 Standard Ring Applies
810 DISA During Night Service Only
811
ANI/DNIS Trunk
X
X
812 Loop Start Trunk to ACD Path Connect
813 Delay ONS Ring - Wait for Network Name (0-6 s)
0
0
0
0
0
0
814 SMDR - Record ANI/DNIS/CLASS
0
X
815 DTS/CO LINE KEY Honors Forwarding
816 CENTREX Flash over Trunk
900 Data Station Queuing
901 DTRX Herald
902 DTRX Message Code
903 DTRX Message Code Text
904 DTRX Complete Message Text
905 DTRX Herald Text Select (1- 4)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(Page 9 of 10)
313
COS7 - IP TRUNK
COS6 - VOICE MAIL
COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS4 - CONSOLE
COS3- SUB-ATT.
COS2 - ONS
COS
OPTION / NAME
COS1 - IP SET
OPTION NUMBER
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
906 DATA SMDR - Does Not Apply
907 DATA SMDR - Extended Record
908 DATA SMDR - Overwrite Buffer
(Page 10 of 10)
314
Default Database Values
Form 04 - System Options
OPTION
NUMBER
SYSTEM OPTIONS
STATUS
01
Clock Format (example 16:00, 4:00, 4:00a)
12HR AM
02
Message Lamp Test Enable
DISABLED
03
Single Paging Amplifier
DISABLED
04
Message Waiting & Message Register Clear Print
DISABLED
05
Verified Account Codes
DISABLED
06
Analogue Networking SMDR
DISABLED
07
Cancel 24-hour Message Waiting
DISABLED
08
Five Digit SMDR
DISABLED
09
Attendant Call Block
DISABLED
10
Attendant Conference Beep
DISABLED
11
Automatic Wake-up
DISABLED
12
Automatic Wake-up Alarm
DISABLED
13
Automatic Wake-up Print
DISABLED
14
Automatic Wake-up Music
DISABLED
15
Data Demultiplexer
DISABLED
16
IP Set Voice Encryption
ENABLED
17
Discriminating Ringing
ENABLED
18
Discriminating Ringing Always
DISABLED
19
DID Server Application
DISABLED
20
Holiday Messages
DISABLED
21
Incoming to Outgoing Call Forward
DISABLED
22
Last Party Clear - Dial Tone
DISABLED
23
Message Reg. Count Additional Supervisions
DISABLED
24
Message Register Audit
DISABLED
25
Message Register Zero After Audit
DISABLED
26
No Overlap Outpulsing
ENABLED
27
Room Status Audit
DISABLED
28
SMDR Indicate Long Calls
DISABLED
29
Telephone Last Number Redial
ENABLED
31
Satellite PBX
DISABLED
32
Outgoing Call Restriction
DISABLED
33
Room Status
DISABLED
34
Auto Room Status Conversion/Auto Wake-up Print
DISABLED
35
DSS/BLF Call Pickup
DISABLED
36
End of Dial Character ( # )
DISABLED
37
Calibrated Flash
DISABLED
38
Switch-Hook Flash
ENABLED
39
DATA SMDR Indicate Long Calls
DISABLED
40
Message Register Follows Talker
DISABLED
42
Silent Monitoring
DISABLED
43
ACD Silent Monitoring Beeps
DISABLED
(Page 1 of 3)
315
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
OPTION
NUMBER
44
SYSTEM OPTIONS
ACD Reports
STATUS
DISABLED
45
Disable PMS Logs
ENABLED
46
Rotary Dial Digit Translation Plan 0-3
0
47
ARS Unknown Digit Length Time-out 2-60 seconds
5
48
Limited Wait For Dial Tone
5
49
Pseudo Answer Supervision Timer 10-60 seconds
50
Dialing Conflict Timer
2-10 seconds
5
51
Final Ring Time-out
1-30 minutes
1
1-15 seconds
20
52
Minimum Flash Timer
20-50 ms ( 10 ms inc )
20
53
Maximum Flash Timer
20-150 ms ( 10 ms inc )
100
54
DISA Answer Timer
55
Account Code Length Variable or 2-12 digits
1-8 seconds
6
8
56
Auto Room Stat Conver/Wakeup Print timer(HH:MM)
00:00
57
Vacant/Reserved Room Default Call Restriction
INTERNAL
58
Occupied Room Default Call Restriction
INTERNAL
59
Receivers Reserved For Non-Auto-Attendant Use
UNKNOWN
60
Tone Plan
NA
61
Class Receivers in Spine Bay #1 (0..5)
3
62
Class Receivers in Spine Bay #2 (0..5)
3
63
Class Receivers in Spine Bay #3 (0..5)
3
64
Class Receivers in Spine Bay #4 (0..5)
3
65
Class Receivers in Spine Bay #5 (0..5)
3
66
Class Receivers in Spine Bay #6 (0..5)
3
67
Class Receivers in Spine Bay #7 (0..5)
3
69
DTMF ON Timer
5-15 ( in 10 ms inc )
9
70
DTMF OFF Timer
5-15 ( in 10 ms inc )
9
71
Slot 10 FIM Capacity (2 or 3 Bays)
2
72
Slot 11 FIM Capacity (2 or 3 Bays)
2
73
Advance to Daylight Savings Time ( mm:dd:hh )
00:01:00
76
Go Back to Standard Time
00:01:00
79
Daylight - Standard Time difference (30-240min)
60
81
Enter offset from GMT (+/-hh:mm)
-05:00
( mm:dd:hh )
82
Use DSP Echo Canceller
DISABLED
84
Multiple Guest Suite Phones
DISABLED
85
Speak@Ease Integration
DISABLED
86
PRI Card: Q.sig
DISABLED
87
Record a Call
DISABLED
88
TAPI Desktop (0..50 in increments of 5)
0
89
Class Functionality for ONS Sets
DISABLED
90
ACD Real Time Events
DISABLED
91
PRI Card: NFAS
DISABLED
92
PRI Card: D Channel Backup
DISABLED
93
PRI Card: Remote LAN Access
DISABLED
(Page 2 of 3)
316
Default Database Values
OPTION
NUMBER
SYSTEM OPTIONS
STATUS
94
PRI Card: Min/Max
DISABLED
95
PRI Card: Auto Min/Max
DISABLED
96
Number of Links (0-8)
0
97
Support Softkey Access to Voicemail
DISABLED
98
Support 3DN, 4DN and 400 series Set Types
DISABLED
99
Fax Tone Detection
DISABLED
100
Mitel Options Password
18642413
101
System Identity Code
17591
102
Feature Level (0..99)
0
103
Maximum Devices
32
104
Maximum ACD Agents
0
105
Mitel Application Interface
DISABLED
106
Automated Attendant
ENABLED
107
Lodging
DISABLED
108
Property Management System
DISABLED
109
Remote Software Download
ENABLED
110
Maximum BNIC Cards (0..40)
0
111
Maximum BONS Cards (0..40)
0
112
SS4000 Series Sets
ENABLED
113
Centralized Attendant/VoiceMail
DISABLED
114
Maximum IP Sets
20
115
Maximum IP Trunks
0
120
Number of Compression Resources (0-24)
0
121
Voicemail License for Bilingual Prompts
DISABLED
122
Voicemail License for Personal Contact Numbers
DISABLED
123
Voicemail License for DID Server
DISABLED
124
Voicemail Property Management System
DISABLED
125
Licensed Embedded Voicemail Boxes (0-748)
20
126
Email Messaging
DISABLED
127
Autoselect Park Orbits
ENABLED
128
Phonebook
DISABLED
129
Attendant Park and Page Key
DISABLED
130
Paging Tone
ENABLED
131
PC (2nd) Port on IP Phone
DISABLED
132
DSP Configuration Option
BUSINESS1
133
TDM Bays (0-2)
0
134
Voicemail Recorded Announcement Device
DISABLED
135
Voicemail Control of MWI by DTMF Tones
DISABLED
136
Dual Function Key Timer (1-5)
2
137
Mark SMTP Forwarded Voicemails as Read
ENABLED
138
Country Variant For Disconnect Tone Control
DISABLED
(Page 3 of 3)
317
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Form 05 - Tenant Interconnection Table
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
01 O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
02 *
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
03 *
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
04 *
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
05 *
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
06 *
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
07 *
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
08 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
09 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
10 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
11 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
12 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
13 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
14 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
15 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
16 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
17 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
18 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
19 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
20 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
*
21 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
*
22 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
*
23 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
*
24 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
*
25 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
318
Default Database Values
Form 06 - Tenant Night Switching Table
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
01
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
02
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
03
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
04
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
05
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
06
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
07
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
08
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
09
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
.
21
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
.
22
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
.
23
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
.
24
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
.
25
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
Form 07 - Console Assignments
BAY
SLT
CCT
EXT NUM
1
13
02
198
COS COR TENANT COMMENTS
04
01
CESID
01
319
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Form 09 - Desktop Devices Definition
B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS
COR
TYPE
1/01/01
1
100
1
1
5220
01
1/01/02
1
101
1
1
5220
01
1/01/03
1
102
1
1
5220
01
1/01/04
1
103
1
1
5220
01
1/01/05
1
104
1
1
5220
01
1/01/06
1
105
1
1
5220
01
1/01/07
1
106
1
1
5220
01
1/01/08
1
107
1
1
5220
01
1/01/09
1
108
1
1
5220
01
1/01/10
1
109
1
1
5220
01
1/01/11
1
110
1
1
5220
01
1/01/12
1
111
1
1
5220
01
1/01/13
1
112
1
1
5220
01
1/01/14
1
113
1
1
5220
01
1/01/15
1
114
1
1
5220
01
1/01/16
1
115
1
1
5220
01
1/01/17
1
116
1
1
5220
01
1/01/18
1
117
1
1
5220
01
1/01/19
1
118
1
1
5220
01
1/01/20
1
119
1
1
5220
01
1/01/21
5020
1/01/22
5020
1/01/23
5020
1/01/24
5020
1/02/01
5020
1/02/02
5020
1/02/03
5020
1/02/04
5020
1/02/05
5020
1/02/06
5020
1/02/07
5020
1/02/08
5020
1/02/09
5020
1/02/10
5020
1/02/11
5020
1/02/12
5020
1/02/13
5020
PAGE
NAME
ASSOC
COMMENTS
/CESID/MAC
(Page 1 of 6)
320
Default Database Values
B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS
COR
TYPE
1/02/14
5020
1/02/15
5020
1/02/16
5020
1/02/17
5020
1/02/18
5020
1/02/19
5020
1/02/20
5020
1/02/21
5020
1/02/22
5020
1/02/23
5020
1/02/24
5020
1/03/01
5020
1/03/02
5020
1/03/03
5020
1/03/04
5020
1/03/05
5020
1/03/06
5020
1/03/07
5020
1/03/08
5020
1/03/09
5020
1/03/10
5020
1/03/11
5020
1/03/12
5020
1/03/13
5020
1/03/14
5020
1/03/15
5020
1/03/16
5020
1/03/17
5020
1/03/18
5020
1/03/19
5020
1/03/20
5020
1/03/21
5020
1/03/22
5020
1/03/23
5020
1/03/24
5020
1/04/01
5020
1/04/02
5020
1/04/03
5020
1/04/04
5020
PAGE
NAME
ASSOC
COMMENTS
/CESID/MAC
(Page 2 of 6)
321
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS
COR
TYPE
1/04/05
5020
1/04/06
5020
1/04/07
5020
1/04/08
5020
1/04/09
5020
1/04/10
5020
1/04/11
5020
1/04/12
5020
1/04/13
5020
1/04/14
5020
1/04/15
5020
1/04/16
5020
1/04/17
5020
1/04/18
5020
1/04/19
5020
1/04/20
5020
1/04/21
5020
1/04/22
5020
1/04/23
5020
1/04/24
5020
1/05/01
5020
1/05/02
5020
1/05/03
5020
1/05/04
5020
1/05/05
5020
1/05/06
5020
1/05/07
5020
1/05/08
5020
1/05/09
5020
1/05/10
5020
1/05/11
5020
1/05/12
5020
1/05/13
5020
1/05/14
5020
1/05/15
5020
1/05/16
5020
1/05/17
5020
1/05/18
5020
1/05/19
5020
PAGE
NAME
ASSOC
COMMENTS
/CESID/MAC
(Page 3 of 6)
322
Default Database Values
B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS
COR
TYPE
1/05/20
5020
1/05/21
5020
1/05/22
5020
1/05/23
5020
1/05/24
5020
1/07/01
5020
1/07/02
5020
1/07/03
5020
1/07/04
5020
1/07/05
5020
1/07/06
5020
1/07/07
5020
1/07/08
5020
1/07/09
5020
1/07/10
5020
1/07/11
5020
1/07/12
5020
1/07/13
5020
1/07/14
5020
1/07/15
5020
1/07/16
5020
1/07/17
5020
1/07/18
5020
1/07/19
5020
1/07/20
5020
1/07/21
5020
1/07/22
5020
1/07/23
5020
1/07/24
5020
1/09/01
5020
1/09/02
5020
1/09/03
5020
1/09/04
5020
1/09/05
5020
1/09/06
5020
1/09/07
5020
1/09/08
5020
1/09/09
5020
1/09/10
5020
PAGE
NAME
ASSOC
COMMENTS
/CESID/MAC
(Page 4 of 6)
323
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS
COR
TYPE
1/09/11
5020
1/09/12
5020
1/09/13
5020
1/09/14
5020
1/09/15
5020
1/09/16
5020
1/09/17
5020
1/09/18
5020
1/09/19
5020
1/09/20
5020
1/09/21
5020
1/09/22
5020
1/09/23
5020
1/09/24
5020
1/10/01
5020
1/10/02
5020
1/10/03
5020
1/10/04
5020
1/10/05
5020
1/10/06
5020
1/10/07
5020
1/10/08
5020
1/10/09
5020
1/10/10
5020
1/10/11
5020
1/10/12
5020
1/10/13
5020
1/10/14
5020
1/10/15
5020
1/10/16
5020
1/10/17
5020
1/10/18
5020
1/10/19
5020
1/10/20
5020
1/10/21
5020
1/10/22
5020
1/10/23
5020
1/10/24
1/11/01
PAGE
NAME
ASSOC
COMMENTS
/CESID/MAC
5020
1
301
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 1
(Page 5 of 6)
324
Default Database Values
B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS
COR
TYPE
PAGE
NAME
1/11/02
1
302
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 2
1/11/03
1
303
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 3
1/11/04
1
304
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 4
1/11/05
1
305
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 5
1/11/06
1
306
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 6
1/11/07
1
307
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 7
1/11/08
1
308
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 8
1/11/09
1
309
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 9
1/11/10
1
310
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 10
1/11/11
1
311
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 11
1/11/12
1
312
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 12
1/12/01
1
313
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 13
1/12/02
1
314
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 14
1/12/03
1
315
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 15
1/12/04
1
316
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 16
1/12/05
1
317
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 17
1/12/06
1
318
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 18
1/12/07
1
319
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 19
1/12/08
1
320
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 20
1/12/09
1
321
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 21
1/12/10
1
322
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 22
1/12/11
1
323
6
1
VMAIL
VMAIL 23
1/12/12
1
324
6
1
VMAIL
1/13/01
1
199
3
1
Sub
1/13/03
1
200
2
1
Stn
1/13/04
1
201
2
1
Stn
1/13/05
Stn
1/13/06
Stn
ASSOC
COMMENTS
/CESID/MAC
VMAIL 24
01
(Page 6 of 6)
325
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Form 09 - Desktop Line Appearance Definition
KEY
TYPE
DIR
RING
SEC
DSS
EXT
NUM
TRK
NUM
LABEL
R#
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
02
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
100
1
9
04
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
2
9
06
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
3
9
08
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
4
9
10
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
5
9
12
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
6
9
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
02
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
1
9
04
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
2
9
06
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
3
9
08
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
4
9
10
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
5
9
12
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
6
9
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
02
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
1
9
04
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
2
9
06
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
3
9
08
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
4
9
10
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
5
9
12
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
6
9
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
02
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
1
9
04
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
2
9
06
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
3
9
08
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
4
9
10
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
5
9
12
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
6
9
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
02
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
1
9
04
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
2
9
06
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
3
9
08
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
4
9
10
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
5
9
12
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
6
101
102
103
104
9
(Page 1 of 4)
326
Default Database Values
KEY
TYPE
DIR
RING
SEC
DSS
EXT
NUM
TRK
NUM
LABEL
R#
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
02
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
105
1
9
04
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
2
9
06
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
3
9
08
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
4
9
10
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
5
9
12
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
6
9
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
02
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
1
9
04
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
2
9
06
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
3
9
08
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
4
9
10
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
5
9
12
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
6
9
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
02
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
1
9
04
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
2
9
06
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
3
9
08
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
4
9
10
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
5
9
12
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
6
9
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
02
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
1
9
04
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
2
9
06
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
3
9
08
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
4
9
10
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
5
9
12
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
6
9
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
02
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
1
9
04
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
2
9
06
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
3
9
08
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
4
9
10
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
5
9
12
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
6
106
107
108
109
9
(Page 2 of 4)
327
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
KEY
TYPE
DIR
RING
SEC
DSS
EXT
NUM
TRK
NUM
LABEL
R#
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
02
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
110
1
9
04
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
2
9
06
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
3
9
08
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
4
9
10
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
5
9
12
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
6
9
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
02
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
1
9
04
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
2
9
06
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
3
9
08
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
4
9
10
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
5
9
12
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
6
9
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
02
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
1
9
04
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
2
9
06
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
3
9
08
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
4
9
10
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
5
9
12
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
6
9
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
02
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
1
9
04
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
2
9
06
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
3
9
08
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
4
9
10
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
5
9
12
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
6
9
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
02
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
1
9
04
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
2
9
06
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
3
9
08
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
4
9
10
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
5
9
12
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
6
111
112
113
114
9
(Page 3 of 4)
328
Default Database Values
KEY
TYPE
DIR
RING
SEC
DSS
EXT
NUM
TRK
NUM
LABEL
R#
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
02
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
1
9
04
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
2
9
06
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
3
9
08
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
4
9
10
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
5
9
12
CO Line
In/Out
Immed
No
6
9
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
116
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
117
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
118
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
119
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
301
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
302
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
303
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
304
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
305
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
306
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
307
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
308
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
309
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
310
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
311
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
312
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
313
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
314
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
315
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
316
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
317
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
318
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
319
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
320
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
321
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
322
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
323
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
324
*01
Prime
In/Out
Immed
No
199
02
Recall
04
Hold Pos
06
Hold Pos
08
Hold Pos
Immed
115
RECALL
(Page 4 of 4)
329
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Form 09 - Paging Groups
[PAGING GROUP: 01] [
]
EXTN
BAY
SLT
CCT
100
01
01
01
101
01
01
02
102
01
01
03
103
01
01
04
104
01
01
05
105
01
01
06
106
01
01
07
107
01
01
08
108
01
01
09
109
01
01
10
COMMENTS
Form 10 - Pickup Groups
****** CDE DATA PRINT OPTION 10 FORM IS EMPTY ******
Form 11 - Data Circuit Descriptor
[DESCRIPTOR NUMBER : 1] PARAMETER
VALUE
Session Inactivity Disconnect Timer 0 - 255 minutes
0
Guard Timer
2
0 - 99 seconds
Minimum Baud Rate
110
Default Baud Rate
9600
Maximum Baud Rate
19200
Always Use Default Baud Rate When Called
NO
DTR Off Disconnect Timer 0 - 99 seconds
5
DTR To CTS Delay Timer
100
0 - 9900 msec ( 100 msec inc )
DTR Forced High
NO
RTS Forced High
NO
DSR Is Held High When Device Is Idle
YES
CTS Is Held High When Device Is Idle
YES
Originate A DTRX Call With A Low->High Transition of DTR
NO
Action Taken If The Idle DTE Has DTR Low ( Auto Answer )
REFUSE
Pooled Modem Communication Established Indicator
DCD
First Modem Tone ( 2025 Hz, 2100 Hz, 2225 Hz )
2025Hz
Second Modem Tone ( 2025 Hz, 2100 Hz, 2225 Hz )
2225Hz
ASYNC: Keyboard Origination Allowed ( Auto Baud )
YES
ASYNC: ADL Auto Baud
NO
(Page 1 of 2)
330
Default Database Values
[DESCRIPTOR NUMBER : 1] PARAMETER
VALUE
ASYNC: Flow Control
XON/OFF
ASYNC: XON Character ( 0 - 127, decimal value of ASCII code )
17
ASYNC: XOFF Character ( 0 - 127, decimal value of ASCII code )
19
ASYNC: Break Key Function
SYSATT
ASYNC: PBX Attention Character ( 0 - 127 )
4
ASYNC: Parity
ODD
ASYNC: Character Length ( 7 - 8 ; 8 bits implies no parity )
7
ASYNC: Number of Stop Bits ( 1 - 2 )
1
ASYNC: Autobaud To Host Character 1 ( 0 - 127 )
13
ASYNC: Autobaud To Host Character 2 ( 0 - 127 )
0
ASYNC: Delay Between Autobaud Characters 0-1270 msec (10msec inc)
100
DS2100: Operating Mode
ASYNC.
( ASYNC, SYNC )
SYNC: Rate Adaptation Scheme ( MiNET, X.31 )
MiNET
SYNC: Clock Source ( INTERNAL, SYSTEM, TX EXT, TX & RX EXT )
INTERNAL
(Page 2 of 2)
Form 11 - Data Circuit Descriptor Review
****** CDE DATA PRINT OPTION 11* FORM IS EMPTY ******
20
1
13
21
1
13
22
1
13
23
1
13
24
1
13
25
1
13
26
1
13
27
1
13
28
AVL
13
DTE
19
1
CDN
13
COR
02
1
COS
01
13
NUM
CCT
13
1
EXT
SLT
1
TYPE
TEN
BAY
Form 12 - Data Assignment Table
HOTLINE
COMMENTS
331
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Form 13 - Trunk Circuit Descriptor
[ AMB TRUNK: 1 ] OPTION NAME
[SUPERVISION PARAMETER]
STATUS
Reverse to Idle
NO
Far-end gives answer supervision
NO
Inhibit automatic supervision
NO
No seize alarm
NO
No release alarm
NO
Line length
LONG
Save Busy-Out Status
YES
Impedance
COMPLEX
Calling party disconnect timer
1 - 12 minutes
5
100 - 9900 ms ( 100 ms inc )
500
0 - 3000 ms ( 100 ms inc )
800
6 - 10 seconds
6
Ignore remote disconnect
NO
Disconnect timer
Supervision direction: incoming trunk calls also
NO
Guard timer
Class trunk
YES
Ring cycle timer
Ignore line reversal during seizure
YES
Ringing expected
YES
Ringing debounce timer
5 - 12 seconds
6
Seize timer
10 - 60 s ( 10 s inc )
60
Flash timer
200 - 700 ms ( 100 ms inc )
300
Flash over trunk
NO
Direct access on CO Line Keys: bypass Key System Toll Control
NO
[ T1 E&M TRUNK: 7 ] OPTION NAME
STATUS
Reverse to Idle
NO
Far-end gives answer supervision
NO
Inhibit automatic supervision
NO
No seize alarm
NO
No release alarm
NO
Line Length
LONG
DTMF
NO
Save Busy-Out Status
Disconnect timer
YES
150 -900 ms
300
Release acknowledge timer
2 - 240 s ( 2 s inc )
40
Guard timer
200 - 1000 ms ( 100 ms inc )
Incoming start type
Debounce timer
800
WINK
20 - 150 ms ( 10 ms inc )
100
(Page 1 of 2)
332
Default Database Values
[ T1 E&M TRUNK: 7 ] OPTION NAME
Wink timer
STATUS
150 - 300 ms ( 50 ms inc )
200
Outgoing start type
WINK
Digit outpulsing ratio
60/40
Outpulse delay timer
100 - 2000 ms ( 100 ms inc )
800
Flash timer
200 - 700 ms ( 100 ms inc )
300
Flash type
LOOP FSH
Flash over trunk
NO
Interdigit timer
300 - 800 ms ( 100 ms inc )
800
Wait for delay timer
300 - 5000 ms ( 100 ms inc )
5000
Remote end is a satellite
NO
Remote end is a satellite with OPS lines
NO
Direct access on CO Line Keys: bypass Key System Toll Control
NO
Release Link Trunk
NO
QSIG Supplementary Services
YES
Present Node ID over IP Trunking
NO
(Page 2 of 2)
Form 13 - Audio Configuration Table
TRK
LENGTH
IMPEDANCE
1
BAY
SLT
CCT
AUTO
AUTO
2
AUTO
AUTO
3
AUTO
AUTO
4
AUTO
AUTO
5
AUTO
AUTO
6
AUTO
AUTO
TEL NO MWT COMMENTS
Form 13 - Trunk Circuit Descriptor Review
[ AMB TRUNK: 1]
TRK NUM
BAY
SLT
CCT
1
1
13
7
2
1
13
8
3
1
13
9
4
1
13
10
5
1
13
11
6
1
13
12
COMMENTS
333
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Form 14 - Non Dial-In Trunks
BAY SLT CCT COS TEN DAY N1
N2 CDN TK NUM
TK NAME COMMENTS
1
06
01
1
06
02
1
06
03
1
06
04
1
06
05
1
06
06
1
06
07
1
06
08
1
06
09
1
06
10
1
06
11
1
06
12
1
06
13
1
06
14
1
06
15
1
06
16
1
06
17
1
06
18
1
06
19
1
06
20
1
06
21
1
06
22
1
06
23
1
06
24
1
06
25
1
06
26
1
06
27
1
06
28
1
06
29
1
06
30
1
13
07
5
1
1
1
LINE 1
1
13
08
5
1
1
2
LINE 2
1
13
09
5
1
1
3
LINE 3
1
13
10
5
1
1
4
LINE 4
1
13
11
5
1
1
5
LINE 5
1
13
12
5
1
1
6
LINE 6
1
13
13
1
13
14
1
13
15
1
13
16
1
13
17
1
13
18
334
Default Database Values
Form 15 - Dial-In Trunks
BAY SLT CCT COS COR TEN
1
06
01
1
06
02
1
06
03
1
06
04
1
06
05
1
06
06
1
06
07
1
06
08
1
06
09
1
06
10
1
06
11
1
06
12
1
06
13
1
06
14
1
06
15
1
06
16
1
06
17
1
06
18
1
06
19
1
06
20
1
06
21
1
06
22
1
06
23
1
06
24
1
06
25
1
06
26
1
06
27
1
06
28
1
06
29
1
06
30
1
13
13
1
13
14
1
13
15
1
13
16
1
13
17
1
13
18
N
M
X
CDN
TK
TK
COMMENTS
NUM NAME
335
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Form 16 - Trunk Groups
[GRP:01-LOCAL ] [SMDR ][TERM]
TK
BAY SLT CCT
NUM
6
01
13
12
5
01
13
11
4
01
13
10
3
01
13
09
2
01
13
08
1
01
13
07
COMMENTS
Form 17 - Hunt Groups
[GRP 01:300 ] [TERM ]STN/SET ]
EXT
BAY
NUM
SLT CCT
301
01
11
01
302
01
11
02
303
01
11
03
304
01
11
04
COMMENTS
Form 17 - Hunt Group Options
[GRP 01:300 ] [TERM ] STN/SET ]
Name
OPTIONS
VMail
Overflow
Record-a-Call: Maximum Port Usage (1-20)
0
System Greeting (1-8)
1
336
Default Database Values
Form 18 - Miscellaneous System Ports
ENTRY
DESCRIPTION
BAY
SLT
CCT
SCT
01
Music On Hold
01
13
29
01
02
Pager 1
01
13
30
02
03
Pager 2
04
Pager 3
05
Pager 4
06
Pager 5
07
Pager 6
08
Pager 7
09
Pager 8
01
13
29
01
10
Pager 9
11
Minor Alarm
12
Major Alarm
13
Critical Alarm
14
Night Bell 01
15
Night Bell 02
16
Night Bell 03
17
Night Bell 04
18
Night Bell 05
19
Night Bell 06
20
Night Bell 07
21
Night Bell 08
22
Night Bell 09
23
Night Bell 10
24
Night Bell 11
25
Night Bell 12
26
Night Bell 13
27
Night Bell 14
28
Night Bell 15
29
Night Bell 16
30
Night Bell 17
31
Night Bell 18
32
Night Bell 19
33
Night Bell 20
34
Night Bell 21
35
Night Bell 22
36
Night Bell 23
37
Night Bell 24
38
Night Bell 25
39
Door Relay 1
40
Door Relay 2
41
Door Relay 3
42
Door Relay 4
DIR
PAGER
EXT #
1
340
337
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Form 19 - Call Rerouting Table
[TENANT : 01] TYPE OF CALL
DAY
N1
N2
Station Dial 0 Routing
100
100
100
Priority Dial 0 Routing
100
100
100
-----
-----
300
300
300
Call Forward Busy Number For This Tenant
300
300
300
Call Forward No Answer Number For This Tenant
300
300
300
DID Recall Points On Busy
DID Recall Points On No Answer
DID Routing For Calls Into This Tenant
DID Illegal # Intercept For This Tenant
DID Vacant Number Routing For This Tenant
DID Attendant Access Night Points
-----
Non-Dial-In Trunks Alternate Recall Points
Dial-In Tie Recall Points On Busy
Dial-In Tie Recall Points On No Answer
Dial-In Tie Routing For Calls Into This Tenant
Dial-In Tie Illegal # Intercept For This Tenant
Dial-In Tie Vacant Number Routing For This Tenant
Dial-In Tie Attendant Access Night Point
-----
DND Intercept Routing For This Tenant
Automatic Wake-up Routing For This Tenant
Personal Wake-up Routing For This Tenant
UCD/Attendant Recording For This Tenant
UCD On Hold Time-Out For This Tenant
DISA Day Service Routing For This Tenant
Station Vacant Number Routing For This Tenant
CO Line Routing Points On No Answer
Music Sources For This Tenant
Record a Call Voicemail Destination For This Tenant
Station Illegal Number Routing For This Tenant
Speak@Ease Number For This Tenant
Voicemail Number For This Tenant
ONS Notification Number For 911 Calls and Lockouts
Phonebook Number for This Tenant
Message Key Routing For This Tenant
338
Default Database Values
Form 20 - ARS COR Group Definition
COR GROUP
COR GROUP MEMBERS (SEPARATE WITH SPACES)
01
1
COMMENTS
Form 21 - ARS Day Zone Definition
DAY ZONE
01
SUN.
*
MON.
*
TUE.
*
WED.
*
THU.
*
FRI.
*
SAT.
*
02
03
Form 27- ARS Maximum Number of Dialed Digits
COR
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIALED DIGITS
1
Unlimited
2
Unlimited
3
Unlimited
4
Unlimited
5
Unlimited
6
Unlimited
7
Unlimited
8
Unlimited
9
Unlimited
10
Unlimited
11
Unlimited
12
Unlimited
13
Unlimited
14
Unlimited
15
Unlimited
16
Unlimited
17
Unlimited
18
Unlimited
19
Unlimited
20
Unlimited
21
Unlimited
22
Unlimited
23
Unlimited
24
Unlimited
25
Unlimited
339
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Form 28- Form Access Restriction
FORM NAME
01 = SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
INST
R/W
MAINT1
MAINT2
R/W
none
none
SUPER
none
ATT
none
02 = FEATURE ACCESS CODES
R/W
R/W
none
none
03 = COS DEFINE
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
04 = SYS OPTIONS/SYS TIMERS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
05 = TENANT INTERCONNECTION
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
06 = TENANT NIGHT SWITCHING
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
07 = CONSOLE ASSIGNMENTS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
08 = ATTENDANT LDN ASGN
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
09 = DESKTOP DEVICE ASSIGNMENTS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
10 = PICKUP GROUPS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
11 = DATA CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
12 = DATA ASSIGNMENT
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
13 = TRUNK CIRCUIT DESC
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
14 = NON-DIAL-IN TRUNKS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
15 = DIAL-IN TRUNKS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
16 = TRUNK GROUPS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
17 = HUNT GROUPS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
18 = MISC SYSTEM PORTS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
19 = CALL REROUTING TABLE
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
20 = ARS: COR GRP DEFINITION
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
21 = ARS: DAY ZONE DEFINITION
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
22 = ARS: MODIFIED DGT TABLE
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
23 = ARS: ROUTE DEFINITION
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
24 = ARS: ROUTE LISTS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
25 = ARS: ROUTE PLANS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
26 = ARS: DIGIT STRINGS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
27 = ARS: MAXIMUM DIALED DIGITS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
28 = FORM ACCESS RESTRICTION
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
29 = DTE PROFILE
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
30 = DEVICE INTERCON TABLE
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
31 = SYSTEM ABBREV DIAL ENTRY
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
32 = CDE DATA PRINT
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
33 = ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
34 = DIRECTED IO
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
35 = GLOBAL FIND ACCESS CODE
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
36 = MODEM ASSIGNMENT
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
37 = GUEST RM SUPERSET KEYS TEM
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
(Page 1 of 2)
340
Default Database Values
FORM NAME
INST
MAINT1 MAINT2
SUPER
ATT
38 = ACD KEYS TEMPLATE
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
39 = ACD AGENT GROUPS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
40 = ACD SUPERVISORS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
41 = ACD PATHS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
42 = T1 LINK DESCRIPTORS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
43 = T1 LINK ASSIGNMENT
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
44 = NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
45 = BRI TRUNK ASSIGNMENTS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
46 = KEY SYSTEM TOLL CONTROL
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
47 = IP and DHCP PARAMETERS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
48 = VOICE NETWORKING
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
49 = VOICEMAIL OPTIONS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
50 = MAILBOXES
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
51 = VOICEMAIL DISTRIBUTION LIS
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
52 = EMAIL
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
53 = BAY LOCATION ASSIGNMENT
R/W
R/W
none
none
none
(Page 2 of 2)
Form 29 - DTE Profile Table
[ PROFILE NUMBER : 1 ]
DTE OPTION
VALUE
Terminal type
VIDEO TERM
Language
ENGLISH
DTRX Echoplex
DISABLED
Editing
DISABLED
Editing character delete (0 - 127, Decimal value of ASCII code)
0
Editing line display
0
(0 - 127, Decimal value of ASCII code)
Inject <LF> after <CR>
ALWAYS
Number of pads after <CR> (0 - 7)
0
Number of pads after <LF> (0 - 7)
0
DTRX Inactivity Timer
10
1 - 60 seconds
341
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Form 30 - Device Interconnection Table
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
01 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
02 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
03 *
*
.
.
.
.
.
.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
04 *
*
.
.
.
.
.
.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
05 *
*
.
.
.
.
.
.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
06 *
*
.
.
.
.
.
.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
07 *
*
.
.
.
.
.
.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
08 *
*
.
.
.
.
.
.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
09 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
10 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
11 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
12 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
13 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
14 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
15 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
16 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
17 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
18 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
19 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
20 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
21 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
22 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
23 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
24 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
25 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
342
*
Default Database Values
Form 30 - Device Interconnection Translation Table
ENTRY NUM
DEVICE TYPE DESCRIPTION
01
Station/Set
INTERCONNECT NUM
1
02
Console
2
03
Loop Start Trunk
3
04
Ground Start Trunk
4
05
DID/Tie Trunk
5
06
E&M Trunk ( 2-Wire or 4-Wire )
6
07
RESERVED
7
08
RESERVED
8
09
RESERVED
9
10
RESERVED
10
11
RESERVED
11
12
RESERVED
12
13
RESERVED
13
14
RESERVED
14
15
RESERVED
15
16
RESERVED
16
17
RESERVED
17
18
RESERVED
18
19
RESERVED
19
20
RESERVED
20
21
RESERVED
21
22
RESERVED
22
23
RESERVED
23
24
RESERVED
24
25
RESERVED
25
Form 34 - Directed IO Table
EXT NUM
PRINTOUT
PRINTOUT TYPE
GUARANTEED
Printer Port
SMDR
Autoprint
NO
Printer Port
CDE Data Print
Directed
NO
343
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Form 35 - Global Find Access Code Table
ACCESS
CODE
DEFINED
BAY
SLT
CCT
SCT
MULTIPLE APP.
0
Feature Access Code
100
SUPERSET
1
01
01
1
N/A
N/A
101
SUPERSET
1
01
02
1
N/A
102
SUPERSET
1
01
03
1
N/A
103
SUPERSET
1
01
04
1
N/A
104
SUPERSET
1
01
05
1
N/A
105
SUPERSET
1
01
06
1
N/A
106
SUPERSET
1
01
07
1
N/A
107
SUPERSET
1
01
08
1
N/A
108
SUPERSET
1
01
09
1
N/A
109
SUPERSET
1
01
10
1
N/A
110
SUPERSET
1
01
11
1
N/A
111
SUPERSET
1
01
12
1
N/A
112
SUPERSET
1
02
01
1
N/A
113
SUPERSET
1
02
02
1
N/A
114
SUPERSET
1
02
03
1
N/A
115
SUPERSET
1
02
04
1
N/A
116
SUPERSET
1
02
05
1
N/A
117
SUPERSET
1
02
06
1
N/A
118
SUPERSET
1
02
07
1
N/A
119
SUPERSET
1
02
08
1
N/A
198
Console
1
13
02
1
N/A
199
SUPERSET
1
13
01
1
N/A
200
Station
1
13
03
N/A
201
Station
1
13
04
N/A
300
Hunt Group # 1
301
SUPERSET
1
11
01
1
N/A
302
SUPERSET
1
11
02
1
N/A
303
SUPERSET
1
11
03
1
N/A
304
SUPERSET
1
11
04
1
N/A
305
SUPERSET
1
11
05
1
N/A
306
SUPERSET
1
11
06
1
N/A
307
SUPERSET
1
11
07
1
N/A
308
SUPERSET
1
11
08
1
N/A
309
SUPERSET
1
11
09
1
N/A
310
SUPERSET
1
11
10
1
N/A
N/A
(Page 1 of 3)
344
Default Database Values
ACCESS
CODE
DEFINED
BAY
SLT
CCT
SCT
MULTIPLE APP.
311
SUPERSET
1
11
11
1
N/A
312
SUPERSET
1
11
12
1
N/A
313
SUPERSET
1
12
01
1
N/A
314
SUPERSET
1
12
02
1
N/A
315
SUPERSET
1
12
03
1
N/A
316
SUPERSET
1
12
04
1
N/A
317
SUPERSET
1
12
05
1
N/A
318
SUPERSET
1
12
06
1
N/A
319
SUPERSET
1
12
07
1
N/A
320
SUPERSET
1
12
08
1
N/A
321
SUPERSET
1
12
09
1
N/A
322
SUPERSET
1
12
10
1
N/A
323
SUPERSET
1
12
11
1
N/A
324
SUPERSET
1
12
12
1
N/A
340
Night Bell
1
13
29
1
N/A
*01
Feature Access Code
N/A
*03
Feature Access Code
N/A
*04
Feature Access Code
N/A
*05
Feature Access Code
N/A
*06
Feature Access Code
N/A
*07
Feature Access Code
N/A
*08
Feature Access Code
N/A
*09
Feature Access Code
N/A
*10
Feature Access Code
N/A
*12
Feature Access Code
N/A
*13
Feature Access Code
N/A
*14
Feature Access Code
N/A
*15
Feature Access Code
N/A
*16
Feature Access Code
N/A
*21
Feature Access Code
N/A
*22
Feature Access Code
N/A
*23
Feature Access Code
N/A
*24
Feature Access Code
N/A
*25
Feature Access Code
N/A
*30
Feature Access Code
N/A
*33
Feature Access Code
N/A
*41
Feature Access Code
N/A
*42
Feature Access Code
N/A
(Page 2 of 3)
345
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
ACCESS
CODE
DEFINED
BAY
SLT
CCT
SCT
MULTIPLE APP.
*48
Feature Access Code
N/A
*49
Feature Access Code
N/A
*51
Feature Access Code
N/A
*52
Feature Access Code
N/A
*57
Feature Access Code
N/A
*62
Feature Access Code
N/A
*63
Feature Access Code
N/A
*64
Feature Access Code
N/A
*65
Feature Access Code
N/A
*66
Feature Access Code
N/A
***
Feature Access Code
N/A
###
Feature Access Code
N/A
000
ARS Leading Digit
N/A
(Page 3 of 3)
Form 36 - Modem Assignment Table
BAY SLT CCT CDN BAY SLT CCT EXTN TEN DTE COS COR MODE DIAL COMMENTS
1
13
05
1
13
06
Form 42 - T1 Link Descriptors
[LINK DESCRIPTOR NUMBER : 1]
IN / OUT GOING
VALUE
Alarm debounce timer
( 300 - 3200 ms )
2500
Line Coding
( AMI, AMI&ZCS, B8ZS)
AMI&ZCS
Line Build Out
( 0, -7.5, -15, -22.5 DB)
0 DB
Line Length
( max 132, 265, 398, 533 or 655)
266-398
Framing
( D4 or ESF )
D4
Slip rate - maintenance limit
( 0 - 9000 ) /24 hrs
255
Slip rate - service limit
( 0 - 9000 ) /24 hrs
7000
Slip rate - network sync limit
( 0 - 9000 ) /24 hrs
7
BER - maintenance limit
( 10**-n , n = ( 3,4,5,6 )) / hour
4
BER - service limit
( 10**-n , n = ( 3,4,5,6 )) / hour
3
Framing losses - maintenance limit
( 0 - 9000 ) /24 hrs
255
Framing losses - service limit
( 0 - 9000 ) /24 hrs
9000
RTS timer - service limit exceeded
( 1 - 255 min )
30
RTS timer - net slip limit exceeded
( 1 - 255 min )
30
RTS timer - after alarm
( 0 - 300 sec )
10
Termination mode
( LT or NT )
NT
(Page 1 of 2)
346
Default Database Values
[LINK DESCRIPTOR NUMBER : 1]
Protocol
IN / OUT GOING
VALUE
(DMS250, NI2, 4ESS, DMS100)
DMS100
Protocol Variant
(NI2-Bellcore, NI2-5Ess, and NI2-GTD5, None)
None
Network/User
(Network, User)
User
Unknown Numbering Plan
(Enabled, Disabled)
Disabled
Bearer Capability Voice
(Per-Call, 3.1 kHz, Speech)
Speech
CLIR Voice
(Per-Call, Restrict, Allow)
Allow
Invert D Channel
(Yes, No)
No
(Page 2 of 2)
Form 44 - Network Synchronization
DESCRIPTION
BAY
SLOT
CCT
COMMENTS
First clock source
Second clock source
Third clock source
Fourth clock source
Fifth clock source
Sixth clock source
Seventh clock source
Eighth clock source
Form 46 - Key System Toll Control
DIGITS TO BE
ANALYZED
QTY TO
FOLLOW
DESIGNA
T
TERM TYPE AND
NUM
COR
GROUP
011
Unknown
LOCAL
GROUP
1
1
1
Unknown
LOCAL
GROUP
1
1
976
4
LOCAL
GROUP
1
1
Form 47 Subform 01 - System IP
SYSTEM IP
VALUE
System IP Address
192.168.1.2
System Netmask
255.255.255.000
System Gateway IP
192.168.1.1
L2 Switch IP Address
192.168.1.1
Hostname
sx200icp.xyz.com
FTP Server
192.168.1.9
FTP Username
ftp
FTP Password
@
DiffServ Code Point
44 (upgrades)
46 (new installations)
347
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Form 47 Subform 02 - DHCP Server
SUBNET NAME [BAY 1-DHCP SERVER ENABLED]
192_168_1_subnet
SUBNET IP
192.168.001.000
BIT MASK
255.255.255.000
Form 47 Subform 02 - Expand DHCP Subnet
NAME [BAY 1]
192_168_1_range
IP RANGE [192_168_1_subnet]
LEASE TIME
192.168.001.010 - 192.168.001.250
08 HOURS
Form 47 Subform 02 - DHCP Options
OPTIONS [COMMON]
FORMAT
VALUE [BAY 1]
3-Router
IP ADDRESS
192.168.1.1
128-IP Phone TFTP Server
IP ADDRESS
192.168.1.2
129-ICP Ip Address
IP ADDRESS
192.168.1.2
130-DHCP Server Identifier
ASCII
MITEL IP PHONE
134-DiffServ Code Point
NUMERIC
44
Form 47 Subform 02 - DHCP Ranges
RANGE IP [192_168_1_subnet]
VALUE
Name
192_168_1_range
Range Start
192.168.001.010
Range End
192.168.001.250
Protocol
DHCP
Clients class ID must match name
NO
Lease Time (minimum 5 minutes)
08 HOURS
[BAY 1]
Form 49 - Voice Mail Options
VOICEMAIL OPTION
VALUE
Default Language
ENGLISH
Alternate Language
ENGLISH
Bilingual Option
DISABLED
Language Change Number
8
FAX Destination Number
Send Notification Calls
DISABLED
Digital Pager Callback Number
Auto Att Xfer to any Extn
ENABLED
Auto Att Xfer Restrictions
Directory Voice Prompt
LAST NAME
Automatic Route Select Code
RESERVED
Generate Account Codes in SMDR
DISABLED
Personal Contact Numbers
DISABLED
(Page 1 of 2)
348
Default Database Values
VOICEMAIL OPTION
DID Server
VALUE
RESERVED
Automatic DID Number Assignment
RESERVED
Synchronization of Greetings
SYSTEM DAY/NIGHT
Open Time (HH:MM)(Sun..Sat)
00:00 09:00 09:00 09:00 09:00 09:00 00:00
Close Time (HH:MM)(Sun..Sat)
00:00 18:00 18:00 18:00 18:00 18:00 00:00
Length of Mailbox Numbers (2-5)
3
Length of Passwords (3-6)
4
PMS Protocol
HYATT ENCORE
SMTP Server Address
SMTP Server Username
SMTP Server Password
IMAP Server
(Page 2 of 2)
Form 50 - Mailboxes
MBOX# TYPE EXTENSION OPERATOR LANG
0
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
999
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
EXTEN
ADMIN
0
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
SYST
ENV
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
MAX
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
DEL
NEW OLD
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
349
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Form 50 Subform - Notification
MBOX#
NOTIFICATION #
0
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
999
NOTIF
TYP
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
N SCHED
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
U ACC
RESERVED
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Form 50 Subform - EMAIL
MBOX#
FWD
0
NO
100
NO
101
NO
102
NO
103
NO
104
NO
105
NO
106
NO
107
NO
108
NO
109
NO
110
NO
111
NO
112
NO
EMAIL ADDRESS FOR SMTP FORWARD OF VOICEMAIL
(Page 1 of 2)
350
Default Database Values
MBOX#
FWD
113
NO
114
NO
115
NO
116
NO
117
NO
118
NO
119
NO
EMAIL ADDRESS FOR SMTP FORWARD OF VOICEMAIL
(Page 2 of 2)
Form 52 - EMAIL
OWNER
EMAIL ADDRESS
[SMTP SERVER: 000.000.000.000]
E911
E911
E911
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Logs
Form 53 - Bay Location Assignment
BAY
01
02
03
IP BAY
CIM 1
CIM 2
MMC 1 (xxx)
MMC 2 (xxx)
PHANTOM
*
*
*
04
1
05
2
06
1
07
2
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
351
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Form 54 Calling Party Number
EXT NUMBER
DEFINED
100
SUPERSET
101
SUPERSET
102
SUPERSET
103
SUPERSET
104
SUPERSET
105
SUPERSET
106
SUPERSET
107
SUPERSET
108
SUPERSET
109
SUPERSET
110
SUPERSET
111
SUPERSET
112
SUPERSET
113
SUPERSET
114
SUPERSET
115
SUPERSET
200
Station
201
Station
202
Station
203
Station
301
SUPERSET
302
SUPERSET
303
SUPERSET
304
SUPERSET
305
SUPERSET
306
SUPERSET
307
SUPERSET
308
SUPERSET
309
SUPERSET
310
SUPERSET
311
SUPERSET
312
SUPERSET
313
SUPERSET
314
SUPERSET
315
SUPERSET
316
SUPERSET
317
SUPERSET
CALLING PARTY NUMBER
(Page 1 of 2)
352
Default Database Values
EXT NUMBER
DEFINED
318
SUPERSET
319
SUPERSET
320
SUPERSET
321
SUPERSET
322
SUPERSET
323
SUPERSET
324
SUPERSET
CALLING PARTY NUMBER
(Page 2 of 2)
Form 55 Incoming Digits
INCOMING DIGITS
DID
PREFIX
DAY
N1
N2
TENANT
353
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
354
Appendix B
Part Numbers
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
356
Part Numbers
Table 62: Hardware (Options, Spares and FRUs)
Part Number
Description
Notes
50004357
SX-200 ICP MX Controller
With internal
hard drive
50003724
Analog Main Card
50003725
Analog Option Card
50003726
Stratum 3 Clock Module
50003727
CompactFlash Memory Interface MMC
50003728
Dual DSP MMC
50004154
CompactFlash - 256MB
57008923
CompactFlash - 512MB
50003884
Fan
50003885
Power Supply
50003900
SX-200 NSU
50001267
SX-200 ASU
50005105
SX-200 ASU II
50005103
ONS Option Card - ASU II
16 ONS ports
50005104
ONS/LS Option Combo Card - ASU II
12 ONS + 4
LS ports
50004151
Hard Drive
Unformatted
50001248
Dual FIM MMC - 1 km (820 nm, multi-mode)
50003695
Dual FIM MMC - 5 km (1300 nm, multi-mode)
50003696
Dual FIM MMC - 14 km (1300 nm, single-mode)
50004451
Quad CIM MMC
50003560
Dual T1/E1 Framer MMC
50004402
T1/E1 Combo MMC
50002979
Quad DSP MMC
50004150
SX-200 ICP Rack Mount Brackets
MX Only
(Page 1 of 2)
357
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 62: Hardware (Options, Spares and FRUs) (continued)
Part Number
Description
50000690
24VAC Power Adapter for 5010 IP, 5020 IP,
5215 IP and 5220 IP Phones
50002070
-48V Power Brick for 5200 series IP Phones
PD-6024/AC
PowerDsine 24PT In-line Power Unit for 5200
series IP Phones
Notes
(Page 2 of 2)
Table 63: Software
Part Number
50005463
Description
Notes
Rel. 4.0 CD-ROM
Table 64: Software Options
Part Number
Description
Notes
9109-531-015-NA ACD Agents (11-15)
9109-531-005-NA ACD Agents (1-5)
9109-531-025-NA ACD Agents (16-25)
9109-531-050-NA ACD Agents (26-50)
9109-531-075-NA ACD Agents (51-75)
9109-531-010-NA ACD Agents (6-10)
9109-531-100-NA ACD Agents (76-100)
9109-532-013-NA ACD Real Time Events
9109-532-001-NA Auto-Attendant
54000925
Compression Resources (2)
54000890
Compression Resources (8)
54002761
DID Server Application
54000924
Digital Bay (1)
54000131
Guest Suites
54000661
IP Network Channel
(Page 1 of 3)
358
Part Numbers
Table 64: Software Options (continued)
Part Number
Description
54000660
IP Set (1)
54000923
IP Set (4)
54000929
PC (2nd) Port on IP Sets
54000928
Phonebook
54000927
Recorded Announcement Device
54000050
Speak@Ease
54001353
Standard Unified Messaging
54000921
Voice Mail Box (1)
54000922
Voice Mail Boxes (4)
54000930
Voice Mail PMS
Notes
9109-532-006-NA Centralized Voice Mail & Attendant S/W
9109-532-022-NA CLASS Sets
54000931
Email (SMTP) Client
9109-532-010-NA Fax Tone Detect
540001230
Feature Level 6
54001134
Hospitality
54001152
IP Network Channel (12)
54001151
IP Network Channel (2)
9109-533-002-NA Max Digital Line Cards
9109-533-101-NA Max ONS Line Cards
9109-532-002-NA MiTAI
9109-532-016-NA PRI Card Auto Min/Max
9109-532-018-NA PRI Card D Channel Backup
9109-532-015-NA PRI Card Min/Max
9109-532-017-NA PRI Card NFAS
9109-532-020-NA PRI Card Q.SIG
9109-532-019-NA PRI Card Remote LAN Access
9109-532-021-NA Record a Call
(Page 2 of 3)
359
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 64: Software Options (continued)
Part Number
Description
Notes
9109-532-005-NA Remote S/W Download
9109-532-007-NA SS4000 Sets
9109-532-012-NA Support 3DN, 4DN and 400 series Set Types
9109-532-011-NA Support Softkey Access to Voicemail
54000950
Voice Mail Bilingual Prompts
54000951
Voice Mail Personal Contacts
54001761
Your Assistant Starter Kit
Software and
single user
license
54002200
Your Assistant Upgrade Kit
Single user
54002202
Your Assistant Lite
Single user
54002201
Your Assistant Softphone
Single user
(Page 3 of 3)
360
Part Numbers
Table 65: SX-200 Peripheral Cabinets, Interface Cards,
and Modules
Common Name
Part Number
Comments
ONS/CLASS Line Card
9109-110-001-NA
For Rotary and DTMF
Telephones (12 circuits per
card)
ONS/CLASS Line Card
(Blue Faceplate)
9109-110-002-NA
For Rotary and DTMF
Telephones (12 circuits per
card)
OPS Line Card
9109-040-000-SA
6 OPS Circuits per card
Digital Line Card
(Blue Faceplate)
9109-012-002-NA
12 DNIC Circuits per card
Digital Line Card
9109-012-001-NA
12 DNIC Circuits per card
LS/CLASS Trunk Card
50001730
8 CO Trunk Interfaces (Loop
Start only)
LS/GS Trunk Card - CSA 9109-011-001-SA
6 CO Trunk Interfaces
ONS Option Card - ASU
II
50005103
16 ONS ports
ONS/LS Option Card ASU II
50005104
12 ONS ports + 4 LS ports
DID Trunk
9109-031-000-SA
6 DID Circuits per card
Universal Card
9109-005-000-SA
supports:
• E&M Trunk Module
• Music-on-Hold/Pager
Module
• Receiver/Relay Module
E&M Trunk Module
9109-013-000-SA
1 E&M Trunk Circuit per
Module
Music-on-Hold/Pager
Module
9109-018-000-SA
Music Input, Paging Preamp
Output, and Relay to control
external amplifier
Receiver/Relay Module
9109-016-000-SA
4 DTMF Receivers and 2
General Purpose Relays
(Page 1 of 2)
361
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 65: SX-200 Peripheral Cabinets, Interface Cards,
and Modules (continued)
Common Name
Part Number
Mitel Express Messenger 9109-080-001-NA
Card (2-port)
Comments
All models use the same card
and the number of ports
enabled is determined by the
software. For example, you can
upgrade a 2-port card to a
4-port card by enabling the
software with a passcode.
Refer to the Mitel Express
Messenger System
Administration Manual (PN
9109-080-005-NA) for
instructions.
Mitel Express Messenger 9109-080-002-NA
Card (4-port)
Mitel Express Messenger 9109-080-009-NA
Card (6-port)
Mitel Express Messenger 9109-080-008-NA
Card (8-port)
SX-200 Per Bay Cabinet
- Drk Gry
50004041
SX-200 Per Node BCCII
- Drk Gry,110V
52001550
SX-200 Per Node BCCIII 52001551
- Drk Gry,110V
SX-200 Per Node BCCIII 52001552
- Drk Gry, 220V
SX-200 Drk Gry Rack
Mount Bracket FRU
50002891
(Page 2 of 2)
362
Part Numbers
Table 66: Digital Control and Digital Services Cards Modules, and
Spares for SX-200 Peripheral Cabinets
Marketing Name
Part Number
Comments
Bay Control Card II
9109-017-001-SA
Bay Control Card III
9109-117-001-NA
DSP Module (single)
9180-510-006-NA
Bay Power Supply
120 V ac
9109-008-000-SA
Bay Power Supply
230 V ac
9109-008-002-NA
System ID Module
50002212
Peripheral FIM Carrier II
9109-612-001-NA
Peripheral Interface
Module Carrier Card
9109-616-001-NA
FIM Module 820NM
Multi-mode
9180-510-001-NA
FIM Module 1300NM
Multi-mode
9180-510-002-NA
FIM Module 1300NM
Single-mode
9180-510-003-NA
CIM
9180-510-010-NA
Copper Interface Module
CIM Cable
9125-100-106-NA
Peripheral Interconnect Cable
(15 ft.)
T1 Trunk Card
9109-021-001-NA
T1 Trunk Card
9109-021-000-SA
T1 Trunk Adapter
9400-100-302-NA
Dual T1 Trunk Adapter
9400-100-304-NA
for 2 links
T1/E1 Module
9180-510-004-NA
Dual link, for PRI card or the
BCC III
Installs in any SX-200
rack-mount cabinet
Includes T1 Trunk Adapter
(Page 1 of 2)
363
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 66: Digital Control and Digital Services Cards Modules, and
Spares for SX-200 Peripheral Cabinets (continued)
Marketing Name
PRI Card Package
Part Number
50002285
Comments
Includes:
• PRI card
• Dual link T1 PRI Module
• software
PRI Card
9109-615-001-NA
PRI Card Software
9125-070-001-NA
Fan Assembly - SX-200
RM Cabinet
9109-631-001-NA
The carrier card for the PRI
(Page 2 of 2)
Table 67: Peripherals
Part Number
Description
Notes
50002815
5201 IP Phone
Dark Gray FRU
50003812
5207 IP Phone
Dark Gray
50004890
5212 IP Phon
Dual Port Dark Gray
50002817
5215 IP Phone
Dual Port Dark Gray
50002818
5220 IP Phone
Dual Port Dark Gray
50002819
5220 IP Phone
Dual Port Red
50004894
5224 IP Phone
Dual Port Dark Gray
50004895
5224 IP Phone
Dual Port Red
50005070
5330 IP Phone
Dual Port Dark Gray
50005071
5340 IP Phone
Dual Port Dark Gray
50002821
5412 PKM
PKM Kit (12 Key) Dark
Gray (with SIM module)
50002822
5412 PKM
PKM FRU (12 Key) Dark
Gray
(Page 1 of 4)
364
Part Numbers
Table 67: Peripherals (continued)
Part Number
Description
Notes
50002823
5448 PKM
PKM Kit (48 Key) Dark
Gray (with SIM module)
50002824
5448 PKM
PKM FRU (48 Key) Dark
Gray
50002825
5422 PKM Interface
Module
50001900
Mitel 5303 Conference
Phone
Black
50001903
Mitel 5303 Conference
Phone
Silver
Mitel 5310/5310R
Remote Control Mouse
for IP Conf Unit
50001542
Wired remote control unit.
Silver. Purchased
separately
Mitel 5310/5310R
Remote Control Mouse
for IP Conf Unit
50001543
Wired remote control unit.
Dk Grey. Purchased
separately
Mitel 5310 IP
Conference Saucer
-Dark Grey
-requires separate Side
Control (below)
50004459
For use with:
5310 IP Conference Side
Control (5220/5224)
(50004461) or
5310 IP Conference Unit
Module for 5330/5340
(50005321).
Mitel 5310 IP
Conference Saucer
-Silver
-requires separate Side
Control (below)
50004460
For use with:
5310 IP Conference Side
Control (5220/5224)
(50004461) or
5310 IP Conference Unit
Module for 5330/5340
(50005321).
(Page 2 of 4)
365
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 67: Peripherals (continued)
Part Number
Mitel 5310 IP
Conference Unit Side
Control for 5220/5224
Description
Notes
50004461
For use on 5220 IP Phone.
Used to connect 5310 IP
Conference Saucer to
5220 IP Phone.
Supports 5310 IP
Conference Saucer, Silver
(50004460) &
5310 IP Conference
Saucer, Dark Grey
(50004459).
24VDC Power Adapter
required to power 5310 IP
Conference
Side Control for 5220 IP
Phone.
24V Power Adapters
(50000685, 50000687 or
50000690)
sold separately.
Mitel 5310 IP Conference 50005321
Module (5300 Series)
For use on 5330, and
5340 IP Phones.
Used to connect 5310 IP
Conference Saucer to IP
Phone.
Supports 5310 IP
Conference Saucer, Silver
(50004460) & 5310 IP
Conference Saucer, Dark
Grey (50004459).
Separate Power Adapter
not required to power 5310
Conference Module for
5330 and 5340.
Supports Power Over
Ethernet from the 5330
and 5340 IP Phones.
51009841
Mitel Gigabit Ethernet
(GigE) Phone Stand
Ethernet phone stand for
5200 series Dual Mode
phones.
51009840
Mitel Wireless LAN
(WLAN) Phone Stand
Wireless phone stand with
WiFi technology built in.
(Page 3 of 4)
366
Part Numbers
Table 67: Peripherals (continued)
Part Number
Description
Notes
9189-000-300-NA
SUPERCONSOLE 1000 Light Gray
attendant console
9189-000-301-NA
SUPERCONSOLE 1000 Dark gray with a tilted,
attendant console
back-lit LCD display,
English and French text
available
9189-888-001-NA
Console Handset
Amplifier
50001754
5485 IP Paging Unit
Plantronics Headsets
See the Plantronics web
site for available
headsets
Provides volume control
for the SUPERCONSOLE
1000 handset.
(Page 4 of 4)
Note: Mitel 5207 IP Phones DO NOT support the direct connection of a
headset. Use of a headset with this phone requires a Plantronics M12 Vista
Universal Amplifier. The amplifier plugs into the handset port on the underside
of the phone. Plantronics models P51, P81, P101N and Supra NC headsets
are the ONLY headsets approved by Mitel for use with the 5207 IP Phone
through the Plantronics M12 Vista.
Table 68: Documentation
Part Number
52009229
Description
SX-200 ICP MX Technician's Handbook Release 4.0
367
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
368
Appendix C
System Cabling
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
370
System Cabling
Table 69: SX-200 ICP, Onboard Analog/DNIC
Tip & Ring Assignments (Back Panel Amphenol Connector)
Pins
Pairs
Circuit type
Bay/Slot/
Circuit
Comments
1/26
W-BL / BL-W
ONS/CLASS
1/13/3
Default Extension #: 200
2/27
W-O / O-W
ONS/CLASS
1/13/4
Default Extension #: 201
3/28
W-G / G-W
ONS/CLASS
1/13/5
Available as upgrade option
4/29
W-BR / BR-W
ONS/CLASS
1/13/6
Available as upgrade option
5/30
NOT USED
6/31
R-BL / BL-R
DNIC
1/13/1
Subattendant
Default Extension #: 199
7/32
R-O / O-R
DNIC
1/13/2
SUPERCONSOLE 1000
Default Extension #: 198
8/33 - 10/35
NOT USED
11/36 - 16/41 BK-BL / BL-BK LS/CLASS
1/13/7 1/13/12
Trunks circuits 1/13/7 and
1/13/8 are System Fail
Transfer trunks. They
connect to ONS circuits
1/13/3 and 4 respectively.
17/42 - 22/47 Y-O / O-Y
1/13/13 1/13/18
Available as upgrade option
LS/CLASS
48/23 - 50/25
NOT USED
Table 70: Maintenance RS-232 Cable
D-Sub Connector Pin
Signals
DIN Connector Pin
2
RXD
5
3
TXD
3
4
DTR
7
5
GND
4*
6
DSR
6
7
RTS
1
8
CTS
2
8*
Notes:
1. The pins with * are connected together.
2. Pin 1 and 9 of the D-Sub connector are not used.
371
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 71: Relay Connector Pinouts (Front Panel DB-9)
Pin
Bay/Slot/Circuit
1
1/13/29/1
(See Note)
2
3
Function
Generic Relay Contact (normally open)
Generic Relay Contact Return
Not Used
4
1/13/29/2
5
6
Generic Relay Contact (normally open)
Generic Relay Contact Return
Not Used
7
1/13/30/1
8
9
Generic Relay Contact (normally open); see Note
Generic Relay Contact Return
Not Used
Note: Programmed for Auxiliary Ringer (Night Bell) use in the default
database.
Table 72: Paging Pinouts (Rear Panel RJ45)
Pin
372
Function
1
Paging Relay Common
2
Paging Relay Contact A (normally closed)
3
Paging Relay Contact B (normally open)
4
Paging Wire1 (pager audio)
5
Paging Wire2 (pager audio)
6
Factory test control (not for customer use)
7
Unused
8
Unused
System Cabling
Table 73: CIM Port Pinouts
Pin
Signals
Pin
1
RX +
5
2
RX -
6
3
TX +
7
4
Signal
TX -
8
Note: The CIM ports are the same whether the card has a control end
connection or a peripheral end connection. Connections from the control
cabinet to the peripheral cabinet require Category 5 UTP (unshielded twisted
pair) cable, with TX and RX pairs reversed.
Table 74: T1/E1 Framer - Tip and Ring Pinouts
NT/LT Settings
Pin
Signal
NT (Default)
LT
1
Rx Ring
Tx Ring
2
Rx Tip
Tx Tip
4
Tx Ring
Rx Ring
5
Tx Tip
Rx Tip
3
N/C
6
N/C
7
N/C
8
N/C
Table 75: Ethernet Port Pinouts
Pin
Signal
Pin
1
TX +
5
2
TX -
6
3
RX +
7
4
Signal
RX -
8
373
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 76: NSU PRI - Pinouts for T1Line/Network Termination
374
Pin
Line
Termination Mode
Network
Termination Mode
1
Tx Ring
Rx Ring
2
Tx Tip
Rx Tip
3
Unused
Unused
4
Rx Ring
Tx Ring
5
Rx Tip
Tx Tip
6
Unused
Unused
7
Unused
Unused
8
Unused
Unused
System Cabling
Table 77: ASU Tip/Ring Assignments
Pin
Pair
Signal
1/26
W-BL / BL-W
ONS Tip 1 / Ring 1
2/27
W-O / O-W
ONS Tip 2/ Ring 2
3/28
W-G / G-W
ONS Tip 3 / Ring 3
4/29
W-BR / BR-W
ONS Tip 4 / Ring 4
5/30
S-W / W-S
ONS Tip 5 / Ring 5
6/31
R-BL / BL-R
ONS Tip 6 / Ring 6
7/32
R-O / O-R
ONS Tip 7 / Ring 7
8/33
G-R / R-G
ONS Tip 8 / Ring 8
9/34
BR-R / R-BR
ONS Tip 9 / Ring 9
10/35
S-R / R-S
ONS Tip 10 / Ring 10
11/36
BK-BL / BL-BK
ONS Tip 11 / Ring 11
12/37
O-BK / BK-O
ONS Tip 12 / Ring 12
13/38
G-BK / BK-G
ONS Tip 13 / Ring 13
14/39
BR-BK / BK-BR
ONS Tip 14 / Ring 14
15/40
S-BK / BK-S
ONS Tip 15 / Ring 15
16/41
BL-Y / Y-BL
ONS Tip 16 / Ring 16
17/42
O-Y / Y-O
ONS Tip 17 / LS Ring 17
18/43
G-Y / Y-G
ONS Tip 18 / LS Ring 18
19/44
BR-Y / Y-BR
ONS Tip 19 / LS Ring 19
20/45
S-Y / Y-S
ONS Tip 20 / LS Ring 20
21/46
BL-V / V-BL
ONS Tip 21 / LS Ring 21
22/47
O-V / V-O
ONS Tip 22 / LS Ring 22
23/48
G-V / V-G
ONS Tip 23 / LS Ring 23
24/49
BR-V / V-BR
ONS Tip 24 / LS Ring 24
25/50
V-S
N/C
375
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 78: ASU II Connector Pinout
376
Pin
Color Code
16 Port ONS
4 + 12 Port Combo
26/1
W/BL, BL/W
ONS Tip Ring 1
ONS Tip Ring 1
27/2
W/O, O/W
ONS Tip Ring
ONS Tip Ring
28/3
W/G, G/W
ONS Tip Ring
ONS Tip Ring
29/4
W/BR, BR/W
ONS Tip Ring
ONS Tip Ring
30/5
W/S, S/W
ONS Tip Ring
ONS Tip Ring
31/6
R/BL, BL/R
ONS Tip Ring
ONS Tip Ring
32/7
R/O, O/R
ONS Tip Ring
ONS Tip Ring
33/8
R/G, G/R
ONS Tip Ring
ONS Tip Ring
34/9
R/BR, BR/R
ONS Tip Ring
ONS Tip Ring
35/10
R/S, S/R
ONS Tip Ring
ONS Tip Ring
36/11
BK/BL, BL/BK
ONS Tip Ring
ONS Tip Ring
37/12
BK/O, O/BK
ONS Tip Ring
ONS Tip Ring
38/13
BK/G, G/BK
ONS Tip Ring
NC
39/14
BK/BR, BR/BK
ONS Tip Ring
NC
40/15
BK/S, S/BK
ONS Tip Ring
NC
41/16
Y/BL, BL/Y
ONS Tip Ring
NC
42/17
Y/O, O/Y
NC
NC
43/18
Y/G, G/Y
NC
NC
44/19
Y/BR, BR/Y
NC
NC
45/20
Y/S, S/Y
NC
NC
46/21
V/BL, BL/V
NC
LS Ring/Tip 1
47/22
V/O, O/V
NC
LS Ring/Tip 2
48/23
V/G, G/V
NC
LS Ring/Tip 3
49/24
V/BR, BR/V
NC
LS Ring/Tip 4
50/25
V/S, S/V
NC
NC
System Cabling
Table 79: SX-200 EL or SX-200 ML (RM)
Tip and Ring Assignments
J1, J2, J3, and J4
Slot /
Plug
Pin
Lead Designation
Pair
Cct
26
W-BL
1
1
BL-W
27
W-O
2-J1
2
O-W
or
28
W-G
4-J2
3
G-W
or
29
W-BR
6-J3
4
BR-W
or
30
W-S
8-J4
5
S-W
31
R-BL
6
BL-R
32
R-O
7
O-R
33
R-G
8
G-R
34
R-BR
9
BR-R
35
R-S
10
S-R
36
BK-BL
11
BL-BK
37
BK-O
12
O-BK
38
BK-G
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
ONS
or
DLC
Cct
T1
1
LS/GS
Cct
T1
1
R1
R1
T2
MM1
R2
M1
T3
2
T2
R3
R2
T4
MM2
R4
M2
T5
3
R3
T6
MM3
R6
M3
4
T4
R7
R4
T8
MM4
R8
M4
T9
5
T5
R9
R5
T10
MM5
R10
M5
T11
6
Cct
T1
1
R1
2
T2
3
T3
T4
R6
T12
MM6
R12
M6
Cct
T1
1
OPS or
DID
T1
R1
T2
R2
3
T3
2
R3
4
R4
T2
R2
T4
R4
5
T5
3
R5
6
T3
R3
T6
R6
5
T5
4
R5
6
T4
R4
T6
R6
7
T7
5
R7
8
T5
R5
T8
R8
T6
R11
2
R3
4
COV
R1
R2
T3
R5
T7
LS/
CLASS
6
T6
R6
SPARE
(Page 1 of 2)
377
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 79: SX-200 EL or SX-200 ML (RM)
Tip and Ring Assignments (continued)
J1, J2, J3, and J4
Slot /
Plug
Pin
Pair
13
G-BK
39
BK-BR
14
BR-BK
40
BK-S
1-J1
15
S-BK
or
41
Y-BL
3-J2
16
BL-Y
or
42
Y-O
5-J3
17
O-Y
or
43
Y-G
7-J4
18
G-Y
44
Y-BR
19
BR-Y
45
Y-S
20
S-Y
46
V-BL
21
BL-V
47
V-O
22
O-V
48
V-G
23
G-V
49
V-BR
24
BR-V
50
V-S
25
S-V
Lead Designation
Cct
ONS
or
DLC
Cct
LS/GS
Cct
1
T1
1
T1
1
LS/
CLASS
Cct
COV
Cct
T1
1
OPS or
DID
SPARE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
R1
R1
T2
MM1
R2
M1
T3
2
T2
R3
R2
T4
MM2
R4
M2
T5
3
R3
T6
MM3
R6
M3
4
T4
R7
R4
T8
MM4
R8
M4
T9
5
T5
R9
R5
T10
MM5
R10
M5
T11
6
2
T6
R11
R6
T12
MM6
R12
M6
1
T2
R1
2
R2
3
T3
4
T4
T1
R1
T2
R2
3
R3
T3
2
R3
4
R4
T3
R5
T7
T1
R1
T2
R2
T4
R4
5
T5
3
R5
6
T3
R3
T6
R6
5
T5
4
R5
6
T4
R4
T6
R6
7
T7
5
R7
8
T5
R5
T8
R8
6
T6
R6
(Page 2 of 2)
378
System Cabling
Table 80: SX-200 EL or SX-200 ML (RM) Universal Card
Tip and Ring Assignments
J1, J2, J3, and J4
Slot /
Plug
Lead Designation
Pair
Cct
MOH/
Pager
Cct
26
W-BL
1
MIA1
1
1
BL-W
MIB1
Pin
DTMF
Relay
Cct
1
E&M
Trunk
T1
R1
27
W-O
POA1
K5A1
TR1
2-J1
2
O-W
POB1
K5B1
RR1
or
28
W-G
PKA1
K6A1
E1
4-J2
3
G-W
PKB1
K6B1
M1
or
29
W-BR
6-J3
4
BR-W
2
MIB2
or
30
W-S
POA2
K5A2
TR2
8-J4
5
S-W
POB2
K5B2
RR2
31
R-BL
PKA2
K6A2
E2
6
BL-R
PKB2
K6B2
M2
32
R-O
7
O-R
MIB3
33
R-G
POA3
K5A3
TR3
8
G-R
POB3
K5B3
RR3
34
R-BR
PKA3
K6A3
E3
9
BR-R
PKB3
K6B3
M3
35
R-S
10
S-R
MIB4
36
BK-BL
POA4
K5A4
TR4
11
BL-BK
POB4
K5B4
RR4
37
BK-O
PKA4
K6A4
E4
12
O-BK
PKB4
K6B4
M4
38
BK-G
3
4
MIA2
MIA3
MIA4
2
2
T2
R2
3
3
T3
R3
4
4
T4
R4
SPARE
(Page 1 of 2)
379
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Table 80: SX-200 EL or SX-200 ML (RM) Universal Card
Tip and Ring Assignments (continued)
J1, J2, J3, and J4
Slot /
Plug
Pin
Pair
Lead Designation
Cct
MOH/
Pager
Cct
1
MIA1
1
13
G-BK
39
BK-BR
14
BR-BK
MIB1
DTMF
Relay
Cct
E&M
Trunk
SPARE
1
T1
R1
40
BK-S
POA1
K5A1
TR1
1-J1
15
S-BK
POB1
K5B1
RR1
or
41
Y-BL
PKA1
K6A1
E1
3-J2
16
BL-Y
PKB1
K6B1
M1
or
42
Y-O
5-J3
17
O-Y
2
MIB2
or
43
Y-G
POA2
K5A2
TR2
7-J4
18
G-Y
POB2
K5B2
RR2
44
Y-BR
PKA2
K6A2
E2
19
BR-Y
PKB2
K6B2
M2
3
MIA2
2
T2
R2
45
Y-S
20
S-Y
MIB3
46
V-BL
POA3
K5A3
TR3
21
BL-V
POB3
K5B3
RR3
47
V-O
PKA3
K6A3
E3
22
O-V
PKB3
K6B3
M3
4
MIA3
2
MIA4
3
3
T3
R3
48
V-G
23
G-V
MIB4
4
4
T4
49
V-BR
POA4
K5A4
TR4
24
BR-V
POB4
K5B4
RR4
50
V-S
PKA4
K6A4
E4
25
S-V
PKB4
K6B4
M4
R4
(Page 2 of 2)
380
System Cabling
Table 81: Music-on-Hold/Pager Unit Pinouts (Peripheral Cabinets)
Wire
Signal
Color
Description
32
MOH-
R-O
Music-on-Hold Inputs
7
MOH+
O-R
34
PAGE-
R-BR
9
PAGE+
BR-R
36
PAGEREL(NC)
BK-BL
Page Relay, Normally Closed contact
11
PAGEREL(C)
BL-BK
Page Relay Common
37
PAGEREL(NO)
BK-O
Page Relay, Normally Open contact
12
PAGEREL(C)
O-BK
Page Relay Common
39
NIGHTBELL1-
BK-BR
Night Bell 1 relay contacts
14
NIGHTBELL1+
BR-BK
41
NIGHTBELL2-
Y-BL
16
NIGHTBELL2+
BL-Y
45
ALARM-
Y-S
20
ALARM+
S-Y
50
RING
V-S
Connection to DNIC Line
25
TIP
S-V
Connection to DNIC Line
Paging Input/Output
Night Bell 2 relay contacts
Alarm relay contacts
381
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
382
Appendix D
Handling Fiber
Optic Cables
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
384
Handling Fiber Optic Cables
Guidelines for Handling Fiber Optic Cable
•
Never touch the tip of a fiber connector. Cleanliness of the connector
ferrule (tip) is important for error-free transmission.
•
Always place the dust caps onto the connectors immediately after
disconnecting.
•
You can clean the ferrule tips on the connectors with ethyl alcohol.
•
Fiber optic cables are often more easily installed and pulled than
copper because of their light weight and flexibility. However, take care
not to exceed the minimum bend radius or maximum tensile strength.
•
Procedures for the repairing, splicing, or assembling of fiber optic
cables are available from fiber component manufacturers (many offer
training courses).
WARNING:FIBER OPTIC SOURCES EMIT INFRARED LIGHT
THAT IS INVISIBLE TO THE HUMAN EYE. NEVER LOOK
DIRECTLY INTO A SOURCE OR INTO THE END OF A FIBER
ENERGIZED BY A SOURCE BECAUSE IT CAN DAMAGE THE
RETINA. WHEN WORKING WITH RAW FIBER OPTIC CABLE,
BE CAREFUL OF THE FIBER ENDS OR SLIVERS THAT CAN
PUNCTURE THE SKIN OR CAUSE IRRITATION.
Specifications
At each end of a fiber optic cable is a Fiber Interface Module (FIM). At the
transmitting end, the FIM converts electrical signals into pulses of light to
be transmitted over the cable. At the receiving end, the FIM converts the
pulses of light back into electrical signals usable by the node.
The FIM connects the controller to a peripheral cabinet, or NSU. Each FIM
variant may be identified by its optical wavelength and fiber type (indicated
on the FIM faceplate). The same FIM variant must be used at each end of
a fiber optic cable. However, a node may be equipped with different FIM
variants to suit the length of each cable run.
See the SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation for Fiber Interface Module
specifications.
385
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Operation
The FIM has three functional sections: a transmitter, a receiver, and a
control section.
The transmitter section accepts data from the node in which it is installed.
The data is converted to byte-interleaved format, and a checksum is
calculated. The checksum byte is combined with the data and the frame
synchronization information. The frame is encoded as serial data and
transmitted on the fiber.
The receiver section converts the incoming data to parallel format, extracts
the frame synchronization information, and decodes the data. Control and
status information is extracted and further decoded. The checksum is
verified and an error counter updated. The status information and data are
combined, frame-aligned, and re-formatted for output.
The control section generates control signals and the transmit clocks. This
section also regenerates the telephony clocks for the peripheral nodes,
and provides status information for the Main Controller.
Two LEDs indicate the detection of local and remote clocks.
386
Appendix E
Folio Views (E-Docs) Tips
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
388
Folio Views (E-Docs) Tips
About Folio Views
The documentation CD-ROM contains all of the technical information in an
electronic file called an “infobase”. Folio Views, the infobase viewer, has
powerful search capabilities that let you find information quickly and easily.
Once you've found the information that you need, you can read it online,
print sections, or export segments to word processing files.
How do I print a procedure from the infobase?
1. In the Table of Contents, select the check box of the section that you
want to print.
2. On the File menu, click Print.
3. Click the Print Document tab.
4. Click Section.
CAUTION:Do not click all or you will print the entire infobase.
5. Click OK.
389
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
How do I export a section of the infobase to a word
processing file?
1. In the Table of Contents, select the check box of the section that you
want to export.
2. On the File menu, click Export.
3. In the Save In list, select the save location.
4. In the File name box, type a name.
5. In the Save as type list, select a file type.
6. In the Export Range list, select Checked Branches.
7. Click Export.
How do I search the entire infobase?
1. Click Advanced Query
.
2. In the Query For box, type your search criteria.
3. Click OK.
To view the next hit, click Next Hit
To view the previous hit, click Previous Hit
390
.
.
Folio Views (E-Docs) Tips
How do I search a section of the infobase?
1. In the Table of Contents, select the check box of the section that you
want to search.
2. Click Advanced Query
.
3. In the Query For box, type your search criteria.
4. Ensure that the Checked branches check box is selected.
5. Click OK.
To view the next hit, click Next Hit
.
to view the previous hit, click Previous Hit
.
391
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
392
Index
Numerics
2nd port on IP Phones,
enabling 171
6010 Teleworker Solution
programming 155
A
About advanced
troubleshooting 275
About the SX-200 ICP 8
ACD, programming datasets 147
Administrator passcode 102
Administrator’s mailbox See System
Administrator’s mailbox
Advanced installation overview 169
Air Access Points 145
Alarm devices, connecting 76
Analog Main Board, replacing 196
Analog Option Board 25
Analog Option Board, installing 38
Analog trunks
general signaling and supervision
concepts 249
programming 135
troubleshooting 249
ANI/DNIS, programming on incoming
trunks 139
antistatic wrist strap 36, 191
ASU II, installing 65
ASU, installing 63
Attendant console
connecting PKM 73
deleting 112
programming 108
Audio quality, troubleshooting 289
Auto program sets 111
B
backing up to FTP 230
Backups 199
CDE database 199
creating directories 199
DHCP server data 199
performing 199
voice mail 199
when to back up 199
Basic controller 25
Basic maintenance commands
Basic troubleshooting 235
Blank database 201
Browser requirements 27
220
C
Cabinet Configuration Rules 13, 14
Cabinet configuration rules 13
Cables, required 27
Call Forward, programming
External 160
Call logging
printer 29
Card configuration, displaying 220
CDE forms
checklist 292
database backup 199
default database
configuration 16
default database values 303
list of 301
Channel associated signaling 262
Checking
LEDs 239
maintenance logs 227
system 190
system LEDs 235, 275
Checklist
CDE forms 292
installation 26
IP 294
system health 189
CIM
Peripheral Cabinet 56
Quad CIM Module 25
CIM, port pinout 373
Circuit descriptor, programming for
Hotel/Motel 147
CLASS trunks, programming 143
Clock Module 25
installing 47
393
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
replacing 198
Command sequences, entering 218
Commands, maintenance
report 224
system 220
traffic measurement 226
Common channel signaling 262
CompactFlash card
loading software on 34
Computer
configuring for connection 67
configuring Windows 2000 DHCP
server 178, 180
connecting to Maintenance
port 84
requirements 27, 84
Connecting phones and lines 67
Connectivity, IP phones
troubleshooting 278
Connectors
controller 23
required 27
Console See Attendant console
Contacting Mitel 6
Controller
Analog Main Board 196
Analog Option Board 25, 38
basic configuration 25
CIM pinout 373
Clock Module 25, 47, 198
components 24
connecting to computer 84
DHCP settings 178
displaying card configuration 220
DSP Module 40, 198
Dual FIM Module 42, 198
Dual T1/E1 Framer Module 44
Dual/Quad DSP MMC 25
Ethernet cable 21
front panel 23
hard drive 45, 195
hardware 23
installing 30
IP address 178
394
LEDs 239
maintenance port 218
optional hardware 25, 36
powering down 192
powering up 192
Quad CIM Module 43
rack mounting 52
rear panel 23
relay pinouts 372
remote upgrade 206
removing top cover 37
system identity 220
system reset 193
Telnet connection 85
wall mounting 48
Web Interface connection 86
Copper Interface Module See CIM
COS options
Hotel/Motel 153
NSU 117, 130
Record a Call 101
Cover, removing 37
Customer data, programming 84
D
D4 DS-1 See T1 trunk
Database
default configuration 16
default values 303
installing an alternate
database 201
programming 84
Dataset printer, programming
port 109
Debug option, phone 238
Default database
values 301
Default database values 303
Deleting devices 112
DHCP
backing up server 199
configuring Windows 2000
server 178, 180
controller settings 178
Index
one DHCP server for multiple
VLANS 177
one server for two VLANs 175
one server per VLAN 172
router on a stick 177
Diagnostic Function
Commands 228
Dial-in trunks, programming 137
DID/loop trunk, troubleshooting 255
Direct inward dialing See DID/loop
trunk
Directories, for backups 199
Directory voice prompt 107
DISA trunks, programming 138
Distortion, measuring on LS
lines 215
DNIC
phones and lines 67
pinouts 67
programming DNIC circuits 108
DNIS 139
Documentation set 4, 5
documents on CD-ROM 4
Folio Views 390
helpful websites 6
printed documents 4
Release Notes 4
Technical Bulletins 5
technical training material 4
Door opener 74
Door sense, port pinout 372
DSP Configuration Options 12
DSP MMC 25
DSP Module
installing 40
replacing 198
Dual FIM Module 25
installing 42
replacing 198
Dual T1/E1 Framer 134
Dual T1/E1 Framer Module
installing 44
programming 134
E
E&M trunk
troubleshooting 257
type I 257
type V 259
Ear and mouth trunk See E&M trunk
emailing 230
Embedded PRI
programming 129
Embedded voice mail See Voice mail
enabling PC port 171
Ethernet cable 21
Ethernet switch, installing 31
Exporting Folio Views sections 390
Extension number, four-digits 201
External Call Forward,
programming 160
F
FAC See Feature Access Codes
Feature Access Codes
Phonebook 107
Send Message 101
Features
Phonebook 107
programming phone features 90
Record a Call 100
Fiber Interface Module See FIM
Fiber optic cables
FIM 385
guidelines for handling 385
FIM
about 385
Dual FIM Module 25
operation 386
Peripheral Cabinet 56
Firmware, upgrading set
firmware 213
Folio Views
about 390
exporting sections 390
printing sections 389
searching 390
395
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Forms
checklist 292
database backup 199
default database
configuration 16
default database values 303
list of 301
FRUsSee Part Numbers
FTP
backing up to remote server 199
setting up server 77
G
General network
troubleshooting 276
General signalling and supervision
concepts 249
General troubleshooting steps 238
Greetings
assigning RAD greetings to
ports 100
recording RAD greetings 99
Ground start trunk,
troubleshooting 253
Grounding stud 30
Guidelines
handling fiber optic cables 385
H
Handling PCB cards 36, 191
Hard drive
installing 45
replacing 195
Hardware
Analog Option Board 38
ASU 63
ASU II 65
cabinet control cards 60
CIM, Peripheral Cabinet 56
Clock Module 47
computer 27
computer requirements 84
controller 23
controller hard drive 45
396
digital services cards and
modules 60
DSP Module 40
Dual FIM Module 42
Dual T1/E1 Framer Module 44
FIM, Peripheral Cabinet 56
hard drive 45
interface cards and modules 58
Music on Hold 74
NSU 53
optional hardware 36
overview 23
paging/door opener 74
Peripheral Cabinet 56
ports and connectors 23
Quad CIM Module 43
rack mounting controller/NSU 52
requirements 26
wall mounting controller 48
Health, system health checklist 189
Hotel/Motel
COS options 153
PMS messages 268
programming circuit
descriptor 147
troubleshooting 268
Hubs 31
Hunt group
assigning voice mail ports 100
naming 100
Phonebook 107
I
I & M Course 3
IMAT 121
Online Help 4
Indicators, description 235, 275
initialize system 194
Installation
Advanced installation
overview 169
alternate database 201
Analog Option Board 38
ASU 63
Index
ASU II 65
before you start 21
checklist 26
Clock Module 47
controller hard drive 45
DSP Module 40
Dual FIM Module 42
Dual T1/E1 Framer Module 44
FTP server 77
handling PCB cards 36, 191
IP Phones 68
Music on Hold 74
NSU 53
ONS/CLASS phones and
lines 67
overview 29
paging/door opener 74
Peripheral Cabinet 56
phones and lines 67
PKM 70
Quad CIM Module 43
quick installation 21
quick installation tool 67
requirements 26
setting up a customer LAN 21
tools 26
verifying installation 79
Installing 201
IP address
programming controller’s 178
requirements 28
IP address, static
assigning to IP phones 285
programming NSU’s 122
removing from IP phone 287
IP checklist 294
IP networking, configuration
questions 170
IP Phone Analyzer 287
IP phones See Phones
IP ports, used by controller 87
IP trunks, troubleshooting 292
ISDN Maintenance and
Administration Tool See IMAT
K
Kermit
using for backups 199
using to back up log and trap
files 229, 231
Knowledge Base 5
L
LAN
guidelines 21
one DHCP server for multiple
VLANS 177
one DHCP server for two
VLANs 175
one DHCP server per VLAN 172
requirements 28
router on a stick 177
setting up a customer LAN 21
virtual LANs (VLANs) 172
Layer 2 switch, installing 31
LEDs
checking 239
controller 239
meaning 235, 275
NSU 241
Light bulb symbol 7
Lights, controller front panel 235,
275
LIGHTWARE certification 3
Lines 144, 215
connecting 67
controller port pinouts 67
installing 67
loop start 250
requirements 27
List of forms 301
Loading software on CompactFlash
card 34
Local Area Network See LAN
Logging in 219
Logging out 219
Logs 230
commands 220
emailing 230
397
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
maintenance logs 227
Loop start line/trunk,
troubleshooting 250
Loss levels, measuring on LS
lines 215
LS Measurement Tool 215
LS/CLASS
phones and lines 67
pinouts 67
M
Mailboxes, naming 107
Maintenance
backups 199
checking the system 190
Diagnostic Function
commands 228
displaying card configuration 220
entering commands 218
installing an alternate
database 201
log commands 227
logging in 219
logging out 219
logs commands 220
maintenance port 218
powering down system 192
powering up system 192
replacing IP phones 208, 212
report commands 224
system commands 220
system health checklist 189
system identity 220
Telnet requirements 218
tips 230, 231
traffic measurement
commands 226
upgrading set firmware 213
upgrading system software 202
Manager passcode 102
Manual Maker, creating user
guides 6
measuring loop start 144, 215
measuring LS 144, 215
398
Message length timer 100
Mitel
contacting 6
Mitel Knowledge Base 5
Mitel Networks
Customer Documentation 6
Order Desk 6
Repair Department 6
Return of Merchandise
Authorization (RMA) 6
subscription service 206
Technical Support 7
Mitel Online
accessing 5
downloading a document 5
Manual Maker 6
Mitel Options Password 6
product and technical
documentation 5
registered user 5
viewing a document 5
Mitel Options Password 6
Mode, key system or PBX 79
MOH See Music on Hold
MOSS options
enabling 88
NSU 118
Multi-line sets See Phones
Music on Hold 74
source 28
N
Network
checklist 276
configuration questions 170
configuring Windows 2000 DHCP
server 178, 180
connecting computer to
controller 84
helpful websites 6
hubs 31
installing Layer 2 switch 31
line requirements 27
Index
one DHCP server for multiple
VLANS 177
one DHCP server for two
VLANs 175
one DHCP server per VLAN 172
requirements 28
router on a stick 177
setting up FTP server 77
Telnet connection to
controller 85
Telnet requirements 218
troubleshooting 276
virtual LANs (VLANs) 172
Web Interface connection to
controller 86
Network analyzer 278
Night Bells 76
Non dial-in trunks,
programming 135
NSU
COS options 117, 130
DIP switch 54
Dual FIM Module 25
installing 53
LEDs 241
MOSS options 118
powering down 192
powering up 192
programming static IP
address 122
rack mounting 52
T1 pinouts 54
troubleshooting 247
O
ONS/CLASS
installing phones and lines 67
pinouts 67
ports 67
Option modules 30
Order Desk 6
P
Paging 74
pinouts 372
Panel indicators 235, 275
Part Numbers
Part numbers 355
Passcode
Administrator’s passcode 102
default passcodes 102
Manager passcode 102
Password See Passcode
PC port
enabling on IP Phones 171
PC See Computer
PCB cards, handling 36, 191
PDF documents, downloading 5
Peripheral Cabinet
cabinet control cards 60
CIM 56
configuration rules 61
digital services cards and
modules 60
Dual FIM Module 25
FIM 56
installing 56
interface cards and modules 58
pinout 377
powering down 192
powering up 192
programming PRI card 116
Quad CIM Module 25
Peripheral Cabinet, SX-200 EL 26
Peripherals, troubleshooting 244
Phonebook
directory voice prompt 107
Feature Access Code 107
naming mailboxes 107
programming 107
voice mail hunt group 107
Phones 171
assigning static IP
addresses 285
attendant consoles 108
audio quality 289
auto program 111
connecting 67
399
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
controller port pinouts 67
debug option 238
default database
configuration 16
deleting 112
four-digits extension number 201
installing 67
network analyzer 278
PKM 70
programmable keys 92, 93
programming analog devices to
SIM2 116
programming features 90
programming multi-line sets 115
registration 279
removing static IP address 287
replacing IP phones 208, 212
restarting 213
subattendant sets 108
Symbol MiNET Wireless
Phones 145
Symbol Netvision MiNET
Phone 4
troubleshooting 244
troubleshooting IP phone
connectivity 278
twinning Symbol phone 146
upgrading set firmware 213
Pinouts
controller CIM port 373
controller relay 372
DNIC 67
LS/CLASS 67
NSU T1 54
ONS/CLASS 67
paging/door sense 372
Peripheral Cabinet 377
SX-200 EL/ML 377
SX-200 EL/ML universal
card 379
PKM
connecting to attendant
console 73
installing 70
400
programmable keys 94
PMS
5-digit extension number 269
can’t communicate with PBX 271
message 268
message format 269
programming interface 149
testing PBX interface 271
troubleshooting 268
Ports
CIM 373
connecting computer to
controller 84
controller 23
DNIC 67
LS/CLASS 67
maintenance port 218
ONS/CLASS 67
paging/door 372
programming printer ports 109
relay connector 372
serial port converter 149
used by controller 87
Power
LED meaning 235, 275
powering down system 192
powering up system 191
Power Fail Transfer 67
Premier 21, 30
Premier Business systems 21, 30
Premier database 201
PRI card
programming in Peripheral
Cabinet 116
Printed Circuit Board See PCB cards
Printed documents 4
Printer, programming ports 109
Printing Folio views sections 389
Product and technical
documentation 5
Programmable Key Module See PKM
Programmable keys, phones 92, 93
Programmable keys, PKMs 94
Programming 134
Index
6010 Teleworker Solution 155
ACD dataset 147
analog device to SIM2 116
analog trunks 135
ANI/DNIS On Incoming
Trunks 139
attendant console 108
auto program sets 111
CLASS trunks 143
computer requirements 84
customer data 84
deleting device 112
dial-in trunks 137
DISA trunks 138
DNIC circuits 108
Embedded PRI 129
enabling MOSS options 88
External Call Forward 160
FTP server 77
Hotel/Motel circuit descriptor 147
multi-line set 115
Music on Hold 74
non dial-in trunks 135
paging/door opener 74
phone features 90
Phonebook 107
PMS Interface 149
PRI card, Peripheral Cabinet 116
printer ports 109
RAD 99
Record a Call 100
single line voice station 114
Spectralink Wireless
Telephones 155
static address, IP phones 285
static IP address, NSU 122
Subattendant set 108
Telnet connection to
controller 85
voice mail 96
Web Interface connection to
controller 86
Windows 2000 DHCP
server 178, 180
Property Management System See
PMS
Q
QSIG
programming PRI card 116
Quad CIM Module 25
installing 43
Quad DSP MMC 25
Questions, network planning 170
Quick installation 21
running tool 67
R
RAC See Record a Call
Rack mounting 30
controller/NSU 52
ventilation 52
RAD
assign greetings to ports 100
enabling 99
message length timer 100
naming hunt groups 100
programming 99
record greetings 99
Radio See Music on Hold
Range programming
deleting 112
dial-in trunks 138
non dial-in trunks 136
Record a Call
assigning voice mail ports 101
COS options 101
Feature Access Code 101
programming 100
Record RAD greetings 99
Recorded Announcement Device
See RAD
Registered user 5
Registration, troubleshooting IP
phone 279
Relay connector pinout 372
Release Notes 4
Repair Department 6
401
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
Repairs See Troubleshooting
Replacing
Analog Main Board 196
Clock Module 198
DSP Module 198
Dual FIM 198
hard drive 195
IP phones 208, 212
Reset system 193
Restarting IP Phones 213
Return of Merchandise Authorization
(RMA) 6
S
S1 Switch Setting 262
Safety Instructions 4, 7
Searching Folio Views 390
Serial port converter 149
Server
one DHCP server for multiple
VLANS 177
one DHCP server for two
VLANs 175
one DHCP server per VLAN 172
router on a stick 177
setting up FTP server 77
Shutdown, system 193
Signaling
channel associated 262
common channel 262
Signaling and supervision, general
concepts 249
SIM2, programming analog
device 116
Single Line Voice Station,
programming 114
SMDR
printer 29
Software
computer 27
computer requirements 84
enabling MOSS options 88
loading on CompactFlash
card 34
402
log commands 227
phone features 90
requirements 26
upgrading system software 202
voice mail 96
Software upgrade
before starting 4
Mitel Options Password 6
Speak@Ease 107
Specifications, ambient
temperature 52
Spectralink Wireless Telephones
programming 155
Starting the system 191
States of LEDs 235, 275
Static IP address See IP address
Station Message Detail Recording
See SMDR
Status LEDs 235, 275
Stop symbol 7
Stratum Clock See Clock Module
Stud, grounding 30
Subattendant set
allowable device types 108
deleting 112
programming 108
Subscription service 206
SUPERCONSOLE 1000 See
Attendant console
Surge protection 28
SX-200 EL Peripheral Cabinet 26
SX-200 EL/ML
pinouts 377
universal card pinout 379
SX-200 EL/ML, migrating to an
SX-200 ICP MX 208
SX-200 ICP See System
Symbol phones See Phones
Symbols, meaning of 7
System
about the system 8
backups 199
checking 190
checking LEDs 239
Index
commands 220
configuration 8, 25
controller 30
default database
configuration 17
displaying card configuration 220
forms default database
values 303
four-digits extension number 201
general signaling and supervision
concepts 249
guidelines for handling fiber optic
cables 385
hardware 23
hardware requirements 26
initialization 194
installation overview 29
list of forms 301
maintenance commands 220,
224, 226
maintenance tips 231
optional components 25
phones and lines 67
powering down 192
powering up 191, 192
remote upgrade 206
shutdown 193
software requirements 26
SX-200 EL Peripheral
Cabinet 26
system identity 220
system reset 193
upgrading 191
upgrading software 202
verifying installation 79
System Administrator’s mailbox 99,
102
accessing 102
default passcodes 102
menu 104
passcodes 102
System Fail Transfer 67
System health checklist 189
System Printer, programming
port 109
T
T1 trunk
A&B bits 264
A-B signaling states 264
loopback 263
NSU pinouts 54
signaling types 262
synchronization 261
troubleshooting 261
T1/E1
Dual T1/E1 Framer Module 25
T1/E1 Module 25
Tape player See Music on Hold
TB See Technical Bulletins
Technical Bulletins 5
Technical Documentation 4
Technical Support 7
before you call 237
Technical terms, helpful websites 6
Technical training material 4
Technician, requirements 3
Technician’s Handbook 4
about 3
audience 3
safety instructions 7
symbols used in 7
Teleworker See 6010 Teleworker
Solution
Telnet
connecting to controller 85
requirements 218
Temperature in rack mount,
maximum 52
Templates for mounting units 30
Testing
PBX-PMS interface 271
voice mail operation 106
Tip and ring assignment See Pinouts
Tips, maintenance 230
Tools
installation 26
403
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook
running quick installation tool 67
troubleshooting 236
Trap files 230
backing up to FTP 230
backing up using Kermit 229
Troubleshooting
about advanced
troubleshooting 275
about basic troubleshooting 235
analog trunks 249
checking LEDs 239
DID/loop trunk 255
E&M trunk 257
general steps 238
ground start trunk 253
Hotel/Motel 268
IP phone connectivity 278
IP phone registration 279
IP trunks 292
loop start line/trunk 250
network 276
NSU 247
phone audio quality 289
phone debug option 238
phones and peripherals 244
PMS 268
sniffer 278
T1 trunk 261
Technical Support 7
testing voice mail operation 106
tools 236
voice mail 266
Trunks 144, 215
analog trunks 135, 249
ANI/DNIS 139
CLASS trunks 143
default database
configuration 17
dial-in trunks 137
DID/loop 255
DISA trunks 138
E&M 257
general signaling and supervision
concepts 249
404
ground start trunk 253
IP trunks 292
loop start 250
non dial-in trunks 135
signaling 250
T1 trunk 261
U
Upgrading
hard drive 45
Release 1.x systems 203
remotely 206
set firmware 213
system 191
User Guides, creating using Manual
Maker 6
V
Verifying system installation 79
Viewing or downloading a
document 5
Virtual LAN (VLAN) See LAN 172
Virtual Private Network (VPN) See
Networking
Voice mail
Administrator’s mailbox 102
assigning ports to hunt
groups 100
assigning RAC ports 101
backups 199
default database
configuration 17
default passcodes 102
passcodes 102
Phonebook hunt group 107
programming 96
System Administrator’s mailbox
menu 104
testing operation 106
troubleshooting 266
Voice station, programming 114
Voice-only system 3
Index
W
Wall mounting controller 48
Web Interface
connecting to controller 86
Websites, helpful 6
Wireless phones See Phones
Wireless Telephones See Spectralink
Wireless Telephones
Y
Yield symbol 7
405
®,™ Trademark of Mitel Networks Corporation
© Copyright 2006, Mitel Networks Corporation
All rights reserved
Download PDF